Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
User Manual
IPM
PROSPER
Version 10
May 2008
PROSPER
IPM - Single Well Model OVERVIEW
by Petroleum Experts Limited
PROSPER is a well performance, design and optimisation program which is part of the
Integrated Production Modelling Toolkit (IPM). This tool is the industry standard well
modelling with the major operators worldwide.
PROSPER is designed to allow the building of reliable and consistent well models, with the
ability to address each aspect of well bore modelling VIZ, PVT (fluid characterisation), VLP
correlations (for calculation of flow-line and tubing pressure loss) and IPR (reservoir
inflow).
PROSPER provides unique matching features, which tune PVT, multiphase flow
correlations and IPR to match measured field data, allowing a consistent well model to be
built prior to use in prediction (sensitivities or artificial lift design). PROSPER enables
detailed surface pipeline performance and design: Flow Regimes, pipeline stability, Slug
Size andFrequency
APPLICATIONS
Design and optimise well completions including multi-lateral, multilayer and horizontal
wells
Design and optimise tubing and pipeline sizes
Design, diagnose and optimise Gas lifted, Hydraulic pumps and ESP wells
Generate lift curves for use in simulators
Calculate pressure losses in wells, flow lines and across chokes
Predict flowing temperatures in wells and pipelines
Monitor well performance to rapidly identify wells requiring remedial action
Calculate total skin and determine breakdown (damage, deviation or
partial penetration)
Unique black oil model for retrograde condensate fluids, accounting
for liquid dropout in the wellbore
Allocate production between wells
3
Copyright Notice
The copyright in this manual and the associated computer program are the property of Petroleum Experts
Ltd. All rights reserved. Both, this manual and the computer program have been provided pursuant to a
Licence Agreement containing restriction of use.
No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical or
otherwise, or disclose to third parties without prior written consent from Petroleum Experts Ltd., Spectrum
House, 2 Powderhall Road, Edinburgh, EH7 4GB, Scotland, UK.
IPM Suite, GAP, PROSPER, MBAL, PVTP, REVEAL, RESOLVE, IFM and OpenServer are trademarks of
Petroleum Experts Ltd.
Microsoft (Windows), Windows (NT), Windows (2000) and Windows (XP) are registered trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation
The software described in this manual is furnished under a licence agreement. The software may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on
any medium except as specifically allowed in the license agreement. No part of this documentation may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording, or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser's personal
use, unless express written consent has been given by Petroleum Experts Limited.
Address:
email: edinburgh@petex.com
Internet: www.petex.com
Table of Contents
0
Chapter 1 Introduction 2
1 Using PROSPER
................................................................................................................................... 2
2 PROSPER and...................................................................................................................................
Systems Analysis 4
About PROSPER
.......................................................................................................................................................... 6
3 Examples ................................................................................................................................... 8
Options .......................................................................................................................................................... 35
PVT Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Equipment Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 41
IPR Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 48
3 Matching of the
...................................................................................................................................
model to a test 52
VLP Matching.......................................................................................................................................................... 53
IPR Matching.......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Checking.........................................................................................................................................................
the Model for High Rate Test 67
4 Running Calculations
................................................................................................................................... 68
Performing a ..........................................................................................................................................................
System Analysis 69
Calculating Gradient
..........................................................................................................................................................
Traverses 76
Generating VLP
..........................................................................................................................................................
Curves for Simulators 79
II
III PROSPER
Reservoir .......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Type ......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Gas Coning......................................................................................................................................................... 96
User Information
..........................................................................................................................................................
and Comments 96
Temperature..........................................................................................................................................................
Survey 148
Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 149
2 Predicting Pressure
...................................................................................................................................
and Temperature 151
Rough Approximation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 151
Deviation .........................................................................................................................................................
Survey 151
Surface .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 151
Downhole .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 152
Geothermal.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient 152
Average.........................................................................................................................................................
Heat Capacities 153
Enthalpy Balance
.......................................................................................................................................................... 154
Deviation .........................................................................................................................................................
Survey 155
Surface .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 155
Downhole .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 158
Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 160
Drilling and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Completion 161
Lithology......................................................................................................................................................... 162
Databases ......................................................................................................................................................... 163
Improved Approximation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 165
Deviation .........................................................................................................................................................
Survey 166
Surface .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 166
Downhole .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 167
Geothermal.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient 167
Sea Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient 168
IV
V PROSPER
Data Entry
......................................................................................................................................................... 195
Using Relative
..........................................................................................................................................................
Permeabilities in PROSPER 196
Coning Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 200
3 IPR for Gas...................................................................................................................................
and Retrograde Condensate 201
Jones .......................................................................................................................................................... 201
Forchheimer.......................................................................................................................................................... 202
Back Pressure.......................................................................................................................................................... 202
C and n .......................................................................................................................................................... 202
Multi-rate C and
..........................................................................................................................................................
n 203
Multi-rate Jones
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
External Entry
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Petroleum Experts
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Hydraulically..........................................................................................................................................................
Fractured Well 205
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
- No-Flow Boundaries 205
Multi-layer Inflow
.......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
- dP Friction Loss in Wellbore 206
Dual Porosity.......................................................................................................................................................... 206
Horizontal Well
..........................................................................................................................................................
with Transverse Vertical Fractures 206
Multi-Layer -..........................................................................................................................................................
dP Loss in Wellbore 206
Modified Isochronal
..........................................................................................................................................................
Inflow Model 206
Forchheimer..........................................................................................................................................................
with Pseudo Pressure 208
Multirate Forchheimer
..........................................................................................................................................................
with Pseudo Pressure 208
4 Skin Models................................................................................................................................... 208
Mechanical/Geometrical
..........................................................................................................................................................
Skin 208
Deviation/Partial
..........................................................................................................................................................
Penetration Skin 213
5 Gravel Packed
...................................................................................................................................
Completions 214
Gravel Pack ..........................................................................................................................................................
Completion Velocities 217
6 Viscosity Modelling
................................................................................................................................... 218
7 Compaction...................................................................................................................................
Permeability Reduction 219
8 Injection Wells
................................................................................................................................... 221
9 SkinAide ................................................................................................................................... 222
SkinAide Theoretical
..........................................................................................................................................................
Background 222
Position .........................................................................................................................................................
of the producing interval with respect to reservoir geometry 222
Interference
.........................................................................................................................................................
between perforations and the damaged zone 223
The Crushed
.........................................................................................................................................................
Zone 224
Perforation
.........................................................................................................................................................
tunnel which penetrates the formation 224
Perforation
.........................................................................................................................................................
tunnel through the casing and cement 225
Annulus.........................................................................................................................................................
between Casing and Screen 225
Hemispherical
.........................................................................................................................................................
Flow Model 226
Using SkinAide
.......................................................................................................................................................... 227
Flow Model......................................................................................................................................................... 227
Skin Model......................................................................................................................................................... 228
Perforation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 228
Geometry ......................................................................................................................................................... 228
Petrophysics
......................................................................................................................................................... 230
Damaged .........................................................................................................................................................
Zone 231
Cased Hole......................................................................................................................................................... 232
Crushed.........................................................................................................................................................
Zone 232
Perforations
......................................................................................................................................................... 234
10 Multi-Lateral...................................................................................................................................
Interface 240
Network Interface
.......................................................................................................................................................... 240
Contents VI
Motivation
......................................................................................................................................................... 240
Interface.........................................................................................................................................................
Overview 240
Network Window ......................................................................................................................................... 241
The Navigator Window ......................................................................................................................................... 244
Toolbar Details......................................................................................................................................... 245
Network Manipulation ......................................................................................................................................... 246
Menu Details ......................................................................................................................................... 246
Visualisation Screens ......................................................................................................................................... 249
Data Entry .......................................................................................................................................................... 250
Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 250
Tie-point.........................................................................................................................................................
and Junction Data 251
Tubing Data
......................................................................................................................................................... 251
Completion
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 251
Reservoir.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 252
Example of How
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Set Up a Simple System 252
Introduction
......................................................................................................................................................... 252
Place the.........................................................................................................................................................
Nodes in the Network Window 253
Connect.........................................................................................................................................................
the Nodes 253
Enter the.........................................................................................................................................................
Data 254
Visualise.........................................................................................................................................................
/ Calculate 255
VI
VII PROSPER
6 QuickLook for
...................................................................................................................................
ESP 298
Input .......................................................................................................................................................... 298
Performing the
..........................................................................................................................................................
QuickLook Calculation 300
7 QuickLook for
...................................................................................................................................
HSP 302
Input .......................................................................................................................................................... 303
Performing the
..........................................................................................................................................................
QuickLook Calculation 304
8 Vertical Pipe
...................................................................................................................................
Parameters 307
9 Surface Flow
...................................................................................................................................
line Parameters 307
10 Correlation ...................................................................................................................................
Thresholds 307
VIII
IX PROSPER
Pump database
......................................................................................................................................................... 438
Adding a New Pump ......................................................................................................................................... 439
Sucker Rods
.........................................................................................................................................................
Database 439
Adding a New Sucker .........................................................................................................................................
Rod 440
Example 1 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Gas Lift Design 482
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
Up 483
Edit IPR.........................................................................................................................................................
Model 484
Setting up.........................................................................................................................................................
the Gas Lift Design Parameters 484
Calculating
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sensitivities 490
Example 2 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Well and Flow line Modelling 494
Calculating
.........................................................................................................................................................
the System Solution 496
Plotting the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Profile 498
Example 3 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Prediction 499
Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction Model Set up 500
Defining.........................................................................................................................................................
the Equipment Data 502
Calculation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Section 507
Example 4 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
ESP Lifted Well 514
Model Setup
......................................................................................................................................................... 515
Designing .........................................................................................................................................................
the pump 517
Checking .........................................................................................................................................................
the design for different conditions. 521
Example 5 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
HSP Lifted Well 524
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
up 525
Designing .........................................................................................................................................................
The Pump 526
Checking .........................................................................................................................................................
the Design for Changed Conditions 528
Example 6 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Jet Pump Design 531
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
up 532
PVT Section
......................................................................................................................................................... 532
Inflow performance
.........................................................................................................................................................
relationship 541
Downhole .........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment 542
Jet Pump .........................................................................................................................................................
Design Calculation 543
Example 7 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Retrograde Condensate Well 547
EoS Condensate
.........................................................................................................................................................
model 548
Entering EOS PVT ......................................................................................................................................... 548
Matching Menu.........................................................................................................................................
/ Correlation Selection 551
Black Oil.........................................................................................................................................................
Condensate PVT 553
Selecting the Options ......................................................................................................................................... 554
Matching/ Correlation .........................................................................................................................................
Selection 555
Example 8 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Gravel Packed Gas Well 557
Gravel Pack
.........................................................................................................................................................
model Set Up 557
Options .........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 557
PVT menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 558
System Menu
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Equip & Inflow) 559
Sensitivity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation Menu 563
Example 9 - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Horizontal Well - Friction dP 568
Horizontal.........................................................................................................................................................
well Model Set Up 568
Horizontal.........................................................................................................................................................
well IPR Data 568
Coning Calculations
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Horizontal Wells 571
Example 10 -..........................................................................................................................................................
Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss 574
Multilayer.........................................................................................................................................................
Dp Loss Model Set up 575
Multilayer.........................................................................................................................................................
Dp Loss IPR Data Input 575
STEP1: Defining .........................................................................................................................................
the top of the multi-layer system 576
STEP2: Defining .........................................................................................................................................
the to Top Producing layer 576
STEP3: Defining .........................................................................................................................................
the non producing zone 577
STEP4: Defining .........................................................................................................................................
the to Bottom Producing layer 577
Multilayer.........................................................................................................................................................
Dp Loss Calculation System 580
Example 11-Multilateral
..........................................................................................................................................................
well 584
Options ......................................................................................................................................................... 585
PVT section
......................................................................................................................................................... 586
X
XI PROSPER
Equipment .........................................................................................................................................................
Data 587
Multilateral
.........................................................................................................................................................
IPR 591
Multilateral IPR.........................................................................................................................................
Input section 595
Multilateral IPR.........................................................................................................................................
calculations 610
Multilateral
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation System 614
Example 12 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Water injection well 619
Example 13 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Multilateral oil well 632
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
up Multilateral oil well 635
Calculations
.........................................................................................................................................................
Multilateral oil well 647
Example 14 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- PCP lifted well design 652
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well design Model Set up 653
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well design Input data 653
PCP lifted well .........................................................................................................................................
Calculation System 659
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well Database 661
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well Design 666
PCP lifted.........................................................................................................................................................
well Calculation System 670
Example 15 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Condensate Black Oil Model Validation 674
Objectives......................................................................................................................................................... 675
Model Set .........................................................................................................................................................
Up 675
Gradient.........................................................................................................................................................
Traverse Calculation using the EOS 677
Black Oil.........................................................................................................................................................
Model Validation 680
Example 16 ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Sucker rod pump 680
Example 17 -..........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis of a gas lifted well using VLP/IPR matching and QuickLook 699
Gas lift well
.........................................................................................................................................................
analysis Model 700
Gas lift well
.........................................................................................................................................................
analysis VLP/IPR matching 704
Gas lift well
.........................................................................................................................................................
analysis Calculation System 713
2 B - References
................................................................................................................................... 718
PVT Calculations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 718
CO2 Injection
......................................................................................................................................................... 720
PVT Separator
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure 720
IPR Calculations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 721
Multiphase Flow..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculations 722
Temperature..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculations 723
Artificial Lift..........................................................................................................................................................
Design 724
3 C - Equations
................................................................................................................................... 724
Black Oil Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
for Condensate 724
Mass Balance
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculations 725
Using the.........................................................................................................................................................
mass balance results to define Condensate Model 728
Estimation
.........................................................................................................................................................
of CGRmin 729
Multiphase Pseudo
..........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure 730
Temperature..........................................................................................................................................................
Models 732
Rough Approximation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Model 732
Overall Heat Transfer .........................................................................................................................................
Coefficient 733
Enthalpy.........................................................................................................................................................
Balance 734
Default Thermal .........................................................................................................................................
Properties Database 739
Choke Calculation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 740
Multi-Phase ..........................................................................................................................................................
Flow Correlations 741
4 D - Dietz Shape
...................................................................................................................................
Factors 742
5 E - File Formats
................................................................................................................................... 743
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................................... 743
External PVT..........................................................................................................................................................
Tables 743
Lift Curves .......................................................................................................................................................... 744
IPR .......................................................................................................................................................... 745
Contents XII
XII
XIII PROSPER
1
2 PROSPER
1 Introduction
By separately modelling each component of the producing well system, then allowing the
User to verify each model subsystem by performance matching, PROSPER ensures that
the calculations are as accurate as possible. Once a system model has been tuned to real
field data, PROSPER can be confidently used to model the well in different scenarios and
to make forward predictions of reservoir pressure based on surface production data.
2. Its PVT section which can generate fluid properties using standard correlations and
allows them to be modified to better fit measured lab data. PROSPER allows detailed
PVT data in the form of tables to be imported for use in the calculations. A third
option is to use the Equation of State method. This option also allows the User to
enter the equation of state model parameters and uses the standard Peng-Robinson
EOS model to generate properties given a multi-stage separator scheme. With this
option the Users can also import all PVT data in the form of tables, which could have
been generated using their own proprietary EOS models.
3. The tool can be used to model reservoir inflow performance (IPR) for single,
multilayer, or multilateral wells with complex and highly deviated completions,
optimising all aspects of a completion design including perforation details and gravel
packing.
5. The sensitivity calculations capabilities easily allow the engineer to model and
optimise tubing, choke and surface flow line performance.
6. It can be used to design, optimise and troubleshoot gas lifted, coiled tubing, ESP,
PCP, HSP (hydraulic pump), Jet pump and Sucker Rod pump equipped wells.
7. Its choke calculator can be used to predict flow rates given the choke size, or the
choke size for a specified production rate and of course, the pressure drop across a
known choke at a specified rate. It can also be used to generate choke performance
curves.
9. The tool can utilise externally programmed dynamic link libraries (DLL) for
multiphase flow correlations, Equation of State (EOS) PVT calculations, choke
calculations, Inflow (IPR) models, HSP Gas De-Rating models and proprietary
viscosity models (both Newtonian and Non-Newtonian) .
10. The tool can be used in a matching or predictive mode. Matching of real data is
available in the PVT, IPR, Gradient matching and VLP matching sections.
In matching mode, real data can be entered and matched using non-linear
regression methods to create custom correlations that fit the input data.
In predictive mode, the correlations created can be used to make estimates
of future well performance.
11. PROSPER can be used to model complex (topographically) and extensive (in length)
surface pipelines. Complex steady state slug analysis can also be performed by
taking into account slug build up and decay due to pipeline topography, giving an
indication of expected slug length and frequency. Pigging calculations are also
available
12. The software also accepts Black Oil PVT tables directly from Petroleum Experts
PVTP thermodynamics analysis program. EOS fluid characterisation parameters can
also be directly imported.
13. A flexible units system has been implemented. Data may be input using one set of
units and output using a second set of units. Validation limits and display resolution
can be independently set for each variable type.
14. It has the utility for flagging of potential hydrate formation, if the User chooses this in
the options. The additional input required for this calculation is the hydration
formation tables as a part of PVT. This is available in Petroleum Experts PVTP
thermodynamics analysis program.
Fluid Type:
Oil and Water (Black oil or Equation of State PVT)
Dry and Wet Gas (Black oil or Equation of State PVT)
Retrograde Condensate (Black Oil or Equation of State PVT)
Emulsion viscosity can be optionally applied for any combination of inflow,
tubing and ESPs or HSPs.
Separation mode: Single or Two Stage separation or Multistage (for
Compositional model)
Prediction Type:
Pressure Only
Pressure and Temperature Offshore
Pressure and Temperature on Land
Temperature Model:
Enthalpy Balance
Rough Approximation
Improved Approximation
Completion:
Cased Hole
Open Hole
Gravel Pack
Reservoir:
Single Well
Multi-lateral Well in a Multi-layered Reservoir
Gas Coning (Rate dependent GOR calculator)
Well potential and producing pressure losses are both dependent on fluid (PVT) properties.
The accuracy of systems analysis calculations is therefore dependent on the accuracy of the
fluid properties model (i.e. PVT). The pressure drop in a pipeline or wellbore is the
summation of 3 components:
Gravity head
Friction loss
Acceleration
i.e.
Dptotal = Dpgravity + Dp friction + Dpacceleration
The gravity component is due to the density of the fluid mixture at each point in the system
and is a complex function of the relative velocity of the phases present. PROSPER makes a
flash computation at each calculation step to determine the proportion of oil, water and gas
present. The no-slip density is then calculated using the proportions of each phase and the
predicted density at each pressure and temperature step.
Industry standard 2-phase correlations are then applied to determine the increase in
apparent fluid density due to the higher vertical velocity of gas compared to oil and water
(slippage). The gravity head loss is proportional to the fluid density corrected for slip. The
slip correction to be applied depends on the flow regime, fluid velocity etc. The need for an
accurate PVT description for predicting the gravity head loss is clear.
Friction losses are controlled by fluid viscosity and geometric factors (pipe diameter and
roughness). In the majority of oilfield applications, (i.e. large elevation difference between
inlet and outlet with liquids present) the gravitational component normally accounts for
around 90% of the overall head loss. Therefore, the total pressure drop function is not
particularly sensitive to the value of the friction loss coefficient.
The acceleration component is usually small except in systems involving significant fluid
expansion. However, it is accounted for in all PROSPER calculations.
Historically, systems analysis software has lumped all flowing pressure loss terms together
and allowed the User to match real data by adjusting the roughness coefficient of the friction
loss term. This will certainly achieve a match for a particular rate, but cannot be expected to
achieve a match over a significant range of rates due to the different dependencies of the
gravity and friction loss terms on liquid velocity.
PROSPER's approach is to first construct a robust PVT model for the reservoir fluid.
Entering laboratory PVT data and adjusting the correlation model until it fits the measured
data improve the accuracy of forward prediction.
Constructing an accurate PVT model confines the uncertainty in the gravity loss term to the
slip correction only.
In the VLP matching phase, PROSPER divides the total pressure loss into friction and
gravity components and uses a non-linear regression technique to separately optimise the
value of each component. Not only does the matching process result in a more accurate
model, it will quickly highlight inconsistencies in either the PVT or equipment description.
Provided sufficiently accurate field data is available, robust PVT, IPR and VLP models can
The Pressure and Temperature calculation option will generate both temperature and
pressure profiles. Three temperature models are provided. The Rough Approximation
model utilises a User-input overall heat transfer coefficient. It determines the steady state
temperature profile from the mass flow rates of oil, water and gas before commencing the
pressure loss calculations. This method runs quickly, but unless calibrated using measured
temperature data, it is not accurate.
The Enthalpy Balance model calculates the heat transfer coefficients at each calculation
step by considering heat flow and enthalpy changes. The Joule Thompson effect,
convection and radiation are modelled. These calculations require considerably more input
data than for pressure only calculations and must commence from a known temperature and
pressure (the sand face for producers, or wellhead for injectors). Computation times are
longer than for the Rough Approximation option, but this method is predictive and gives
accurate results over a wide range of conditions. The Enthalpy Balance model is
completely transient and can be used to study temperature changes over time.
Temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:
The production riser is properly accounted for by PROSPER. The User-input riser geometry
determines the heat loss coefficients calculated by the program between the seabed and
wellhead.
The Improved Approximation is a full Enthalpy Balance model, with the difference that the
heat exchange coefficient is not calculated but defined by the User along the completion.
Like the Enthalpy Balance model, the Joule Thompson effect is accounted for.
PROSPER is also able to predict condensate liquid drop out using either black oil or
compositional models.
PROSPER uses a "Smart Menu" system. Only data relevant to a particular problem need to
be entered.
The flow chart below gives an outline of the calculation steps required to carry out a simple
systems analysis using PROSPER.
1.3 Examples
To help illustrate the power of PROSPER, examples are provided with the program.
We suggest to run through them to become familiar with the program and its various
options.
A very useful Quick Start Guide will provide the User with an example showing how to build,
match and use a well model.
Several examples are described in a step-by-step fashion in the Appendix A of the present
User Guide.
All the example files related are in the folder ~\samples\PROSPER , where Petroleum
Experts software in installed. The location of this directory depends on where the program
has been installed.
2
10 PROSPER
2 File Management
This section describes the menus, options and procedures used in PROSPER to create new
files and open or save existing files. The Units system and how to define printer settings are
also outlined. The menus described in this section are the PROSPER File menu and Units
menu.
The File menu provides additional options such as defining the default data directory, as well
as the facility to establish access links to other programs running under Windows.
PROSPER will (optionally) open the last file accessed when it starts. PROSPER also
displays a file status screen that shows the application options selected in summary format:
input PVT and IPR data, the equipment type summary and the analysis output.
To protect the work, good practise is to save the data on a regular basis. This simple
procedure could potentially prevent hours of input and analysis being lost.
opens and saves a .PVT & .SIN file with the same name. GAP manipulates .ANL files to
batch calculate well lift curves.
PROSPER files are ranked by their order of input, which essentially reflects the way data
should be entered into the program, that is from the LEFT to the RIGHT of the PROSPER
menu. It is possible to note that the order of files also corresponds to options on the menu
bar as moving through the program.
The file hierarchy does not prevent the User from creating and combining any number of
input and output data files. Until the User becomes familiar with the program, we
recommend to work with *.OUT files. This can avoid confusion as the program will
automatically open and save the required data files to run a complete analysis cycle.
More experienced users can take advantage of the flexible file structure to combine the data
files from different wells. This "sharing" of data is useful in areas where wells have similar
fluid properties or reservoir IPR's. If disk space is a concern, the data contained in a .ANL
file together with its complementary .PVT and .SIN files can be used to re-create a given set
of calculation outputs, therefore avoiding the need to always save large .OUT files on disk.
For example, if one wants to run an analysis with the PVT data of Well 1, the input data
(*.SIN) data of Well 2, and the analysis data of Well 3, the following steps can be followed to
achieve that:
Open Well 2.SIN
Recall Well 1.PVT under the PVT menu.
Under the Options menu, select the processing options.
Modify the data files if necessary.
Next, select the Save As command and save the data under a new file name.
The Save command stores all the changes made in the active file. By default, the Save
command saves a file under its original name and to the drive and directory last selected. A
prompt will be displayed to select one of the following file types:
This command is the same as in any other program running under Windows and allows to
save the PROSPER model in any of the file formats (.SIN, .ANL, .OUT).
2.2 Preferences
The Preferences screen is used to customise the program to your particular requirements.
Click Preferences from the File menu to customise PROSPER. Click on the appropriate tab
at the top of the data entry section in order to change the option require. The various tabs
are described below:
This tab is used to customise the appearance of the PROSPER front screen and all data
entry (dialog) screens.
Dialog Font
This changes the font type and size used to display all data entry screens. This may be
useful to make all dialogs smaller in case of a low-resolution screen or larger to improve
readability in case of a high-resolution screen. Use the Reset button to reset the dialog
screen font to its default value.
Status Screen
Selecting On the screen status information will be continuously displayed and updated
during the program usage. Selecting Off the screen status information screen will not be
displayed (apart from whenever a new file is opened).
Font Height
If the font height is modified then an attempt is made to scale the font so that all information
displayed in each panel on the status screen will be visible. This will vary depending on the
relative size of the program window to the total screen. If the font height is not modified then
some information may not be displayed as the size of the program window is varied.
Screen Font
Use this option to change the font type and size used to display information on the status
(front) screen of the program.
Label Colour
Change the colour used to display labels on the status screen
Text Colour
Change the colour used to display text on the status screen
Background
Change the colour used for the background of the status screen
Box Colour
Change the colour used for the background of each panel on the status screen
Box Shadow
Change the colour used for the 3D shadow effect on the status screen panels
Box Highlight
Change the colour used for the 3D-highlight effect on the status screen panels
Length of FileName
Active only if the FileName Option Compact Path/File to Specified Length is selected
For all of the above Colour options the Choose button to the right will bring up a dialog
screen to select an appropriate colour.
2.2.2 File
Confirm Calculations
Switches (on or off) the message that appears at the end of any calculation function.
File Compression
Switches (on or off) file compression for PROSPER files (OUT, ANL, SIN, PVT). Default is
off. File reading and writing is slower with compression on, but less disk space is used by
the file. The user needs to decide the trade-off between speed and disk space.
2.2.3 Plot
Use this tab to set defaults for all aspects of the plot.
X Grid Blocks
Y Grid Blocks
Number of gaps between grid lines on Y-axis. (Range 1-20)
Plot Labels
Shows or hides the plot labels.
Plot Scales
Shows or hides the plot scales
Plot Legend
Shows or hides the plot legend. If the legend is hidden, the body of the plot will expand to fill
the whole window.
Scaling Method
Endpoint or rounded. Endpoint means the scales are taken from the exact extremities of
the data being plotted. Rounded means that ranges are chosen to surround the data but
with whole numbers ensured for the end points and the gridline intervals.
Mouse Readout
Switches the mouse cursor position readout no or off.
Line Thickness
To select the thickness of plotted lines
Vertical Font
Selects the default font for all vertical text (Y-axis)
Horizontal Font
Selects the default font for all horizontal text
Default Colours
Sets the default colour scheme for the plot
This tab allows to add up to four of the Users favourite or most-often used Windows
applications to the PROSPER menu. Although PROSPER has a very flexible reporting
system the User may wish to use a spreadsheet (such as EXCEL), a word processor (such
as WORD) and a presentation package (such as Power Point) to build presentation quality
reports using PROSPER output in a slick and efficient manner.
Any output (plots and reports) produced by PROSPER is automatically copied to the
Clipboard. From there it can easily be pasted into one of the above-mentioned applications
using one simple keystroke. Using the power and flexibility of the chosen application, high
quality reports and presentations can be easily prepared.
All plots can be saved in Windows Metafile format. These can be easily read by a word
processing package or presentation graphics package and give the maximum flexibility for
user customisation.
All reports can be saved in TSV (Tab Separated Variable) format using the Export facility
that means they will automatically be tabulated when read into the favourite spreadsheet.
Enter a description and a command line for each application to be added to the PROSPER
menu.
Use the Browse buttons to browse for the application require. Use the Clear buttons to
initialise the appropriate application information.
2.2.5 Limits
This tab allows the User to specify limiting values and tolerances for the following
parameters:
2.2.6 Units
This tab allows to specify the default Units Systems to use for new files.
If setting the option "Always Use Default Units" to "Yes", then the units displayed for any file
read in will always be set to the default choice, regardless of the settings in the file.
2.2.7 Equipment
This option defines the default values for the Pipeline and Tubing Roughness that
will be used in the Equipment Data.
2.2.8 Miscellaneous
The Preferences Screen is used to customise PROSPER to your particular requirements. Click on the
appropriate tab at the top of the data entry section in order to change the option you require.
This utility is also used to update the software key and to view versions. Software keys must
be updated when new programs or modules are required or the key expiry date changed.
Enter the codes you have received from Petroleum Experts from left to right beginning with
the top row. The easiest way to do this is to use the Paste button to copy the codes from the
email sent by Petroleum Experts. Press Continue to activate the codes or Cancel to quit
the code update.
When you receive new codes, always update every key that belongs to your company.
Subsequent updates may fail if all previously issued codes have not been properly entered
into the key.
You can view the software key driver versions by clicking on the Versions button. The
following screen will appear.
2.4 FileList
Use this screen to search for PROSPER files anywhere in your system.
Browse a directory and then Load Files to visualise all the PROSPER files contained within
the selected directory. Information about the files will be imported as well.
Type or Paste the OS string in the String field, then select one of basic OS commands
(DoGet, DoSet, DoCommand), if required enter the Value (valid only if using DoSet) and
click Evaluate to perform the function.
In the Returned value it is possible to read the results of the operation.
The buttons Commands, Variables and Functions will access the lists of the strings of the
commands, input/output variables and functions
NEW!!! In the string lists screen it is possible to search for strings by using the
Search function
Before a DLL can be accessed, it must first be installed into PROSPER. This is done by
clicking File User Correlations.
Select either Flow Correlation, Equation of State Model, Choke Correlation, Inflow
MODEL EXTENSION
Flow Correlation .COR
Equation of State PVTP .EOS
Model
Choke Correlation .CHK
Inflow Performance Model .RSM
HSP Gas DeRating Model .GDR
Viscosity Model .VSM
Information about particular correlations (name, phases and flow regimes modelled, etc.)
can be obtained by clicking the Info button. A screen similar to the following will be
displayed.
To print export data, select the Output menu and the Export option. Select the sections to
report on the dialogue box. The program will lead the User through a series of input screens
to set up the required report sections. From the main dialogue box, select a destination for r
data.
The appearance of printed reports is controlled by the export data set-up options that have
been set.
Select a suitable font and set the margins etc. that will be used for printed export data. Only
non-proportional fonts are allowed in reports to maintain vertical alignment of the columns.
Screen - Clicking Print after selecting this option allows to view the report on the
screen. Scroll through the data using the scrolling thumbs or arrows. When finished
viewing, click OK to return to the main menu.
All This command button is used in the Equipment and Gas Lifted (safety
equipment) option screens. It will select all input parameters and data points
for automated editing.
Calculate Performs the various calculations on the input parameters for the correlations
selected.
Cancel Returns to the previous screen. Any changes or modifications will be ignored
by the system.
Continue Continues to the next input screen. Any changes to the fields will be saved and
retained in memory for later calculations. A warning message will be displayed
when fields requiring input data are left blank.
Copy To copy existing data points, select the line entries to duplicate and click on C
opy. Next, select the destination line(s) and click on Copy again. Subsequent
line entries will be not be overwritten by this operation.
Correlations Displays the results of any matching performed under the VLP/IPR Match
option.
Delete This command button is used in the Equipment and Gas Lifted (safety
equipment) option screens. It allows to delete individual or several data points.
To delete, select the line entries to erase and click on Delete. If one wishes to
delete all existing line entries, click All and then Delete. The program will clear
the input screen.
Done Returns to the previous menu. Any changes or modifications will be retained in
memory by the program.
Edit This command button is used in the main Equipment screen. One or more
items can be modified at a time. When used with 'All', all items will be selected
for editing.
Export Brings up the Data Export interface. This will be specific to the data on the
active window.
Help Provides on screen help for PROSPER. For general information, press the
'ALT' and 'H' keys together in the Main menu, or the Index button under any
help screen. Specific help screens are also available for each window.
Import Calls up the general import interface that allows to grab data from any text file.
This button will usually be found where tabular data is to be input.
Insert This allows to add one or several data points providing there are sufficient entry
fields. Select the line number where to add a new entry and click on Insert.
The program will move existing line entries down to accommodate the inserted
line(s).
Main Returns to the Main Application Menu. Any changes or modifications will be
saved and retained in memory by the program.
Match Displays a variable screen where match data can be entered in order to adjust
existing correlations to fit real data.
Move Allows to re-arrange data points. Select the line(s) to transfer and click on Mo
ve. Next, select the destination line(s) and click on Move again. Subsequent
line entries will be moved down to accommodate the transferred line(s).
Plot Plots any calculated results and displays them on screen. Hard copies of the
screen display can be printed by selecting the Hardcopy command button on
the Plot screen.
Recall Allows to recall and existing PVTP file. The User will be prompted for the
directory and name of the file.
Report Calls up the reporting interface with a report that is specific to the active
window. This is generally found on windows that display the results of
calculations. It is then possible to choose to print this report. The report is
generated from a system report template.
Reset Resets the Match parameters in order to reinstate the original textbook
correlations.
Save Saves a current PVTP file. If this is a new data file, the User will be prompted
for a file name.
Summary Displays a summary screen of the input equipment parameters or system units.
The following command buttons are used in the Plot Menu and Plot screens.
Clipboard Sends black and white or colour copies of the screen plot to the Windows
Clipboard where it may be retrieved by a word processing program for inclusion
in reports.
Colours Allows to define the screen display colours of r plot labels, scales, grids, etc.
Hardcopy Generates black and white or colour print copies of the screen plot. It is
automatically sent to the device selected in \.
Labels Allows to label r plot. All plot labels are stored in memory and saved when
Output files are generated.
Scales Allows to re-define the minimum and maximum values for the X and Y plot
axes.
3
34 PROSPER
This chapter provides the User with an example that shows the basic features of PROSPER.
Particular focus is given to:
- Model setup and input data
- Matching and quality check of the model
- Utilising the model to determine the well performance with changing conditions,
generate flowing gradients and Vertical Lift Performance curves for GAP and a wide
range of reservoir simulators
The first 4 sections are input data screens, whilst the last contains all the calculation and
design features.
Each of these sections is directly accessible from the PROSPER main screen by double
clicking on them, or from the menu toolbar, where their access is ordered from left to right,
top to bottom. This order reflects the recommended workflow to follow to set up the model.
In the following we will use the menu toolbar.
3.2.1 Options
To begin setting up the system options, select Options Options or double-click on the
SUMMARY DATA area and make the following selections:
This completes the main system setup and re-initialises the program. If the status screen is
being displayed, the main system areas (SUMMARY DATA, PVT DATA, IPR DATA,
EQUIPMENT DATA and CALCULATION SUMMARY) can be now easily accessed.
In the following table there are the parameters characterising the Black Oil model for this
example:
% H2S 0
% CO2 0
%N2 0
The solution GOR is the gas dissolved in the oil at the original bubble point
pressure. If the well also produces free gas, it should not be included here.
In order to enter the Black Oil model, access the PVT section by selecting PVTInput Data
from the menu toolbar
In the PVT main section click Match Data and enter the laboratory measured PVT flash
In this very simple example we are entering only data referring to the bubble point, but bear
in mind that in each table data up to 10 values of pressure can be entered.
Once entered the above data, click Done to return to the main PVT Data input screen.
3. Match the PVT Black Oil correlations to the PVT match data entered and choose the
best correlation
The following step is to tune the black oil correlations in order to match the lab data entered.
In this way we make sure that the PVT model we are going to use reproduces measured
data.
To match the correlations to the laboratory measured data, from the main PVT input data
screen select Regression:
This table reports the list of match parameters for all the PVT properties for each correlation.
Please note that additional match parameters (Parameter 3 and 4) have been introduced to
allow the FVF to be independently tuned below (P1 and P2) and above (P3 and P4) the
bubble point.
The less correction a correlation requires to fit the measured data, the better it is.
In particular, the closer to 1 is Parameter 1, the better the correlation.
Note that the displayed standard deviation shows how well the matching process converges:
the higher the Standard Deviation, the worse the matching. (If the standard deviation is zero
it will be displayed as blank).
Inspecting the above reported table, Standing has for this example the best overall fit for Pb,
GOR and FVF whilst Beggs et al fits best for the oil viscosity. Therefore, Standing will be
selected to correlate Pb, GOR and FVF and Beggs et al for the oil viscosity.
Make sure that Standing and Beggs et al have been selected in the Correlations input box in
the main PVT panel:
To be noticed also the flashing green message PVT is Matched showing that the PVT
model has been matched.
The matched data can be plotted by clicking Plot from the regression menu as in the
example below:
All further calculations will be performed using the matched PVT data unless the match
parameters are subsequently reset from the Correlations menu
For this example, this is the completion to model and the Deviation Survey table:
11400 10430
The equipment to specify in PROSPER is the one that the fluid sees from the bottomhole
up to the wellhead. The bottomhole corresponds at the top of the perforations and is the
point at which the Vertical Lift Performance curves (VLP) and the Inflow Performance
Relationships (IPR) are referred.
It is possible to enter the data screen by screen, or, more comfortably, go through the entry
screens automatically starting with the well deviation survey. To do so, select first All, then
Edit.
The first screen displayed is the Deviation Survey:
While entering the deviation survey, PROSPER calculates automatically the cumulative
displacement and the angle of the well. It is also possible to plot the well profile. In the
deviation survey up to 18 points can be enter. If more points are available we can enter them
by clicking on the Filter button. (The Filter section has been design to filter 18 points from a
maximum of 1000 points).
Once the deviation is entered, click on Done to go to the Surface Equipment screen:
This screen allows the User to describe the equipment of a surface pipeline. For this
example, leave blank and click on Cancel to go on to the Downhole Equipment screen:
To select the equipment (Tubing, Casing, SSSV, etc.) click in the Type filed and select from
the drop-down menu.
As already pointed out previously, only the equipment in which the fluid flows must be
entered. Note that the Xmas tree elevation has been taken to be the same as the deviation
survey reference.
Descriptive information about the downhole equipment can be written in the label fields as
reminder.
Click Done to advance to the Geothermal Gradient screen and enter the following:
Measured Fluid
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 45
11400 210
Then Done to go to the next screen, which reports the Average Heat Capacities:
In this screen the IPR model can be selected and some fundamental reservoir parameters
are entered.
Select the Darcy IPR method and enter the following in the IPR Select Model screen:
The following section to access is the Input Data screen. The Input Data screen contains all
the parameters characterising the selected Inflow model and the Geometrical Skin entry.
Click on the Input Data button in the top right hand corner of the window, then enter the
following reservoir data:
Reservoir Permeability 50 md
Reservoir Thickness 200 feet
Drainage Area 500 acres
Dietz Shape Factor 31.6 (for a circular drainage area)
Wellbore Radius 0.354 feet
Matching of the VLP. The multiphase flow correlation will be tuned in order to
match a downhole pressure measurement
Matching of the IPR. The IPR will be tuned so that the intersection VLP/IPR will
match the production rate as per well test
This screen contains a table that can host up to 1000 well tests.
Enter here the well test data, which for this example are:
2. Compare the multiphase flow correlations (QC) and select the best correlation
Before running the comparison of the correlations, it is possible to tune the temperature
prediction model (in this case Rough Approximation) to match the temperature
measurement of the test. To do that, select the test by clicking on its row number:
And then click on Estimate U value. The program will calculate the value of the overall heat
exchange coefficient that matches the well test temperature measurement:
Click Ok, then Done to go to the main panel. Then go to the Geothermal Gradient screen in
the Equipment Data area and enter the just determined U value:
If the test data are consistent, the test point should be comprised within the boundaries
provided by these two correlations. If not, the data should be reviewed.
Further details on the flow correlations can be found in menu HelpFlow Correlations.
Then Calculate and Calculate again. The program will determine the pressure gradient
traverses for the selected correlations. Plot to visualise the gradients and the well test:
From the analysis of this plot two main considerations can be done:
- The well test measurement lies within the boundaries set by the two correlations
Fancher-Brown and Duns and Ros Modified. This means that model and the test has
been quality checked.
- Zooming the plot (draw a box around the desired area) it is possible to notice that
PE2 is the closest correlation
Result: the best correlation to use to match this test is Petroleum Experts 2.
To carry out a VLP match, in the VLP/IPR Matching screen select Match VLP as shown
below:
In the displayed Match screen select the correlations to match (in this case PE2) from the
The program will regress in order to determine a set of match parameters that fit the test.
Click on Statistics to access the results of the regression:
Note on the match parameters: if the data is consistent, these two parameters should be
close to unity within 10% of tolerance. If the difference is bigger, then the test data used for
the matching and the model should be reviewed.
Once matched a correlation, the two match parameters (P1 and P2) will be appended to the
correlation name to indicate that the correlation selected has been matched (Petroleum
Experts 2 1.00 0.99 or Petroleum Experts 2 P1 P2)
When more than one test data points are available for flow correlation
calibration, it is recommended to use the following procedure:
correlation.
Check how well the calibrated model predicts the other test points
(those not used in calibration).
The IPR is tuned so that the intersection of VLP and IPR fit the well test rate measurement.
In the following screen select the just matched correlation and click on Calculate:
PROSPER will compute the VLP curves for the match data (WHP, flow rate, water cut etc.)
using the matched VLP correlation. The solution rate and BHP obtained is display on the
bottom right hand side.
Click on the Plot button to inspect in the plot the solution obtained and compare it to the well
test.
Click on the plot and drag to create a box including the VLP/IPR intersection in order to
zoom in. The well test rate is 7200 stb/day, the intersection of the system is 7292.6 stb/day.
We will now adjust the IPR to better match the test points
The available parameters for matching depend on the IPR model in use. For the
Darcy-IPR model, permeability, skin or reservoir pressure could be used.
For this example, we will assume that the well P.I. has not changed - but we do not
have a recent reservoir pressure.
We will match the IPR by adjusting the reservoir pressure.
In the VLP/IPR Matching section modify the reservoir pressure from 5000 psig to 4982 psig
as shown in the next screen shot:
Click on VLP/IPR button. Click on Calculate to refresh the results with the new reservoir
pressure.
In the plot menu toolbar select Finish. The reservoir pressure found has to be updated in the
IPR section to update the PROSPER model.
Click on the IPR button to go to the IPR section.
In the IPR section modify the reservoir pressure of 4982 psig and water cut of 15%.
In case we would like to modify any other IPR parameter (reservoir permeability, reservoir
thickness, skin, etc) we can click on Input Data to access those variables.
The PROSPER well model is now matched and the adjusted variable (Reservoir pressure)
has been updated.
The model is now ready for calculations or validation against further tests.
Before the model is used used for predictive runs, we will check how well it reproduces the
high rate test, without any matching.
Click on VLP/IPR.
Click on Calculate, with PE2 selected as correlation to compute the VLP curves for
both the test cases.
Click on Plot to inspect the intersection of VLP/IPR of the two test points entered.
System (Ipr+Vlp). This calculation allows to determine the well production and run
sensitivities
Gradient Traverse. This calculation allows to determine the profile of pressure,
temperature, velocities, etc. along the wellbore and run sensitivities
VLP. This calculation determines lift curves that can be exported to simulators (GAP,
REVEAL, MBAL and a series of third party numerical simulators)
First Node
Water Cut GOR
Pressure
[%] [scf/STB]
[psig]
250 15 820
Other entries:
The surface flow line correlation has no effect in this particular case as no
surface pipe is part of the model.
Select Petroleum Experts 2 for the vertical lift multiphase flow correlation (note
the match parameters have been appended at the end of the name)
Select Bottom Node as Solution Node. This selects the bottomhole as solution
node
Select Automatic Linear for the rate method. This divides the internal [0, AOF]
in 20 values linearly spaced
Click on ContinueContinue (for the moment we skip the Select Variables screen) and then
Calculate.
One the calculation is finished the results with the calculated IPR and VLP and the solution
are displayed:
On the right hand side the solution rate and flowing pressures and temperatures are
reported. To plot the VLP/IPR, select Plot:
2. Running sensitivities
It is possible to determine the behaviour of the well with changing conditions. To achieve
that, sensitivities can be performed on a number of parameters like WC, GOR, Reservoir
Pressure, and so on.
For this example we will run sensitivities on Water Cut, Skin and Tubing/Pipe diameter.
Ranges of these parameters:
Parameter Range
Water cut 0, 40, 80 %
Skin 0,2,4
Tubing /Pipe Diameter 3.958, 4.892
To run sensitivities, go back to the Select Variables screen, select the variable in each
combo-box and enter the above reported ranges:
Note: The Tubing/Pipe diameter sensitivity can only be entered under the last variable (3rd
variable).
Then Continue.
The program now asks between which nodes should the tubing size sensitivity be run:
Select the Xmas tree as First Node and the bottom of the production tubing (@11,000 ft) as
Last Node with the combo boxes.
Click on Continue then Calculate to begin the system analysis calculation.
Once the calculations have finished, click Plot to take a look at the VLP and IPR curves
plotted for the range of sensitivity variables as follows:
It is possible to generate plots that show how the solution changes with changing sensitivity
parameters by using the Sensitivity plotting feature.
For example supposing that we want a plot of Liquid rate produced against Water Cut
parametric in the skin for a given value of the diameter, select Sensitivity from the
Calculation screen and in the plot manu toolbar select Variables and then choose as
requested:
These results show that for the 3.958" ID tubing a liquid production gain of around
1100-1200 STB/day is possible by removing the skin for various water cuts.
This can be done in two ways: by clicking Sensitivity PvD on the System Calculation screen
or from the main menu by selecting Calculation Gradient (Traverse).
To generate a gradient plot at one of the operating rate/pressure solution points, select the
solution for the desired conditions by using the little arrows next to the variable on the right
hand side, for example:
This calculation will determine the pressure gradient along the wellbore for the conditions
corresponding to the solution point.
Selecting Plot the traverse is plotted:
Click on Main then File | Save As and save the file as Oilwell.out.
In the first screen enter any value for Top Node Pressure, Water Cut and GOR: as
sensitivities will be run to generate the curves for a range of sensitivity parameters, the
values in the first screen will be overwritten by the sensitivity values entered.
If permanent down-hole gauges are installed in the well, the gauge depth can be entered
under Gauge depth. The VLP calculation will report the bottom hole pressure and the gauge
depth pressure.
Parameter Range
First Node Pressure 200, 600, 1000, 3000 psig
To export the curves to GAP or MBAL (.TPD format), select Petroleum Experts GAP/MBAL, then
click on Continue, enter a file name and click on Save to save the lift curves as a .tpd file.
NOTE: In order to guarantee good quality for the sets of VLP curves generated,
the recommendation is to:
- use as many values as possible for the rates (max 20 values) and sensitivity
parameters (max 10 values)
4
84 PROSPER
This section describes the PROSPER main menu and the input data required before an
analysis can be performed. Data should be entered by working through the PROSPER
menus following the logic order from left to right and top to bottom. The following menus are
described in this section:
Main menu
Options menu
Problem solving with PROSPER is approached systematically by working from left to right
through the main menu. Calculation menus are activated only when the necessary input
data has been entered.
To start PROSPER, select the appropriate icon and press or double-click the program icon.
A screen similar to the following will appear:
The menu options across the top of the screen are the PROSPER main menu options.
Each is described below.
4.1.1 File
The File menu is a management menu with commands that enables to open, save or create
new data files.
It is possible to use this menu to define the default data directory, printer set-ups options and
hook in external DLLs. A facility for accessing other Windows programs via PROSPER is
also provided.
4.1.2 Options
The Options menu is the starting point of PROSPER and the key to the program.
Use this menu to define the application and principal well features such as - prediction
method, artificial lift type and fluid type. The options selected are unique to the current file
and apply until changed by the user, or another file is recalled. These options also
determine the subsequent screens, menus and commands that are displayed.
4.1.3 PVT
Use the PVT menu to define well fluid properties and select fluid property correlations.
PVT correlations can be modified to match laboratory-measured data using a non-linear
regression technique. Alternatively, detailed PVT data may be entered in tables.
4.1.4 System
The System menu is used to define the well's downhole and surface equipment as well as
the reservoir inflow performance.
When applicable, Gas Lift, ESP, HSP, PCP and other artificial lift methods equipment data
are entered in this menu.
4.1.5 Matching
The Matching menu allows comparison of field data with calculated pressure drops in well
tubing and surface piping. All available correlations can be compared to allow selection of
the model that best suits the field conditions.
4.1.6 Calculation
The Calculation menu provides with the relevant calculation options. Calculations to
determine well performance, pressure and temperature profiles in the wellbore, perform
sensitivity analyses, make gradient comparisons and generate lift curve tables are available
in this menu.
4.1.7 Design
ESP, HSP, PCP, Jet Pumps, Sucker Rod Pumps, Multiphase Pumps sizing as well as gas
lift mandrel placement and valve setting pressure calculations, coiled tubing and diluents
injection are available from the Design menu. Access to the databases that hold gas lift
valves, ESP, HSP, PCP, Jet pumps, Sucker Rod Pumps (NEW!!!) equipment characteristics
is via the Design menu also.
4.1.8 Output
The Output menu is used to generate reports, to export data and to plot data. Report
templates are provided and user templates can also be defined. The data used can be input
data, analysis data, results or plots. Reports can be saved in various file formats (RTF, TXT
and native) and can be displayed or sent to a printer. Export data can be viewed on screen,
sent to the Windows clipboard, sent to a printer or saved in a file. Plots can be printed
directly, saved to a report file or a Windows metafile. Selected plots can also be sent to the
clipboard where they can be retrieved by other Windows-based programs.
4.1.9 Wizard
This menu accesses the wizard area of PROSPER. This allows to Create/Edit and Run
wizards that allow the User to build and run models step-by-step guided fashion.
4.1.10 Units
This menu is used to define the input and output units of measurement. A flexible system of
units is provided allowing to customise the internal units system.
4.1.11 Help
Provides on-line help for PROSPER. The User can get help on specific tasks, fields or
commands. Help is also given on the keyboard and miscellaneous Windows commands.
User is advised to ensure that all relevant input is still valid for the new option selection.
To access the Options menu, point to the menu name and click the mouse or press ALT+O.
The entry screen is divided in two main sections - System options and User information.
Under the System options section, define the well characteristics such as fluid type, well
completion, lift method, etc. These selections determine information that will be required to
enter later. The lower section of the screen comprises the header information and
comments that identify the well and will appear on the report and screen plot titles.
Option Selection
To select an option, click on the arrow to the right of the required field. The list of available
choices will be displayed.
4.2.1.2 Method
Black Oil
This option uses industry standard Black Oil models. Five correlations are
available for oil producers. For gas condensate systems an internally developed
model is used. These correlations can be adjusted to match measured data using
non-linear regression.
Equation of State
Reservoir fluid is modelled by pseudo components having user-specified
properties. The two equation of state models Peng-Robinson and
Soave-Redlich-Kwong are available in PROSPER to predict PVT properties.
User EoS DLLs can also be linked into PROSPER.
This button is active when Equation of State Method has been selected and can be used to
access all the options related to the use of the Equation of State:
EoS Model (Peng-Robinson or Soave-Redlich-Kwong)
Optimisation Mode (None, Low and Medium)
Volume Shift enable/disable
Reference Pressure and Temperature
Path to Surface and Recycle: Flash Straight to Stock Tank, Use
Separator Train, Use K values
Target GOR Method (Use Separator Fluids or Use Fluid from PSAT)
4.2.1.4 Separator
Single Stage
This option is available for black oil option for following fluids:
Oil and water
Dry and Wet Gas
Two Stage
This option is available for Black oil model in case of Oil and Water fluid type only.
Separator and tank properties are entered and recombined by PROSPER.
Multi-Stage
This option is available for:
- Retrograde Condensate Black Oil model
- Equation of State Method
Up to 10 stages of separation can be modelled for compositional applications.
4.2.1.5 Emulsions
No or Emulsion + Pump viscosity correction
Select Emulsion + Pump viscosity correction to allow input of Emulsion viscosity
in the PVT section. This option must be selected to turn on pump viscosity
corrections.
4.2.1.6 Hydrates
Disable Warning or Enable Warning
Select Enable Warning to allow flagging of hydrates formation in calculation
screens. To use this feature, go to the PVT section and enter or import the
hydrates formation table.
selected, the condensation of water vapour will be taken into account when
performing pressure drop calculation.
4.2.2 Well
4.2.2.1 Flow Type
Tubing Flow
This option models flow through a circular cross sectional area (flow in tubing/pipe)
Annular Flow
This option models production up the casing / tubing annulus
Tubing + Annular Flow
This option models production up the tubing, the annulus space, or tubing and
annulus simultaneously
CO2 Injection
None
No artificial Lift selected
Gas Lift
Three different approaches are provided. Annular gas lift is handled by PROSPER.
If the Flow Type is Annular Flow and a Gas Lift method is selected, then
PROSPER automatically
switches to model gas injection down the tubing, and production up the annulus
Options available: No Friction Loss in the Annulus, Friction Loss in the Annulus,
Safety Equipment
Electrical Submersible Pump
4.2.3.2 Type
If Gas Lift is the chosen method, then the following types are available.
No Friction Loss In Annulus
It is the classic approach for the annulus gas gradient. The pressure drop due to
friction in the annulus is ignored and the gas gradient is determined by the top
casing pressure and the temperature profile.
Friction Loss In Annulus
The pressure drop due to friction in the annulus is taken into account, but the top
casing pressure is assumed constant. If this option is selected the tubing
equipment screens will automatically change and require tubing OD and casing
ID data to be entered.
Safety Equipment
Surface delivery lines, chokes, the gas lift injection string and safety valves in the
annulus are taken into account. Top casing pressures will change with injection
rate.
If Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are
available.
Commingled Annular Supply
The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the annulus and returns to surface,
commingled with the produced fluid via the tubing.
Commingled Tubing Supply
The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the tubing and returns to surface,
commingled with the produced fluid via the annulus.
If Progressive Cavity Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available.
Sucker Rod Drive
The program will assume to have a surface drive head from which require rods in
order to move the rotor across the pump.
Downhole motor drive
The program assumes to have a downhole motor instead of surface drive motor.
If Coiled Tubing Gas Lift is the chosen method, then the following types are available.
No Friction Loss in Coiled Tubing
Friction losses along the coiled tubing are neglected.
Friction Loss in Coiled Tubing
Friction losses along the coiled tubing are accounted for.
If Diluent Injection is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Tubing Injection-Annular Production
The power fluid is injected in the tubing and the production flows through the
annulus
Annular Injection-Tubing Production
The power fluid is injected in the annulus and the production flows through the
tubing
If Jet Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Tubing Injection-Annular Production
The power fluid is injected in the tubing and the production flows through the
annulus
Annular Injection-Tubing Production
The power fluid is injected in the annulus and the production flows through the
tubing
If Multiphase Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
Framo Pumps
4.2.4.2 Model
Three models for temperature calculations are available:
Rough Approximation
Calculates the heat loss from the well to the surroundings using an overall
heat transfer coefficient, the temperature difference between the fluids and
the surrounding formation and the average heat capacity of the well fluids.
The geothermal gradient entry screen is used to input formation temperatures
(e.g. from logging runs) at measured depth points. A minimum of the surface
and first node temperatures are required. Temperatures entered should be
the extrapolated static temperatures, and should not be confused with the
entry of measured flowing temperatures required for the Predicting pressure
only case.
Enthalpy Balance
This rigorous thermodynamic model considers heat transfer by conduction,
radiation, and forced and free convection. Heat transfer coefficients are
calculated using values held in a user-definable database. The temperature
prediction calculations are transient, allowing sensitivities against flowing time
to be run. This temperature model requires considerably more input data and
computation time for either Predicting Pressure Only or the Rough
Approximation temperature model.
The production riser is properly taken into account. Therefore the heat loss
prediction between the seabed and wellhead will be accurate. Due to
increased computation times, we recommend that this option be used only
when temperature prediction rather than pressure loss is the required result
(for e.g. process calculations and material selection).
Improved Approximation
As the Enthalpy Balance model, this is also a full enthalpy balance pressure
and temperature prediction model, with the difference that the term of the
enthalpy balance concerning the heat exchange with the surroundings (which
includes free and forced convection, conduction and radiation) is simplified by
a heat loss term characterised by an overall heat exchange coefficient.
For this reason data related to the completion hardware and thermal
properties are not necessary.
Like any enthalpy balance model, Joule-Thomson Effect is also accounted
for.
These characteristics make this model particularly useful when an accurate
calculation of temperature is sought for and only a few data on the completion
are available.
The geothermal gradient entry screen is used to input formation temperatures
(e.g. from logging runs) at measured depth points. A temperature gradient in
the sea can be entered for offshore applications. A minimum of the surface
and first node temperatures are required. Temperatures entered should be
the extrapolated static temperatures, and should not be confused with the
entry of measured flowing temperatures required for the Predicting pressure
only case.
4.2.4.3 Calculation
Full System
Calculations for pipelines, tubing and reservoir
Pipeline Only
4.2.4.4 Output
Show calculating Data
During a calculation it displays the calculated values
Hide calculating Data
Select Hide to speed up calculations by not updating calculation screen displays.
This will automatically be set to Hide when run from GAP
4.2.7 Reservoir
4.2.7.1 Type
Single Branch
This option allows to model single branch IPRs. The IPR screen comes with various
standard inflow models from which the user selects one.
Multilateral Well
Enables the Multilateral IPR model. For the multi-lateral selection, the IPR screen
requires detailed drawing of the downhole completion.
5
98 PROSPER
5.1 Introduction
To predict pressure and temperature changes from the reservoir, along the well bore and
flow line tubular, it is necessary to accurately predict fluid properties as a function of
pressure and temperature. The User must enter data that fully describes the fluid properties
or enables the program to calculate them. There are four possible approaches:
- Correlations: Where only basic PVT data is available, the program uses traditional black
oil correlations, such as Glaso, Beal, Petrosky etc. A unique black oil model is available for
condensates and details of this can be found later in this guide as well as the PROSPER
manual.
- Matching: Where both basic fluid data and some PVT laboratory measurements are
available, the program can modify the black oil correlations to best-fit the measured data
using a non-linear regression technique.
- Tables: Where detailed PVT laboratory data is provided, MBAL uses this data instead of
the calculated properties. This data is entered in table format (PVT tables), and can be
supplied either manually or imported from an outside source. So called black oil tables can
be generated from an EOS model and then be imported and used in MBAL.
- Compositional: Where the full Equation of State description of the fluid is available and all
the PVT can be obtained from a Peng-Robinson or a Soave Redlich Kwong description of
the fluid phase behaviour.
Use of Tables: Tables are usually generated using one fluid composition which
implies a single GOR for the fluid. This will therefore not provide the right fluid
description when we have injection of hydrocarbons in the reservoir or when the
reservoir pressure drops below the bubble/dew point.
Use of EOS: The basic equations of state are not predictive unless matched to
measured lab data. Care has to be taken in order to make sure that the EOS has been
matched and is applicable for the range of Pressures and Temperatures to be
investigated.
The program also allows fluid properties to be calculated and plotted for specified pressure
and temperature ranges. The PVT menu has three options - Report, Input and Export.
Select Report to inspect previously entered data, Export to save data to a text file, or Input to
set up a new problem or edit an existing one.
Recommended Steps
Enter data as requested on PVT input data screen and select correlations that
are known to best fit the region or oil type.
Enter the required data in the fields provided. Movement from one box to another can be
done using the TAB key. Next, select a Pb, Rs and Bo correlation and a viscosity correlation
to use then click OK.
Enter the oil solution GOR. This should not include free gas production. For gas
production in wells producing injection or gas cap gas the solution GOR should
still be entered. The balance of free gas production is accounted for elsewhere.
Mole Percent CO2, N2 and H2S refers to the separator gas stream composition.
CO2 Injection
When an "Oil and Water" model is used to describe the fluid, the viscosity
correlation used by default for gas viscosity calculations is the Lee correlation.
For some details about the input parameters, refer to the Glossary (Appendix F).
5.2.2 Tables
In PROSPER the PVT data can also be entered as tables by clicking Tables from the main
PVT input screen. Up to fifty separate tables may be entered, each at a different
temperature. The program will use the data from the tables in all further calculations
provided the Use Tables option has been selected on the input data screen. This option
should be used only when extensive table data is available for a range of temperatures.
Rather than entering the values by hand, PROSPER can read in tables of Black Oil PVT
properties. To do this, click the Import button from the Tables screen, and PROSPER will
prompt for the name of an ASCII file containing the PVT data. Petroleum Experts PVT
Package PVTp can be used to calculate and export Black Oil PVT tables. An example of
the PVT Table import file format is given in Appendix E.
Alternatively, data can be passed directly from Excel on a table-only basis using the Clip
button. The Clip button will paste the copied data from Excel into the selected PVT table.
PROSPER interpolates the entered table data and if the entered data is
incomplete i.e., one table containing only a single row of values will result in
interpolation errors.
Information on how to import the data from a ASCII File can be found in Appendix H -
Importing Data from Text Files.
Since gas evolution in the tubing is a constant composition process, Flash data, not
differential liberation data should be used for matching. For each match data table, enter
the temperature and bubble point, then enter pressure versus gas oil ratio, oil FVF and oil
viscosity. Where data is incomplete or not available, leave the field blank. Use the GOR and
FVF at bubble point plus the viscosity if available. Enter only the minimum number of points
to ensure a good match.
Where only differential liberation PVT data is available, a PVT simulation program
like Petroleum Experts' PVT package PVTp can be used to calculate the flash
properties using a model that has been matched to the lab data.
Better results for sparse laboratory PVT data sets are usually obtained using correlations
matched to the available lab data rather than using a PVT table lookup.
5.2.4 Regression
This option is used to perform the non-linear regression, which adjusts the correlations to
best-fit laboratory measured PVT data. The non-linear regression matching technique can
be used on up to five PVT match tables, each with a different temperature. The following
PVT properties can be used as match variables:
Pb Bubble point pressure.
GOR Gas oil ratio versus pressure.
Oil FVF Oil formation volume factor versus pressure.
Oil viscosity Oil viscosity versus pressure.
It is not necessary to match on all properties for all applications. In cases where the PVT
data is incomplete or of poor quality, better results can often be obtained by matching on the
best characterised parameters only. However, because bubble point can be difficult to
accurately predict from correlations, it is recommended that, where possible, it is used as a
match parameter. The minimum data required to perform a regression match is the bubble
point and GOR.
The form of the correlations for FVF is different above and below the bubble point.
If the FVF at bubble point is not available, the regression may not achieve good
results. When matching the oil FVF, always enter data at the bubble point. Do not
enter many match points only use the minimum number to define the shape of the
correlation curves. In most cases, only data at the bubble point is required.
5.2.4.1 Match
From the Regression screen, individual correlations can be matched to selected measured
PVT data by:
Selecting the correlations
Selecting the fluid properties to match to
Clicking Match
5.2.4.1.2 Parameters
Having performed the matching process, the match parameters are displayed by clicking the
Parameters button. The non-linear regression technique applies a multiplier - Parameter 1,
and a shift - Parameter 2 to the correlations. The standard deviation is also displayed, which
represents the overall closeness of fit. The lower the standard deviation, the better the fit.
The best overall model is the one that has Parameter 1 closest to unity.
5.2.4.1.2.1 Viewing the Match Parameters
The Parameters button displays the PVT correlations parameters screen. This shows the
match parameters and the standard deviation for each matched correlation. Use these
statistics to select the best correlation for the data set and conditions pertaining to the
application. A plot should be made (refer calculation and plot sections) and a visual check
of the fit quality performed before making the final correlation selection. The match
parameters can be reset i.e. returned to the un-matched state by selecting the reset option.
The following is an example of a correlation parameters screen:
In all circumstances, always enter match data at the bubble point to ensure that no
discontinuities occur.
5.2.5 Correlations
This options displays the match parameters and standard deviations for each matched
correlation. See the Match section for a more detailed explanation.
5.2.6 Calculate
In order to make a plot or listing of fluid property data, PROSPER must first calculate the
values over a specified range of temperatures and pressures. Using the calculated data
points, plots of fluid properties versus temperature or pressure can be generated. The
following is an example of the PVT Calculations screen. If the correlations have been
matched, then the fluid properties will be calculated using the modified correlations.
The calculation procedure is optional and used only to generate fluid property data
for display and quality control purposes. During the computation of a pressure
traverse, PROSPER calculates fluid properties at each pressure and temperature
step or node as required by the application.
Click OK
Click Calculate to compute PVT data for the entire range of pressures and
temperatures required by the modelling application. The following calculation
screen will be displayed:
The PVT section can be used as a convenient calculator by entering User selected data
points, then entering specific temperatures and pressures to calculate fluid properties.
Click Variables.
Select Pressure for the X-axis.
Select GOR for the Y-axis.
Click OK to display a plot showing both the calculated values and the measured values
similar to the following:
Carefully examine the PVT plots for consistency with the match data. If necessary, select a
different correlation and repeat the PVT calculations until satisfactory results have been
obtained.
There is also the possibility of transferring the displayed calculation to the Tables by
pressing on the Tables button.
5.2.8 Open
This option allows a previously saved PVT data set to be recalled into the open file. A
dialogue box will appear prompting to select a PVT file. If this step is carried out after
recalling a .SIN file, this will overwrite the PVT data from the original file.
For multi-well projects, set up matched PVT models for each producing area first.
PROSPER Manual May, 2008
PVT Data Input 109
This will save time and reduce the potential for error by recalling the relevant PVT
data into each well file.
5.2.9 Composition
In the PVT Input Data screen, click the Composition button, and PROSPER will use the
PVT properties (Oil Gravity, GOR) to estimate the composition of the reservoir fluid. The
estimated composition is used internally by PROSPER to calculate thermodynamic
properties needed in the choke and enthalpy balance temperature models. The following is
an example of an estimated Black Oil composition:
Click BI Coefficients and PROSPER will display the Binary Interaction coefficients to be
used in an EOS description of the fluid. An example BI Coefficients display is shown below:
Estimation of reservoir fluid composition is available for Oil and Retrograde Condensate
fluids.
5.2.10 Emulsions
If Options | Emulsions is selected PROSPER allows selection of the emulsion occurrence
in the system from the PVT input dialogue. This tells PROSPER where the viscosity
corrections will take place during calculation
The Flowline Emulsion Data button opens the Emulsion Data entry screen.
Water cut can be entered at this point that will then be used to calculate the emulsion
viscosity in the PVT calculation section.
5.2.10.1Emulsions
PROSPER can model the effect of Oil/Water emulsions on mixture viscosity for Black Oil
PVT systems. The behaviour of emulsions in producing well equipment is not well
understood. Emulsion PVT in PROSPER provides a means to assess possible effects of
increased emulsion viscosity by curve fitting experimentally determined data. It must be
emphasised that the method is empirical and does not represent any rigorous model of
emulsion behaviour.
In the laboratory, stable emulsions can be prepared from many crude oil / water systems.
Emulsion samples discovered in surface separation equipment do not necessarily imply that
emulsions are present in the well. Field experience shows that the effect of emulsions is
usually less than predicted by laboratory tests. Emulsion PVT should be used with caution
and only when it is certain that emulsions are present and it is necessary to evaluate their
effect on calculated pressures.
To enable emulsion PVT in PROSPER, the Emulsion option must first be selected on the
Options screen. Emulsion viscosity will replace the mixture viscosity for selected elements
of the production system. Experimental or empirical emulsion viscosity data can be entered
and curve-fitted using non-linear regression. The fitted curve is used to optionally replace
the oil/water mixture viscosity in IPR, VLP and pump calculations. When selected, emulsion
viscosity for the User-entered value of water cut will be substituted for the fluid mixture
viscosity.
Drop down the Emulsion box and select from the following:
No viscosity corrections
Turns off emulsion viscosity corrections
Everywhere
Emulsion viscosity for IPR, VLP and pump if present
Pump only
Emulsion viscosity for pump only
Even if No Emulsion Corrections has been selected on the PVT screen, pump
viscosity corrections will be applied whenever Options Emulsions is selected.
Produced fluid viscosity, not emulsion viscosity, will then be used for corrections.
To set up the emulsion model, select Emulsion Everywhere, (otherwise emulsion viscosity
will not be active for the PVT calculations) then click the Emulsion Data button and the
following screen will be displayed.
The pressure and temperature that correspond to the experimental conditions are entered in
Experimental Parameters. This enables PROSPER to correct the emulsion viscosity for
temperature and pressure.
Match data is plotted as crosses, whereas the calculated viscosity is shown as a solid line.
When Emulsions Everywhere have been selected, the calculated Oil Viscosity in the PVT
section will be replaced by the emulsion viscosity for the value of Water Cut entered.
A fluid whose viscosity is not constant at all shear rates and does not behave like a
Newtonian fluid would fall into this category. This will enable foams in heavy oils to be
modelled more accurately. Most drilling fluids are non-Newtonian.
To enter the required non-Newtonian fluid viscosity data, select Rheological Parameters
from the PVT Input Data screen:
= 0 +K n
where:
= Shear Stress
0 = Yield Stress
K = Consistency Index
= Shear Rate
n = Shear Thinning Index
For further details about how the viscosity model is used to determine the apparent viscosity,
please refer to the Help on-line of PROSPER.
If Water is selected, then the only other data required is the salinity of the power fluid. The
program will then estimate fluid properties using the normal water PVT model.
If Other Fluid is selected, then tables of fluid properties need to be entered that PROSPER
will use for interpolation. The program will never extrapolate so please ensure that the table
data covers the expected ranges of pressures and temperatures. Click the Properties
button and the following screen will be displayed.
Tables of data for up to 10 temperatures may be entered. Please ensure that the tables
span the expected range of conditions that will be encountered.
The Generate feature allows to automatically calculate the tables using the PVT
model in the main screen.
If a PVT model is available for the power fluid, the suggestion is the following:
1. Enter in the PVT main screen the fluid black oil properties
3. Enter in the main screen the black oil parameters for the produced fluid
Click the Hydrates button and the following entry screen will be displayed.
The bottom-right part of the screen will only appear when the option Calculate Condensate
Water Vapour is selected in the Options | Water Viscosity section. If this option is
selected, the effects of condensation of water vapour on the pressure drop calculation in the
tubing / pipeline will be taken into account.
This model applies to most gas wells. The condensate production is included in the gas
stream as an increase in density - the flow remains single-phase gas plus free water if
present. The Separator Pressure is used to estimate the GE (Gas Equivalent Rate). The
separator temperature is assumed to be the same as the top node temperature. If there is
significant hydrocarbon liquid drop out in the tubing, a retrograde condensate model should
be used.
The Gray VLP correlation has an internal PVT routine that models the effect of
liquid dropout in the tubing. This overrides the Dry and Wet gas PVT.
Please refer to the PVT Matching Data section. Matching operations are carried
out as for oil PVT.
The black oil condensate model must not be matched as previously done for oils. This is
because the black oil model for condensate in PROSPER uses a mathematical model and
matching could throw the model out of bounds.
Note:
If tank GOR and tank gas gravity is unknown, they can be left at 0. The unmeasured tank
gas rate should be estimated using a suitable correlation and added to the separator gas.
For such cases, the total produced GOR should be entered under separator GOR.
Condensate gravity is at standard conditions.
If the separator pressure is above dew point, then there can be no liquid
production. When the dew point is unknown, set it to the reservoir pressure.
PROSPER handles conflicting input data by dropping the separator pressure to
atmospheric, and increasing the separator gas gravity as required accounting for
the liquid production indicated by the Separator GOR. The mass balance is
respected at all times.
The black oil condensate model must not be matched as previously done for oils.
This is because the black oil model for condensate in PROSPER uses a
mathematical model and matching could throw the model out of bounds.
Please review the condensate validation example A15 found in Appendix A of the
PROSPER User Guide.
5.4.2 Calculations
Fluid property data can be calculated for a specified range of temperatures and pressures.
If the correlations have been matched, then the matched correlations will be used for the
calculations. Plots of fluid properties versus temperature or pressure can be generated.
The equations used in PROSPER are derived from Van der Waals Equation and in common
with it represent the total pressure as a summation of an attractive and a repulsive element:
where b represents the hard-sphere volume of the molecules and a the intermolecular
attraction.
The two cubic Equations of State which are available in PROSPER are:
1) Peng-Robinson (PR)EoS:
and,
2) Soave-Redlich-Kwong(SRK)EoS:
All cubic Equations of State can be rewritten as a function of the compressibility factor Z e.g.
the Peng Robinson equation becomes:
where
and
The PVT calculation method is identical for all reservoir fluid types i.e., oil and water,
condensate or gas.
The choice of fluid type affects the choice of IPR and VLP models as well as the range of
available sensitivity variables.
PROSPER will determine whether the reservoir fluid is an oil or a gas condensate
within the EOS PVT calculations. Since the VLP correlations are approached
differently depending on whether a gas or oil is being produced, when running
calculations, if the fluid type recognised during the calculations is different to the
fluid type specified in the main program Options screen, the program will display a
warning message
Optimisation Mode
Over the past few years, our PVT experts have been working on ways to speed up the
calculation of properties from an EOS model. Speed is one of the main issues with fully
compositional models and the options in this field will define the speed of calculations.
The objective of this option is to speed up the calculations without penalising the accuracy
the results. The Medium mode is the fastest (up to 80 times)
Volume Shift
Option to enable/disable the use of Volume Shift in the EoS.
Path to Surface
This Option specifies the path the fluid follows down to standard condition.
This is essential when calculating volumetric properties like FVF or GOR, which are path
dependent. The amount of gas and liquid resulting from the calculations will be different
depending on the path the fluid will take to standard conditions. These are the available
options:
Flash Straight to Stock Tank
Use Separator Train
Use K values
The Use K Values option is an addition to the compositional modelling that allows
modelling the process based on K-values (equilibrium ratios). This can allow process
calculations from systems more complex than separation to be represented as
Pseudo separators and can be obtained from process simulators.
To import the K values select Import KValues:
Once the calculations are complete, under the Analysis tab the Export K-Values button can
be used:
Now the program will allow the User to export a *.pks file that can be imported in PROSPER
containing all the information with regards to separator stages and K values.
These options should reflect the EOS available for the fluid (from PVTP for
example) and the process (path) the fluid follows to standard conditions
(which will affect the volumes and quality of the resulting fluid)
obtain an oil and gas composition. These are mixed to achieve the target GOR. It
should be noted that this retricts any target that can be found to the RS of the
oil below PSAT and the GOR of the equivalent gas. Although more restricted, this
mixture better reflects the case of an oil entraining gas cap gas etc.
The EOS fluid model is activated via the Options Summary screen where the various EOS
options can be selected. The Options can also be changed from the EoS main screen by
selecting Change.
This screen requires input of pseudo component concentrations and properties (critical
temperature, pressure and volume, acentric factor, molecular weight and specific gravity).
Up to 30 pseudo components can be entered. Entry of Critical Volume, Volume Shift,
Boiling Point Temperature and Parachor are optional.
Use of regressed critical volume data will improve the quality of calculated liquid viscosities.
Where critical volume data is unavailable, PROSPER uses a correlation to estimate the
values. The Parachor is used for surface tension calculation. Binary interaction components
are entered on a screen similar to that shown below by clicking on the BI coeffs button from
the EOS input screen.
After entering the interaction coefficients, click OK to return to the input screen. Then click
Generate to display a screen requesting the range of pressures and temperatures and the
number of pressure and temperature steps to calculate.
Properties
Click the Properties button and the program will determine the equivalent black oil
properties by flashing the fluid to atmospheric (i.e. standard) conditions using the separator
scheme entered in the main screen.
Production rates entered in PROSPER when using EOS PVT assume the
produced fluid is flashed directly to atmosphere. e.g. for oil, enter the production
rate that results in the correct wellhead mass flow rate when the oil gravity is the
same as shown by the Properties calculation.
Before importing PVT data, first ensure that PROSPER is using the correct units
for pressure and temperature.
The EOS option in PROSPER is not intended to be used as a fully featured PVT
package. For maximum accuracy and computational efficiency, it is
recommended that compositional data be grouped and matched to lab data using
a program such as Petroleum Experts PVTP Package and the resulting
pseudo-component properties used in PROSPER. The accuracy of well pressure
loss calculations depends on the accuracy of density predictions. Unless the EOS
densities have been carefully matched to lab data over a sufficient range of
temperatures and pressures, VLP calculations using EOS PVT will not be
accurate.
The Gray VLP correlations internal PVT will override the EOS PVT.
The EOS input screen allows pseudo component data to be imported directly from data files
such as those generated by Petroleum Experts' PVT package PVTp or other programs.
Simply click Import and select the appropriate file from the dialogue box. Once fluid
properties have been generated, they can be saved in a .PVT file by clicking the Save button
and entering a file name when prompted.
Calculate Hydrate...Wax
This utility allows to calculate the Hydrate formation curve, along with the wax occurrence
temperature.
The Hydrate formation curve and wax formation temperature plot will be displayed along
with the phase envelope.
5.5.3.3 Target GOR
This feature allows to calculate the recombined fluid composition characterised by a GOR
different to the Original Composition GOR:
Enter the new GOR in the Target GOR field and the Calculate, and the program will use the
Target GOR method defined in the main EoS options in order to determine the new
composition.
The Calculated composition is reported in the Calculated column.
6
136 PROSPER
This section describes the menu option used to define the well's hardware, deviation survey
and flowing temperature profile. The program requests only the data required by the O
ptions that have been selected.
The data required for temperature prediction depends on the temperature model used. For
the Rough Approximation and Improved Approximation, there is little additional data
required. For the rigorous Enthalpy Balance temperature model, it is necessary to
completely define the well environment, including all casing strings, cement tops, formation
lithology etc.
Depths in PROSPER for downhole and surface equipment are referenced to zero
on the deviation survey screen. Calculated pressures are then referenced to the
Xmas tree (if no surface equipment has been entered) or Manifold (if surface
equipment has been entered). Therefore, when PROSPER well models are
combined in a field-wide system model, the depth references that were used in
the individual PROSPER models are not important. In the field model, however,
the depth of each well's Top Node must be known with respect to a common
reference.
For subsea systems, any depth reference (e.g. sea level, drill floor, ground level)
can be used. If ground level is used, then a tied back well would have a negative
wellhead elevation. To minimise the potential for errors in correcting the depths, it
is recommended to use the same reference as used for the deviation survey data.
To start data entry for a new application, click All Edit. PROSPER will then display all the
relevant input screens in sequence.
If data has already been entered, clicking the Summary command button will display a
summary of the current equipment.
To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item.
Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or exclude it temporarily
from any calculation by setting the Disable Surface Equipment choice box at the bottom of
the screen to Yes.
The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety
of sources.
There is a Measured Depth to True Vertical Depth (and the reverse is true) at the
bottom.
If the user wishes to find the TVD at a given MD, just enter the MD value in the
relevant space and select Calculate. If the User wishes to find the MD at a given
TVD, just enter the TVD value in the relevant space and select Calculate
Once depths have been entered, plot the well profile by selecting Plot. A plot similar to the
one below will be displayed:
The reference depth used by PROSPER for all calculations is zero in the
Deviation Survey table. The Deviation Survey table is interpolated to determine
the difference in TVD between any two well nodes. MD and TVD data must be at
least as deep as the bottomhole tubing depth; PROSPER will not calculate
beyond the last depth in the table.
Deviation survey data entry is required also for vertical wells - enter 0,0 for the
surface reference and an MD the same as the TVD of the intake node. The
deviation survey has to start with 0 measured depth and 0 TVD. Due to this
reason, the reference depth (where TVD = 0) has to be at or above the wellhead.
For a sub-sea well (with or without pipeline), if the reference depth is selected in
such a way that it is above the wellhead (at the mean sea level for instance), we
can actually assume an imaginary vertical path in the deviation survey table down
to the wellhead. We do not need to include the pipeline measured depth in the
deviation survey. The deviation survey describes the deviation of the downhole
equipment only.
Horizontal wells with deviation angles greater than 90 degrees from vertical can
be entered. PROSPER will issue a warning that the TVD of one node is less than
the previous one, but well profile plots and calculations will proceed as normal.
For Horizontal wells the deviation survey may be entered only up to the heel of the
well, as the well from the heel all the way up to the toe is a part of the inflow
description.
6.1.1.1 Filter
When more than 18 points are available, the Filter allows a determined number of points
(up to 18) that best-fit the entered points (see figure below).
In the Raw Data table (figure above) enter the data from the survey.
It is possible to copy the table by selecting the first row (click on the number 1)
and Paste from the Clipboard
When selecting Filter, the program will fit up to 18 points in order to reproduce the well
trajectory previously imported:
The Plot function allows to quality check the fitting. In the plot the well entered trajectory (in
red) is plotted along with the fitted points (in green):
Fittings have been added to the surface equipment section of PROSPER to account for the
various pressure losses associated with pipe fittings throughout a given system:
PROSPER defines surface equipment as the pipe work between the production manifold
and the upstream side of the wellhead choke. The production manifold is regarded by
PROSPER as presenting a constant back-pressure, regardless of flow rate. If systems
analysis is to be performed relative to the wellhead, (i.e. gathering system pressure losses
are neglected) then no surface equipment input is required.
The surface equipment model can be described using the following 2 elements:
Pipe
Choke
The manifold is set as the first equipment type automatically by PROSPER. Surface
equipment geometry can be entered either as pairs of X, Y co-ordinates relative to the
manifold or the Xmas Tree, Reverse X, Y (Y co-ordinates deeper than the reference depth
are negative) or TVD of the upstream end and the length of the pipe segment.
The difference in TVD between the ends of a pipe segment is used to calculate gravity head
losses. The internal diameter (ID), roughness and pipe length entered determine the friction
pressure loss. The flowing temperatures for each upstream node must also be entered
when calculation option Pressure only is selected.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to several identical
wells being connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow line. The fluid
velocity in the flowline is multiplied by the value entered increasing the frictional pressure
losses. For most applications it should be left at its default value of 1.
The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety
of sources. Up to 200 pipe segments can be entered, enabling the user to model very long
pipelines.
PROSPER multi-phase choke pressure loss correlation accounts for both critical and
sub-critical flow. We would recommend the use of the ELF Choke correlation that it similar
to the Petroleum Experts method and is more robust in extreme conditions.
Ensure that the length of each pipe segment is equal to or greater than the
should be equal to the Xmas tree TVD and temperature. In X,Y co-ordinates, the
Y co-ordinate of the last pipe segment must be the same elevation as the
wellhead TVD. (i.e. same magnitude, but opposite sign)
To check that the surface equipment description is accurate, click Plot to display a plot of
the pipe elevation as follows:
The Downhole Equipment screen will change automatically depending on the options
selected in the Options menu screen. For example, if Annular Flow has been selected, the
tubing screen will require Casing I.D. and Tubing O.D. to be entered.
The tubing string can be modelled using the following element types:
Tubing
SSSV
Restriction
Casing
PROSPER automatically inserts the Xmas tree as the first downhole equipment item. To
describe the tubing string, work from the shallowest depth downwards, entering the bottom
depth of changes in tubing diameter, ID and roughness factor.
Casing is treated the same as tubing for pressure drop calculations. Downhole equipment
details should be entered down to the producing interval being analysed. The deepest depth
entries for the tubing, deviation survey and temperature should be consistent.
Below the uppermost producing perforation, the flow profile (as measured by a
To select tubing string elements to build up the tubing string description, click on the list box
arrows to the right of the item fields and select the equipment from the drop-down list. The
editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety
of sources. Up to 18 tubing string elements can be input. For complex completions, simplify
the data entry by entering only the major elements that dominate the overall tubing pressure
drop.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to intermittent
sections of dual completion. The fluid velocity in the tubing is multiplied by the value entered
- thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses. For standard single tubing completions it
should be left at its default value of 1.
The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety
of sources.
PROSPER interpolates temperatures from the survey data for depths within the
table limits, and uses linear extrapolation elsewhere. To eliminate potential
errors, ensure that a temperature is entered for the deepest node depth. It is
recommended that the maximum temperature survey depth, deviation survey
depth and intake node depths are all consistent.
6.1.5 Summary
Before leaving the System Equipment screen, the accuracy of the equipment description
should be checked by making an equipment summary. Click Summary to display the
summary screen.
Selecting the appropriate button from the Summary screen can draw a sketch of the
surface and downhole equipment. Select Draw Downhole to display a sketch similar to the
following:
To start data entry for a new application, click All Edit. PROSPER will then display all the
relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking the S
ummary command button will display a schematic summary of the current equipment.
To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item. Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or
exclude it temporarily from any calculation by using the Disable Surface Equipment choice
box at the bottom of the screen.
The heat transfer coefficient should not be confused with the pipe thermal conductivity. The
overall heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow through the production tubing,
annulus and insulation (if present) to the surroundings. Heat transfer by forced and free
convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in the value of the overall
heat transfer coefficient. In PROSPER, the overall heat transfer coefficient is referenced to
the pipe inside diameter.
As for surface equipment, enter an overall heat transfer coefficient that describes the
resistance to heat flow by all mechanisms (convection, radiation and conduction) from the
well to its surroundings. The Enthalpy Balance temperature model is a convenient way to
determine average heat transfer coefficients. The heat transfer area is referenced to the
pipe inside diameter.
Enter values that correspond to average conditions in the well. Note that for oil, and
especially gas that Cp values are strong functions of both temperature and pressure.
The default values will often give reasonable results in moderate GOR oil
wells. However, actual Cp values for oil and gas vary widely. Do not rely
on the defaults - obtain good estimates of Cp, or use the Enthalpy
Balance method where accurate temperature prediction is required.
To calculate heat losses, additional data such as outside diameter, material type and
insulation (if used) are required to be input. The surface equipment model can utilise
the following equipment types:
Line pipe
Coated pipeline
Flexible tubes
User selected
Choke
To allow for pipe bends, etc., enter an equivalent length/diameter. The choke
calculation handles both sub-critical and critical flow. The program will calculate the
temperature drop across the choke. Descriptive labels for each element can be
entered in the Label field if desired. Labels appear on reports and calculation
screens. Surface equipment geometry can be optionally entered as TVD of the
upstream end of the pipe segment and length or as X, Y (from the manifold or the
Xmas Tree) co-ordinate pairs. Refer to Section 6.1.2 above for more details.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to several
wells being connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow line. The
fluid velocity in the flowline is multiplied by the value entered - thereby increasing the
frictional pressure losses. For most applications it should be left at its default value
of 1. As an example, the pressure drop in a flowline connected to 3 identical wells
could be modelled using a pipeline rate multiplier of 3. 2 parallel flowlines having
identical dimensions can be modelled by entering the actual dimensions for one pipe
and a pipeline rate multiplier of 0.5. It is also possible to vary the rate multiplier along
the pipeline to simulate varying sections of dual pipelines for example.
The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that
have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be
simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import
data from a wide variety of sources. Up to 200 pipe segments can be entered,
enabling the user to model very long pipelines.
Pipe insulation (e.g. concrete, foam or bitumen) can be modelled. To define the pipe
insulation click the Enter button to display the following screen:
Select the required insulation type from the drop-down list, then enter the thickness.
Enter the insulation beginning with the innermost layer. PROSPER uses the thermal
properties in its database to calculate the thermal conductivity of the composite
insulation. Click OK to return to the surface equipment screen. Different insulations
can be entered for each section of the flowline as required. The calculated
composite thermal conductivity is referenced to the pipe inside diameter. Pipes can
be laid on the surface (burial depth = 0) or buried. The diagram below shows the
The burial depth is the distance between the soil surface and the bottom of the pipe
(including insulation, if present). The pipe is partially buried if the burial depth < O.D.
of the insulated pipe.
Ensure that the flowline pipe geometry is consistent with the pipe burial
depth. If necessary, insert another node and change the burial depth for
e.g. the riser.
The soil conductivity around buried surface pipes is taken from the
Thermal Properties database for the shallowest rock type entered in the
Litho logy screen. In previous PROSPER releases, the soil conductivity
was fixed at 3.5 W/m/K.
The downhole equipment section is used to describe the production tubing, SSSV
and restrictions. The following equipment items are available:
The thermal properties database for downhole equipment elements can be edited or
added to if required. Pressure and temperature changes across subsurface safety
valves and restrictions (nipples) are correctly modelled. The following is an example
of a downhole equipment data input screen:
For the Enthalpy Balance temperature model the casing dimensions and material
type are entered under Drilling and Completion, so the downhole equipment
description is required only for the tubing string.
To select tubing string elements to build up the tubing string description, click on the
list box arrows to the right of the item fields and make the appropriate selection from
the drop-down list. The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate
on data records that have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s).
All records can be simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import
button to import data from a wide variety of sources. Up to 18 tubing string elements
can be input. For complex completions, simplify the data entry by entering only the
major elements that dominate the overall tubing pressure drop.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to
intermittent sections of dual completions. The fluid velocity in the tubing is multiplied
by the value entered - thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses. For standard
single tubing completions it should be left at its default value of 1.
in the Temperature Data screen enter the temperature gradient in the formation (just
like in the Geothermal Gradient section for Rough Approximation), and the
temperature profile in the sea, along with the sea velocity.
If the surface equipment is exposed to air, the data concerning to the air
temperature, humidity and velocity will be accounted for the temperature calculation
The screen below shows an offshore well with a 30" OD riser run to a seabed depth
of 400 ft. The well also has a 7" OD liner run to 14000 ft with the liner top set at
11000 ft.
The completion fluid Liquid and Gas properties can have a significant effect on the
heat loss through the annulus. If pressure is maintained on the annulus, the mud
weight used should be modified to reflect the actual annulus pressure at the packer
depth. If the well is being gas lifted, the program assumes that the annulus is full of
gas down to the injection point.
The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that
have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be
simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import
data from a wide variety of sources.
For complex completions fluids, select the appropriate Customised Options from
the main Drilling and Completions section. Completion fluid property data will be
entered via look-up table data. Figure 6-14 shows the data required when selecting
the Completion Fluid Gas Type | Customised option from the drilling and
completions section.
Five temperature dependent tables of properties can be entered. Please ensure that
the table will span the expected range of pressure- temperature conditions. The
program will not extrapolate outside the range of the input table. Use the Import
button to import data from a wide variety of sources.
6.2.2.6 Lithology
The program contains a database of thermal properties for various rock types
including Sandstone, Shale, Limestone, Dolomite, Halite and others. The thermal
properties database can be edited and added to as required. If detailed lithology
data is available it should be entered in the screen as shown below. If no data is
available, use shale from surface to total depth.
The reservoir temperature and pressure should be entered for the production
reference depth. The formation temperature gradient is interpolated between the
reservoir and surface environment temperatures.
The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that
have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be
simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import
data from a wide variety of sources.
Thermal properties for buried pipelines are taken from the shallowest
formation type entered in the Lithology screen.
6.2.2.7 Databases
This optional feature is used to access the thermal properties databases for editing
or addition of user-defined materials. Select Databases and click Edit and the
following selection screen will be displayed:
Check that the units are correct prior to entering the thermal properties.
Edited values remain in memory and become part of a particular well model file
when the file is saved. To permanently save edited values or new user-defined
entries for use in other projects click the Save button to keep them in the database.
The Reset button is used to return all entries to their default values.
To start data entry for a new application, click All Edit. PROSPER will then display all
the relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking
the Summary command button will display a summary of the current equipment. To
go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item.
Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or exclude it
temporarily from any calculation by using the Disable Surface Equipment choice
box at the bottom of the Equipment Data screen.
The heat transfer coefficient can be specified for each pipe segment and should not
be confused with the pipe thermal conductivity.
The heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow through the production
tubing, annulus and insulation (if present) to the surroundings. Heat transfer by
forced and free convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in the
value of the overall heat transfer coefficient. In PROSPER, the overall heat transfer
coefficient is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
6.2.3.3 Downhole Equipment
The Downhole Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only.
PROSPER requires the formation temperature profile together with the heat transfer
coefficient to be entered on this screen:
As for surface equipment, enter an overall heat transfer coefficient that describes the
resistance to heat flow by all mechanisms (convection, radiation and conduction)
from the well to its surroundings. This value can vary throughout the formation. The
Enthalpy Balance temperature model is a convenient way to determine average heat
transfer coefficients. The heat transfer area is referenced to the pipe inside
diameter.
Enter the data to describe to temperature gradient in the sea. Up to 20 points may
be entered. Use the Import button to retrieve the data from a wide variety of sources
7
IPR Data Input 171
This section describes how PROSPER defines the reservoir inflow performance. The
following table lists the Inflow Performance options:
P.I. Entry
SkinAide
Thermally Induced Fracture
(injection only)
Transient
Vogel
Click System Inflow Performance in the main menu and the main data entry screen will
appear.
1. Section Buttons. At the top right of the dialog screen are two buttons, labelled Select
Model and Input Data. These allow switching between screens that control model
selection and detailed data input. The former also contains data pertaining to all models
(such as reservoir pressure and temperature), and the latter manages the data input
specific to the chosen model. The selection buttons have the same function in the
multilateral data entry screens.
2. Action Buttons. To the left of the section buttons is a set of buttons that perform various
actions such as Calculate. Only the left-most group appears in the multilateral data entry
screens.
3. Model Selection Screen. The child screen is the area below the action and section
buttons and contains either the model selection or the data input screens. The same
occurs in the multilateral interface, although the actual model selection and data input
screens are different.
Cancel
This exits the screen and restores the data to its state at the start of the main edit session.
Validate
Checks the data on the current child screen for validity. If the data are not valid, the
validation dialog will appear with diagnostic messages.
Reset
This replaces the data of the current child screen with the data that was current when the
screen was entered.
Help
This displays information relevant to the current child screen.
Calculate
Saves and validates all the data pertaining to the chosen models (e.g. Darcy reservoir model
and Enter Skin By Hand) then runs the correct calculation routine if the data are valid. On
successful completion of the calculation the results are automatically plotted.
Plot
Will produce a plot screen appropriate to the current reservoir model (for example, a Darcy
plot) and plot the data from the last Calculate command.
Report
Enters the PROSPER Reporting System. The report produced will depend on the current
model choices. A fuller description of the reporting is found in Chapter 12.
Export
Can export current data (input and results) to the printer, a file, the clipboard or the screen.
It thus forms another method of reporting and is described more fully in Chapter 13.
Sensitivity NEW!!!
Allows to perform sensitivities on the various parameters affecting the IPR
Transfer Data
Saves and validates all the current data before opening a standard File Save As dialog that
provides an opportunity to save the data to file in MBAL input format (.MIP).
If PROSPER has been opened from a session in GAP then the data are posted
to GAP instead. The transfer button does not prompt for creation of a .MIP file.
Save Results
This option is only enabled when PROSPER is run from GAP. On a successful validation
options to either over-write the current file or to save the PROSPER file using File Save As
options are provided.
GAP
This option is only enabled when PROSPER is run from GAP. It shuts down the IPR screen
and minimises PROSPER, thus bringing GAP to the forefront.
Note that the Save and Validate sequence carried out by several of the action
button commands does not actually save to file but transfers data from the
context of the IPR data screen to the PROSPER data structure in memory.
Hence, files should regularly be saved to avoid losing work due to power failures
or crashes.
This part of the IPR input screen controls the choice of almost all the tabbed dialogs that will
be seen in the subsequent data input screen.
There are four major selections done in this screen. These are:
Reservoir input
o The User also specifies the pressure, temperature, producing GOR and water cut
at this screen.
Relative permeability.
o This option can be set to Yes or No in case of oils. If set to Yes, the User has the
option of defining a set of relative permeability curves, which will be used to
change productivity of the system with changing water cut.
The gravel pack selection and the type of completion (cased or open hole) are
chosen from the main Options screen (in the PROSPER main menu) but some
reservoir models have internal gravel pack data entries instead.
In case gas coning option has been selected in main options, for oils the coning
button is displayed to allow the activation of a dialog screen in which parameters
for the calculation of rate-dependent GOR's can be entered
If the fluid is a gas or a condensate the format of the screen is very similar; only the
reservoir and other model input selections vary for example, in gas systems, we have CGR
and WGR instead of GOR and WC.
The choice of reservoir models governs which subsidiary models (principally skin) are
enabled. Thus, horizontal well models do not require a deviation skin data entry and some
of the more complex reservoir models (e.g. multi-layer with dP friction loss) contain their own
skin and gravel pack models.
Only one dialog is displayed at any one time, corresponding to the tab selected as
shown in the figure below
Reservoir Model
Mech/Geom Skin
Dev/PP Skin
Gravel Pack
Relative Perm
Viscosity
The tabs are coloured according to the validity of the data on the corresponding
dialogs.
If the tab is green, then the data are valid for the current system set-up.
If the tab is grey, then this tab is not applicable to the current reservoir
model (or model selection) and so is inaccessible.
The various screens, accessible by the bottom tabs comprise the dialog screens,
where the input parameters for the selection are entered. Laid in the area below
the Section and Action buttons. In the case of the model selection screen it is
mainly occupied with ways of choosing models, namely three list boxes, a
For example Figure 7.2 shows a Darcy reservoir model dialog encapsulated in the data input
screen contained in the main entry screen.
The Reservoir Model tab is marked invalid (due to the unlikely reservoir thickness of
1 feet).
The Dev/PP Skin tab and relative permeability tabs are marked disabled. In this
case it is because the Enter Skin By Hand option is selected which is assumed to
contain the deviation and partial penetration information. In the latter case relative
permeability is simply not selected (see Figure 7.1, showing the model selection
screen).
On each of the IPR Input screens there is a validate button. Pressing this button
invokes a checking routine which flags for the any invalid entries.
Some models require data entered for multiple layers (e.g. multi-layer and
multi-layer with dP friction loss) and/or multiple completion zones (e.g. horizontal
well with dP friction loss and Wong-Clifford deviation/partial penetration skin
model).
In dialogs with grid entry it is also possible to select, copy, cut and paste blocks of
the table, using mouse drag operations and the buttons provided on the screen.
As the data in a table are typically interdependent some consistency validation
checks are carried out in addition to the range validation.
There are twenty inflow options, including the multi-lateral method described in
Section 7.8, are available.
The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be entered for all
inflow performance models, except for multi-rate models.
From the Multi-rate models the average reservoir pressure can be back
calculated.
If test data is available it can be entered and plotted against the calculated inflow.
Well skin can be either directly entered or calculated using the Locke, Macleod or
Karakas and Tariq methods for a mechanical/geometrical skin, and the
Cinco/Martin-Bronz or Wong-Clifford methods for a deviation/partial penetration
skin.
Relative permeability curves are optionally used together with fluid viscosities
(from PVT) to calculate the total fluid mobility for a given water cut. The
calculated IPR can be matched to measured data and used to calculate IPR
pressures for any rate and water cut. Relative permeability can be applied to all
oil IPR models in PROSPER.
Frictional pressure losses between multiple producing zones are accounted for in
the Horizontal Well - friction dP and Multi layer - friction dP. A network algorithm
determines the production from each zone while accounting for flowing pressure
losses to find the total well production.
These models can be combined with gravel pack and relative permeability
models if the option is enabled (the former in the Options screen from the
PROSPER main menu and the latter from the IPR main data entry screen).
Once a specific model is chosen and data entered for it, after which an IPR can be
calculated using the Calculate button. The following sections list various inflow models that
are available for oil wells.
Q = J ( Pr - Pb )
7.2.2 Vogel
The program uses the straight-line inflow relationship above the bubble point and the Vogel
empirical solution below the bubble point. A single flowing bottom hole pressure and surface
test rate is used to calculate the IPR, below the bubble point. From this IPR the rate and
bubble point pressure are used to evaluate the PI for the straight-line part of the inflow
above the bubble point.
When calculating IPR sensitivities for reservoir pressure, PROSPER retains the correct well
productivity. Otherwise, changing the reservoir pressure changes the Vogel well
productivity.
2
Q Pwf Pwf
= 1 - 0.2 - 0.8
Qmax Pr Pr
7.2.3 Composite
This is an extension of the Vogel inflow solution (Petrobras method) that accounts for water
cut.
Vogel essentially decreases the inflow below bubble point because of gas formation.
However, if the water cut is higher the inflow potential will increase and approach a
straight-line IPR due to single-phase flow. The composite model captures this by using the
following formulation.
A test flow rate, flowing bottomhole pressure and water cut are required to be entered.
7.2.4 Darcy
The program uses the Darcy inflow equation above the bubble point and the Vogel solution
below the bubble point. Required input is:
Reservoir permeability (total permeability at the prevailing water cut and GOR)
Reservoir thickness (thickness of producing reservoir rock, i.e. vertical thickness of net
pay interval)
Drainage area
Well bore radius
Dietz shape factor (to account for the shape of the drainage area)
7.2.5 Fetkovich
The Fetkovich equation for oil is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for two
phase flow below the bubble point. The Fetkovich equation can be expressed as:
2 2
Q = J ( Pr - Pb ) + J ' ( Pr - Pwf )
Enter the same inputs as for the Darcy example plus the relative permeability for oil. Skin
can be entered either by hand or calculated using Locke's, Macleod's or the Karakas and
Tariq method.
The fit values of C and n are posted on the IPR plot. If the reservoir pressure is not
available, the program will calculate it. For producing wells, enter a reservoir pressure lower
than the measured flowing bottomhole pressures. The program will dismiss the reservoir
pressure that has been entered and calculate it. For injection wells, input a reservoir
pressure higher than the test pressures entered. The program will then calculate the
reservoir pressure.
7.2.7 Jones
The Jones equation for oil is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for both
Darcy and non-Darcy pressure drops. The Jones equation can be expressed in the form:
( Pr - Pwf ) = aQ 2 + bQ
Where "a" and "b" are calculated from reservoir properties or can be determined from a
multi-rate test. The same data as for the Darcy model plus the perforated interval is
required. Skin can be directly entered or calculated using the available methods.
i.e.
( Pr - Pwf ) = aQ 2 + bQ
7.2.9 Transient
This IPR method takes into account the change of deliverability with time. This method can
be particularly important for tight reservoirs. Both the Darcy and Jones equations assume
that the well has reached pseudo-steady state flow conditions. In tight reservoirs, the
transient equation can be used to determine the inflow performance as a function of flowing
time. Once the flowing time is long enough for pseudo-steady state flow to develop within
the drainage radius, the Darcy inflow model is then used. Enter the same data as the Darcy
example plus:
Time is the flowing time since the last reservoir pressure equalisation up to the time of the
analysis. If the flowing time exceeds , the deliverability is evaluated using , which is
equivalent to using the pseudo-steady state Darcy model.
Gravel packs can be combined with the hydraulically fractured well IPR to model
Frac-Packed wells
Skin: The skin value that the user enters on the "Mech/Geom Skin" screen in
combination with the hydraulically fractured IPR model is the fracture face skin.
This user-entered skin represents possible damage in the fracture and therefore
Anisotropy
30 h = 50'
0.01 zw = 25'
rw = 0.25'
kh = 50 md
25 0.1 vis = 1 cp
1.0
P.I. (BOPD/psi)
20
Simulator - Lines
PROSPER - Symbols
15
4000'
10
4000'
0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
L1/2/Lx
Each layer can have different reservoir pressures, inflow models and fluid properties. The
oil gravity, GOR and water cut may be entered for each layer. The produced fluid properties
in the well bore are determined from the summation of the individual layer contributions.
The summation accounts for cross flow between layers having different pressures. Each
layer can be gravel packed if desired. Both Injectors and Producers can be modelled. For
cases where the zones are separated by significant depth or friction pressure losses are
significant, the Multi-layer - dP Loss network IPR model should be used.
If PVT matching has been used in the PVT section, it is assumed that it was
performed on the commingled layer fluids. The fit parameters generated will be
applied to all PVT calculations for all layers in determining the combined inflow
performance.
To use the Multi-Layer IPR, enter the reservoir temperature then click Input Data to enter the
tab-controlled screen, and then click on the Reservoir Model tab button. For each layer,
select the inflow model from: Darcy, Multi-rate Jones, or PI Entry methods then enter the
layer PVT properties, average pressures, thickness and skins. For each layer, click the
Layer Data button and enter the information required by the inflow model.
External IPR tables can also be imported from ASCII files. The file format is given in
Appendix E of the PROSPER User Guide.
The reservoir parameters entered in the upper section of the screen determine the overall
well productivity using the selected model. The zone parameters are used by the network
algorithm to re-scale the overall productivity on a zone-by-zone basis. A description of the
input parameters follows:
Reservoir Parameters
Horizontal Well Model (Model used for overall well productivity)
Reservoir permeability (Total permeability at prevailing water cut)
Reservoir thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock h)
Well bore radius (Radius of open hole rw)
Horizontal anisotropy (Ratio of Ky/Kx where Kx is permeability in the direction of the
horizontal well and Ky is the permeability perpendicular to the horizontal well)
Vertical anisotropy (Ratio of Kz/Ky where Kz is the vertical permeability)
Length of well (Horizontal section L)
Length of drainage area (Reservoir dimension parallel to well Lx)
Width of drainage area (Reservoir dimension perpendicular to well Ly)
Distance from length edge to centre of well (Xw)
Distance from width edge to centre of well (Yw)
Distance from bottom of reservoir to centre of well (Zw)
Zone Parameters
Data for up to 20 zones can be entered. The required inputs are as follows:
These parameters describe the local permeability and the flow path along the well bore.
Click the Zone Data button to enter details such as skin and perforation parameters. If the
Skin Method is Enter by Hand, the skin and open hole radius are required. If Karakas &
Tariq is selected, then enter the perforation details as in Section 7.4.1 and PROSPER will
estimate the zone skin. If the zone is to be gravel packed, this data is entered under Zone
Data.
To allow comparison of the IPR with and without friction losses, setting the zone
roughness to zero turns off the friction pressure drop calculation entirely rather
than calculating friction for a smooth pipe
Enter a production rate and porosity then select the required coning calculation method.
Click Calculate to find the critical rate and time to breakthrough for the rate entered. The
pressure along the well bore for the specified rate is calculated and displayed by clicking P
lot.
The Horizontal Well - friction dP IPR models the pressure at the heel of the well
as a function of pressure. The intake node is therefore the heel of the well. The
heel should be the last node entered in System Equipment and Deviation Survey
tables - it is not necessary to enter details of the horizontal producing section
except in the IPR.
This screen allows for the entry of up to 50 layers. To enter PVT, IPR data (permeability, test
rates etc. depending on the IPR model selected) and layer skin, click the appropriate button
to display the input screen. The depth entered for TOP is the depth for which the IPR is to
be evaluated. This is normally the same as the deepest depth entered in System
Equipment, but it can be set to surface or other value.
The IPR at surface can be calculated by entering the surface elevation for TOP depth and a
blank zone from surface to the shallowest producing zone. Use blank zones with
appropriate reduced I.D. to simulate the effect of sliding sleeves and flow controls in a
multi-zone completion. Click Calculate and the IPR for each layer and the summation will be
calculated and displayed on a plot as follows:
To list the layer production in detail, click Results and scroll through the layer results one by
one. An example results screen is shown below:
Scroll from the selection menu to view the results for each of the layers.
Gravel pack and well skin etc. can be seen by scrolling to the right of the results table.
Negative layer production rates indicate cross-flow into the layer.
If a zero roughness is entered, then inter-layer pressure drops are not computed.
The layer pressures are then equivalent to a potential referred to the depth of the
TOP layer. The calculations are then equivalent to the simpler Multi-Layer IPR
without dP model.
The multilayer option is now available for dry gas and gas condensate model
7.2.17 SkinAide
The Elf inflow and skin calculation method is incorporated in PROSPER. API perforation
characteristics can be used to estimate perforation damage given casing and formation
properties. A detailed description of SkinAide is given in Section 7.7.
The horizontal well with transverse vertical fractures is based on a model proposed by T.M.
Herge and Leif Larsen in the SPE paper 28845. The model is based on a relationship
between the effective wellbore radius, fracture conductivity, fracture size, wellbore radius
and number of fractures; the correlation also calculates the distance between fractures.
Once the effective wellbore radius is determined the model calculates the well productivity
the same way the horizontal well with no-flow-boundaries is calculated.
This is for use with wells that are stimulated with one or more transverse vertical fractures.
It is assumed that the fractures are circular, the well goes through their centre and they are
evenly spaced. If there is one fracture it is in the middle of the well. The data to be entered
are the same as those for a horizontal well, along with the fracture half-length and its
dimensionless conductivity.
The following points describe the method of performing the calculations.
The fracture half length, fracture conductivity, and number of fractures are used to
calculate an equivalent wellbore radius. This calculation is based on the technique
developed by Hegre and Larsen (SPE 28845)
The effective wellbore radius is then used in the Horizontal Well No Flow Boundary
model to compute the IPR of the well.
For the Horizontal Well - Transverse Vertical Fracture model, in some cases where the
equivalent wellbore radius approaches or exceeds the input reservoir thickness, the well is
effectively located on the edge or outside the defined drainage area leading to reduction in
AOF with increasing vertical anisotropy.
This IPR model is enabled when Well Type Injector is set in the main program Options.
The algorithm follows the framework outlined in: SPE 30777, Thermally Induced Fractures:
A Field-Proven Analytical Model. SPE Reservoir Evaluation & Engineering, February 1998.
J-L. Detienne, Max Creusot, Nicolas Kessler, Bernard Sahuquet and J-L. Bergerot.
Information was also assembled from SPE 7964 (radial reservoir temperature profile) and
SPE 11332 (coefficient for thermo-elastic stress equation). Note that the temperature profile
derivation uses the same basis as the work of de Lauwerier referred to in SPE 30777.
SPE 7964: Analytical Definition of the Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient, A. B. Zolotukhin.
SPE 11332: The Effect of Thermo-elastic Stresses on Injection Well Fracturing, T.K. Perkins
and J.A. Gonzalez.
This model is concerned with the thermo-mechanical effects induced by injecting cold water
into a hot reservoir. The method first tests whether a calculated Pwf rises above the reservoir
stress around the well bore. If this occurs then a fracture is assumed to propagate and the
Pwf at the fracture tip is equated to the reservoir stress (i.e. equilibrium) by iterating on the
fracture length. The fractures effect is incorporated in a skin term, and two stress effects
are considered; a thermo-elastic one (varies with injection temperature) and a poro-elastic
one (varies with Pwf). The stress at the wellbore is calculated by adding these effects to the
initial reservoir stress. The Pwf is calculated using varying fluid and geometric properties
(inner and outer radii) and a Darcy-like model in three circular zones. The first (inner) is
water that is still cool, the second is water that has warmed up, and the third (outer) is the
original reservoir.
The IPR calculated by this model consists, therefore, of two different zones with a
break-point where the fracturing occurs. See the following figure.
The model is not valid for uncontrolled hydraulic fracturing where the fracture length may be
several hundred feet. The fracture should not extend beyond the so-called cooled injection
zone, the extent of which is calculated using the temperature profile referred to above.
7.2.20.2Data Entry
The Thermally Induced Fracture model reservoir data screen is split into two tabbed
screens, one handling 'Injecitivity Index' parameters, and one handling 'Thermo-mechanical'
parameters. Also, it is required to enter the injected fluid temperature in the model selection
screen.
PVT parameter
Injected Fluid Temperature
Thermo-mechanical Parameters
Initial Reservoir Stress
Sweep Efficiency
Injected Fluid Specific Heat Capacity
If use relative permeability is selected, the PI will be corrected by multiplying the ratio of the
liquid mobilities. The liquid mobility is dependent on the water cut. Given the relative
permeability curves, they can be used together with fluid viscosity (PVT) to calculate the
total fluid mobility at different water cut.
The test water cut and the test reservoir pressure are used to determine the phase
saturations and viscosity at the original PI. With the use of relative permeability curves, the
liquid mobility at the test (reference point) can be calculated from:
The water saturation can always be estimated based on the relative permeability curve and
the water cut entered. At a particular reservoir pressure and water cut, the mobility (M) can
be calculated.
The possible reduction in liquid mobility due to any increase in the gas saturation is not
accounted for in this option. Hence, If use relative permeability is selected, there is a further
option to consider Vogel correction for GOR using the Standing Method (Reference: K. E.
Brown & H. Dale Beggs The technology of artificial lift methods Volume 1). The Vogel
correction takes into account the effect of increasing gas saturation on the well PI. It
requires the entry of a test GOR value. The GOR entered is taken as the total produced
GOR. Based on the PVT, then this used to calculate a free gas saturation Sg.
The Sw is calculated on basis of test water cut and test reservoir pressure. So is calculated
from
Once the phase saturation and viscosities are known the PI is estimated from total liquid
mobility ratios as indicated above.
When relative permeability is set to No the oil and water mobility values are calculated on
basis of the assumption that the free gas down hole is zero. The oil saturation is calculated
as:
After selecting the relative permeability option, we then go to the Relative Permeability
tabbed dialog in the data input screen. The child screen is shown in the following figure.
For Inflow Models like Darcy with a relative permeability correction, enter a water
cut during test equal to 0, if the permeability entered in the reservoir input data is
true single phase permeability of the rock.
Enter the residual saturation, endpoint relative permeability and Corey exponent for both oil
and water. A Corey exponent of 1.0 defines straight-line relative permeability curves.
Values greater than 1 give a concave upwards curve i.e. delayed water breakthrough.
Corey exponents less than 1 define a concave downwards relative permeability curve i.e.
early water breakthrough.
Matching measured and calculated IPR pressures establishes the well productivity for the
prevailing water cut. Click on Plot to bring up the following plot in the standard plot window.
To enter lab relative permeability, click Test Data to display the following screen:
Enter the test data and click OK to display the plot again. If necessary, adjust the values of
Corey exponents for oil and water until PROSPER's calculated relative permeability curves
fit the measured data points.
Having entered and verified the relative permeability data, click Finish to quit the plot. Next,
enter the necessary data for the particular IPR method selected and click on Calculate to
calculate and display a plot of the system IPR. The program automatically calculates the
well Absolute Open Flow Potential (AOF).
To compare measured test pressures and calculated IPR pressures, click Test data and
enter rates and sandface pressures as on the following screen:
When relative permeability is being used, water cuts for both the test data and that used to
calculate the IPR curve are required. The water cut during test value will be carried over
from the relative permeability input screen. The water cut for calculation value can be
subsequently changed to evaluate the effect on the calculated IPR.
The following data are required to calculate the total GOR from a rate:
Reservoir permeability
Perforation height (vertical distance from perforation top to bottom)
Vertical anisotropy
If the gas coning is enabled then a Coning button appears on the model selection dialog
screen. Clicking on this brings up a dialog that allows the correlating parameters to be
tuned. There is an automatic matching facility, which calculates F3 from the other data and
a (rate, GOR) coordinate. Also, the GOR can be calculated from different rates whilst in this
screen in order to verify the parameters.
As for oil, Gas inflow models are divided between design and production applications.
Calculated IPR models can be used to estimate productivity for different completion options.
Other models are available for estimating productivity from measured flowing pressures.
The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be entered for all inflow
performance models, however both the Multi-rate C and n and Multi-rate Jones models can
be used to calculate the reservoir pressure from production test data.
7.3.1 Jones
The Jones equation for gas is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows for both
laminar and non-Darcy flow pressure drops. The Jones equation can be expressed in the
form:
PR2 - Pw2f = a Q 2 + b Q
Where "a" and "b" are calculated from reservoir properties or can be determined from a
multi-rate test. Required data entry is:
The Jones IPR model is discouraged to use with high reservoir pressures as the
assumption of the model is to keep 1 / Z constant at pressures >2400psig.
7.3.2 Forchheimer
The Forchheimer equation expresses the inflow performance in terms of a laminar and a
non-Darcy pressure drop coefficients expressed as:
PR2 - Pw2f = a Q 2 + b Q
The "a" and "b" factors are input parameters for the Forchheimer IPR model.
Q = C (P R2 - Pw2f ) n
C is determined from the reservoir pressure and reservoir properties. Required input data
are:
7.3.4 C and n
This is the common form of the back pressure equation:
Q = C (P R2 - Pw2f ) n
C and n can be determined from a plot of: Q versus (Pr2-Pwf2) on log-log paper. n is the
inverse of the slope and varies between 1 for Darcy flow to 0.5 for completely non-Darcy
flow. This option allows direct entry of C and n.
It is advised to enter more than one test point. Using a single data point can
generate a non-representative IPR profile.
The fit values of a and b are posted on the IPR plot and listed in the IPR report. The
multi-rate Jones IPR is a convenient way to determine a and b from well tests. These values
can be entered in the Forcheimer IPR for calculating IPR sensitivities.
The program will automatically calculate the reservoir pressure if it is not available. For
producing wells, input a reservoir pressure lower than the measured pressures. The
program will dismiss the reservoir pressure entered and calculate one. For injection wells,
input a reservoir pressure higher than one of the pressures entered. The program will
calculate the reservoir pressure.
Note for injection wells. If flow test data for a producer has been fitted, the well
will have the correct IPR if it is then converted to an injector.
The non-Darcy coefficient can be entered from a well test where available or calculated
using a correlation.
The following diagram illustrates how PROSPER treats total and effective permeability in the
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5 Krg when total permeability is entered
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1 Slc
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Liquid Saturation
The mass flow rate of each phase is directly proportional to its mobility (k/m), Krs can be
determined using PVT and the surface production rates. This technique is used to
determine the reduction in productivity as a function of the produced liquid ratios. The
derivation of the technique and details of the equations used are given in Appendix C.
Please refer to Hydraulically Fractured IPR model in the Oil IPR section. Additional input
data for gas and condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow
factor and either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.
Skin: The skin value that the user enters on the "Mech/Geom Skin" screen in combination
with the hydraulically fractured IPR model is the fracture face skin. This user-entered skin
represents possible damage in the fracture and therefore should not be negative.
The gas gravity, CGR and WGR must be entered for each layer. The produced fluid in the
well bore is equivalent to the summation of the individual layer contributions. Refer to
Multi-layer Inflow for Oil for more details.
In the modified isochronal test, the shut-in periods are of equal duration, as are the flowing
periods. The final shut-in pressure before the beginning of the new flow is used as an
approximation of the average reservoir pressure. The same procedure is typically repeated
four times. A stabilized point (pseudosteady state) is usually obtained at the end of the test.
Modified isochronal tests are commonly used in gas wells, because they require less time
and money to produce results comparable to the isochronal test. This IPR model is based
on standard Back Pressure Model
( 2
Qg = C Pres - Pwf )
2 n
0 703kh
when n = 1 C=
(
m gTZ log e 0606
rw
re
)
The flow at any selected rate should be continued long enough for the reservoir to approach
steady-state (stabilized) conditions. The time to reach stabilized conditions is called the
readjustment time. For wells with wide well spacing (large drainage radius values), low
permeabilities, or high gas compressibilities (low reservoir pressures), large readjustment
times can be expected. In cases where the readjustment time exceeds the duration of each
test, the test data can be corrected to isochronal conditions and then to stabilized conditions
as described below.
When a well is tested from an initial steady state shut-in condition, the increase in drainage
radius with time is not dependent upon the rate. Therefore, separate flow tests conducted
for the same length of time will reach the same drainage radius.
When a well is not shut-in between tests until steady state is reached, successive tests will
indicate values of (P2res P2wf) which are too large because of the increasing drainage
radius. For the general case, a table of correction factors to be applied to (P2res P2wf) to
obtain an isochronal performance curve from conventional performance data can be
calculated as follows:
The back pressure equation coefficients C and 'n' are obtained by non-linear regression
using the isochronally corrected data. 'n', the reciprocal of the slope of this line, is
constrained to a value between 0.5 and 1.
Although 'n' is constant, the coefficient 'C' is not the same at stabilized flow conditions as it is
at isochronal conditions. It is calculated using the same technique as before, regressing on
C and keeping n constant, after adjusting the isochronal (P2res - P2wf) values to stabilized
conditions using a variation of the following equation.
1
n
re
2 log10 0 60
rw
2 2
( Pres - Pwf ) stab =
log10 (0 25t d )iso
(P
res
2
- Pwf
2
)
iso
2
0 1pre f (1 - S wc ) m g
t stab =
4 39e - 6 Pres K rg
y R -y wf = aQ + bQ 2
Pi P
i = 2 dP
0 Z
NOTE: The a and b parameters for the Pseudo Pressure Forcheimer IPR are not the same
as the a and b parameters used in the pressure squared Forcheimer IPR.
YR2 - Yw2f = a Q 2 + b Q
The a and b parameters are here determined by means of multi-rate tests data.
Entered by Hand
Calculated Using Models.
It is assumed that this value will contain deviation and partial penetration
information.
In case the entered skin is only mechanical skin, there is an option of enabling the
Wong and Clifford model for deviation and partial penetration in the input screen
for the skin itself.
Locke
McLeod
Karakas and Tariq
The required input parameters are often difficult to accurately define, therefore the absolute
value of the calculated skin often cannot be precisely predicted. The power of these
techniques is their ability to assess the relative importance of completion options on the
overall value of well skin.
The Elf SkinAide inflow method can also be used to estimate skin pressure drops for cased-
and open-hole completions with and without gravel packs.
PROSPER can also be used to estimate the value of the skin pressure drop across the
completion and the proportion of the total pressure drop attributable to the various
completion elements.
Karakas and Tariq has been found to give good results in many field applications. The
following input data are required:
An example of the input data for the Karakas and Tariq method is shown below:
A sketch outlining the main geometric variables is shown in the figure below.
Enter the requested data and, having entered some reservoir model data, press Calculate
to display an IPR plot. The plot shows the pressure drop resulting from the total skin as well
a breakdown of the individual factors contributing to the total skin as per the following
example. The individual factors to be plotted can be chosen from the Variables menu
This plot is useful to assess the efficiency of a particular perforating program by allowing the
User to instantly assess the completion pressure loss resulting from different perforation
options. For gravel packed wells, the value of skin posted on the plot does not include the
gravel pack skin. Click Results on the IPR plot screen to display the breakdown of dP's
resulting from each completion element.
Enhancement to the skin modelling options in PROSPER is the ability to apply the API RP43
to determine the actual length and diameter of perforations (Figure 7-25).
Note on Skin:
Locke's technique is valid for shots per foot of 1,2,4,6,8,10,12,and 16.
Cinco / Martin-Bronz
Wong-Clifford
Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz
This model is based on a correlation. The validity of this extends to wells up to 65 degrees.
For a higher deviation well the Wong Clifford Model should be used
The Wong-Clifford model can compute a skin for multiple completions. The Wong-Clifford
model does not have a separate calculation for the deviation & partial penetration skin - it is
a point source solution that calculates a skin that combines all of the skin effects in one
value. This total skin is placed in the Deviation skin column and the partial penetration skin is
set to zero.
The Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz model is similar to the Cinco / Martin - Bronz model.
The difference between the two models is that the Cinco (2) / Martin-Bronz model
also considers the anisotropy in the reservoir. The vertical permeability entered in
the Deviation and Partial Penetration screen is used to calculate the Deviation Skin.
NEW!!! The Multi Phase Method consists of using phase-weighted fluid properties
during gravel pack pressure drop calculations. This option is only active in case
of Oil fluid type.
The Single Phase method is the classic method which utilises the main fluid type
properties (i.e. Oil properties in case of oil fluid).
On the right side of the screen a table shows typical permeability data for different types of
gravels.
The pressure drop across a gravel pack is computed using a summation of a Darcy and a
non-Darcy component. For a cased oil well, the pressure drop due to the gravel pack
(dPgravel) is calculated using the Jones IPR equation:
dP GRAVELPACK = a Q2 + b Q
Where:
a = The non-Darcy term,
Q = The total liquid rate and
b = The Darcy term
Intermediate calculations are required prior to computing the dPgravel value and consider
the following variables:
Kg = Gravel Pack Permeability
= 1.47E7/Kg^0.55
PerfDi = Perforation Diameter
SPF = Shots per ft
PRFINT = Perforation Interval
AOTF = Area Open To Flow = (Perf dia / 24)2 * SPF * Perf Interval
o = Oil Viscosity in cp
Bo = oil FVF
o = Oil Density
L = Gravel pack length
Skin can be calculated using one of the methods described in Section 7.3 or directly
entered. Note that partial completion skin is included in the total well skin, and is not
affected by adjusting the gravel pack completion parameters. The total well skin as
measured by a well test prior to gravel packing should be entered. Click Calculate when
finished entering data and an IPR plot similar to that below will be presented (the plotting of
the individual dP components can be chosen from the Variables menu in the plot window):
The contribution of the gravel pack to the total skin pressure drop can be readily seen on the
IPR plot. The value of skin posted on the IPR plot does not include the gravel pack skin.
Click Results on the IPR plot screen to display the breakdown of dP's resulting from each
completion element. Sensitivities can be calculated on factors such as gravel pack
thickness, shots per foot etc. to evaluate the effectiveness of gravel pack designs. Gravel
packed completions are also available in the Multi-layer IPR model.
The PROSPER gravel pack model allows for non-Darcy (i.e. dP proportional to rate
squared) effects within the gravel pack and the resulting rate dependent skin. Lift curves for
gravel packed wells generated using PROSPER can be calculated from the sandface,
through the completion, and back to the production manifold. This more correctly models
the IPR as compared to simply imposing an additional skin to allow for the gravel pack
pressure loss as is done in many reservoir simulators.
Gravel packs can be combined with the Hydraulically Fractured Well IPR to
model Frac-Pack completions.
The gravel pack velocities have been incorporated in Version 6 of the IPM Suite of
tools.
These velocity calculations were implemented at the request of clients who require
these velocities for gravel pack design.
These parameters are used to determine an equivalent flowing radius that will be used by
the program to estimate the pressure drop due to the friction in the reservoir.
The dP friction will take in account of the fluid apparent viscosity (which is velocity -
dependent) calculated by the Non-Newtonian viscosity model.
Corr = (1 + C f ) (P R - PRi ) N
where:
Corr = Permeability Correction Factor
Cf = Rock Compressibility
PR = Current Reservoir Pressure
PRi = Initial Reservoir Pressure
N = Compaction Model Exponent
The option will activate a new TAB screen in the Input Data section where the basic model inputs are
required:
Most of the IPR pressure drop occurs near to the well. With this in mind, use an effective
permeability appropriate to the given conditions. For empirical inflow models such as Vogel
and Multi-Rate methods, the effect of cold injection fluid viscosity is accounted for in the
pressure points. Changing the reservoir temperature will have no effect in these cases.
7.9 SkinAide
The SkinAide inflow method has been developed by Elf Aquamarine and acknowledgement
is given for its inclusion in PROSPER. The following description is based on information
provided by Elf.
The pressure drop due to the position of the producing interval with respect to the reservoir
geometry can be considered to be independent of the pressure drop surrounding the well
completion in so far as one can imagine an equipotential cylindrical surface with, say, a 2 m
radius, separating the two regions.
Moving downstream, the next feature encountered is the interference between perforations
and the damaged zone. If the perforation tunnel emerges from the damaged zone, the
damaged zone has much less influence than if the perforation remains entirely within the
damaged zone.
The pressure drop due to interference between perforations and the damaged zone is
calculated using the Karakas and Tariq correlation.
The downstream limit of the previous feature is the crushed zone. The outside surface of the
crushed zone, and the inner surface of the perforation tunnel are both assumed to be
equipotentials. As a result flow in both the crushed-only and the crushed-and-damaged
zones is radial.
The next feature downstream is flow in that part of the perforation tunnel which penetrates
the formation. We use the flux into the tunnel previously calculated for radial flow in the
crushed zone to calculate the flow profile along the tunnel :
Moving yet further downstream, two equipotentials can be drawn, one at the external surface
of the cement, the other on the inside of the casing:
The last feature is the region between the equipotential at the opening of the perforation
tunnel in the casing, and the screen.
An approximate analytical solution has been found for flow in this region.
The conventional linear perforation model assumes that the surface of the perforation tunnel
is an equipotential surface. This assumption breaks down when permeability of gravel in the
tunnel becomes sufficiently low. When permeability in the tunnel becomes sufficiently small,
flow in the reservoir approaches hemispherical flow towards the perforation mouth.
Select the required options for the Flow and Skin models plus Perforation Data. The options
are listed below:
Semi Steady State - corresponds to no-flow at the outer reservoir boundary. This
boundary condition corresponds to reservoir depletion with no pressure maintenance.
The radial flow Productivity Index equation for semi-steady state is:
These equations differ only in the constant 3/4 vs 1/2 for steady state flow. These radial
flow equations can be generalised for other drainage geometries.
Pe, the static reservoir pressure is the average pressure in the well drainage
area, not the pressure at the external boundary. Pe is used in the
Productivity Index equation:
Having selected the required options, SkinAide requires data entry in the following
categories:
The data required can vary according to the options selected. Click each data entry button
in turn and enter the data as follows:
7.9.2.4 Geometry
Reservoir Thickness - Enter the thickness normal to the bedding plane in dipping
reservoirs. When thin shales are distributed throughout a heterogeneous reservoir, use
the net sand thickness.
Completed Interval - Enter the perforated interval as measured along the wellbore.
Distance to Top of Completion - This parameter affects partial completion skin and is
measured along the wellbore. If gross sand thickness is used for reservoir thickness,
enter the actual distance to the top perforation (dimension h1 in the above sketch). When
using net sand, restrict the distance to net sand intervals.
Drainage Area - Area drained by the subject well
Dietz Shape Factor - Allows for drainage area shape and well placement.
Hole Diameter - Open hole drilled diameter. Use bit size or caliper measured size where
applicable. Perforation length, damage depth are measured beyond the hole diameter.
7.9.2.5 Petrophysics
Horizontal Permeability - Reservoir permeability measured parallel to the cap rock (along the
bedding plane).
In anisotropic reservoirs, formation damage is deeper in the low permeability direction than
the high permeability. An elliptic damaged zone forms in such cases. SkinAide assumes a
circular damaged zone irrespective of reservoir anisotropy.
Damaged Zone Thickness - Since damaged zone skin is controlled by the ratio of
perforation tunnel length to damaged zone depth, enter a damage zone depth that
The casing dimensions are used to correct the API perforation length for field conditions.
The casing I.D. is calculated from the O.D. and casing weight.
External Casing Diameter - Enter nominal casing diameter opposite the completed
interval.
Casing Weight - Enter nominal casing weight per unit length opposite the completed
interval.
Most of the high velocity flow pressure loss occurs in the crushed zone and is added to the
loss in the reservoir. Note that if a zero crushed zone thickness is entered, no high flow
Crushed Zone Thickness - Thickness of perforation altered zone. The default value is
0.5 inches.
Crushed Zone Permeability - Reduced permeability for crushed zone within the virgin
reservoir.
Crushed Zone Porosity - Porosity in the crushed zone for estimation of high pressure
flow losses.
Crushed + Damaged Zone Permeability - Permeability for the crushed zone within the
damaged zone.
Crushed + Damaged Zone Porosity - Porosity for the crushed zone within the damaged
zone.
Permeability in the crushed and damaged zone is introduced by the ratio:
Rcrushed and damaged = Crushed and damaged zone (horizontal) permeability /
undisturbed formation (horizontal) permeability.
The same anisotropy ratio opposite the completion interval as applies to the
undisturbed formation is used for the crushed and damaged zone permeability. It is
suggested that the crushed and damaged zone permeability ratio should be the
product:
Rcrushed and damaged = RdamagedRcrushed only.
Where the ratio for the damaged zone:
Rdamaged = damaged (horizontal) permeability / undisturbed formation
(horizontal) permeability
and the crushed-only zone:
Rcrushed only = only crushed zone (horizontal) permeability / undisturbed
formation (horizontal) permeability.
7.9.2.9 Perforations
The perforation data input depends on the option selected. If In-Situ Geometry is selected,
the actual perforation sizes are required. Alternatively, API test data can be entered for a
particular gun, and SkinAide will estimate the perforation geometry considering completion
and reservoir variables such as compressive strength and casing size.
Shot Density - Nominal shots per foot for the selected perforating gun.
Gun Phasing - Angle between two adjacent perforating charges. Affects interference
between perforation tunnels.
Angle Between Vertical Plane and Perforations - For anisotropic reservoirs, the angle
between the perforation tunnels and the direction of maximum permeability influences
productivity. When 0 or 180 guns are selected, perforations are all aligned with the low
side of the hole. For other gun phasings, SkinAide assumes an angle of 45.
API Test DataThe correction from test data to In-Situ conditions is influenced by the API test
series selected. The form of data input is identical for both options.
API RP 43/2 Total Target Penetration - Length of perforation in Berea sandstone target.
If RP 43/2 data is unavailable, use 2/3 of API RP43/1 cement target TTP.
API RP 43/1 Entry Hole Diameter - Entry hole diameter for steel / cement target test.
Note that the steel quality changes between Editions 4 and 5 of the API test
specifications. Ensure the relevant data is entered.
Gun diameter - Gun diameter is used to correct API perforation test results for stand-off.
Reservoir Uniaxial Compressive Strength - Compressive strength is used to calculate
in-situ perforation dimensions. Typical values of reservoir uniaxial compressive strength
are given in the following table:
Rock Density - Enter apparent In-Situ rock density as measured by a density log, not the
density of the minerals (e.g. Quartz) that comprise the formation grains.
Casing Elastic Limit - Used for correction of API data to In-situ perforation dimensions.
The elastic limit in thousands of psi corresponds to the pipe steel quality. e.g. N80
casing has an elastic limit stress of 80,000 psi.
Reservoir Stress - Used for correction of API data to In-situ perforation dimensions.
Stress is assumed to be Isotropic. Generally the minimum effective stress (frac
gradient) is suitable.
Gravel Packs in SkinAideWhen the Gravel Pack option has been selected, additional data
entry is required to describe the pack geometry and properties. Separate gravel properties
can be entered for the annular gravel pack and the sand in the perforation tunnels. This
allows mixing of formation and pack sand to be simulated.
Screen Outside Diameter - The space between the screen O.D. and the drilled hole
diameter is occupied by gravel.
Annulus Gravel Permeability - Permeability of gravel in the space between the screen
and the open hole. Gravel size is specified in terms of mesh size. e.g. 20/40 mesh
gravel will pass a sieve with 1/20 inch holes, but not pass a 1/40 inch sieve. Average
laboratory measured permeability values for various gravel sizes are given in the
following table:
Annulus Gravel Porosity - Used in calculation of high velocity flow coefficient in the
gravel pack.
Tunnel Gravel Permeability - Used to reduce the permeability of sand in the perforation
tunnels due to mixing of formation and gravel pack sand.
Tunnel Gravel Porosity - Used to reduce the porosity of sand in the perforation tunnels.
The inflow and skin pressure drop are computed by clicking the Calculate button once all the
relevant input data have been entered and Plot to display the results. To evaluate the
contribution of individual completion components in the inflow performance, click Variables
and select the parameters to display as in the following screen example:
Select the required variables by clicking their check boxes. Click Done to display the results:
Skin Components
The conceptual models used to calculate the total skin factor include :
- a contribution due to the position of the producing interval with respect to reservoir
geometry, called geometric skin Sgeometric
- contributions due to pressure losses close to the actual wellbore, beginning with the
pressure loss due to the damaged zone and ending with pressure loss in the
casing/screen annulus for gravel packed wells. This contribution to the total skin is
called the completion skin Scompletion.
The total skin is the sum of the two components
Stotal =Sgeometric + Scompletion
The contribution Scompletion to the total skin is particularly convenient when using reservoir
engineering equations. However Scompletion does not necessarily reflect the quality of the
completion itself. Indeed, imagine two wells with identical completions, producing reservoirs
with identical properties, the thickness of one reservoir is double that of the other:
Scompletion = a k h DPcompletion / ( Q m B )
Since DPcompletion is identical but reservoir thickness h differs by a factor 2, applying the above
relation leads to values of Scompletion, which differ, by a factor 2.
Mechanical skins are defined so as to reflect the quality of well completion. In the formula for
mechanical skins, the vertical reservoir thickness h is replaced by the length of the
producing interval (measured along the wellbore) hp :
Smechanical = a k hp DPskin / ( Q m B )
where, for oil wells,
SI US French
a depends on units 2p 7.07 10-3 0.0536
k permeability m2 mD mD
hp length of the completed interval m ft m
DPskin DPreal well - DPidealized well Pa psi bar
Q flowrate (standard conditions) m3/s bpd m3/d
m viscosity (reservoir conditions) Pa.s cP cP
B fluid formation volume factor v/v v/v v/v
Total and mechanical skins are related by the simple formula :
Smechanical / hp = Scompletion / h
Furthermore, to provide a consistency with other Petroleum Experts products the interface
has the same look and feel as the one in GAP.
7.10.1.2Interface Overview
The multilateral data entry screen is accessed by choosing System | Inflow Performance
from the PROSPER main menu, as with the single well IPR. However, before that the
multilateral option must be chosen in the Options screen, also accessed from the main
menu. The main screen is depicted in Figure 7.55.
The User interface consists of a framework window that contains several child windows, as
well as the menu and toolbar from which commands are issued. The child windows include
the network windows that contain the system network drawing, the navigator window that
can assist in the viewing of large networks and up to three visualisation windows, which can
show the multilateral network drawn to scale from three orthogonal points of view.
Four main components of the interface are identified, as indicated on the diagram above,
which are described in more detail in the following sections:
2. Navigator window contains a full schematic that can be used to help navigation about
large systems.
3. Menu bar and toolbar. The menu bar is used for issuing commands to PROSPER and
the interface; it contains an abridged set of commands compared to a normal application
framework window because it is a subsidiary window of the main programme. The toolbar
contains menu accelerators, icons for selecting and manipulating network nodes and
links, and icons for zooming or unzooming on the network window.
4. Visualisation screen up to three windows showing front, side and top views of the
multilateral network.
The network window is the main window on which the multilateral network is displayed and
manipulated. More than one network window can be displayed at one time; this means that
different views of the same system are available simultaneously, which can be of help in
The system window is used to draw, edit, and view the system. The network nodes are
represented by coloured icons. The different actions that can be performed on this window
are obtained by clicking the right hand mouse button within the area of the system window,
which brings up a menu. Alternatively, the same set of actions can be performed using the
toolbar or the menu, which are described below.
Only the four left most items in the toolbar (tie-point, junction, completion and tank/reservoir)
are nodes: links, the fifth item, are added differently by dragging between two nodes.
Depending on a set of connection rules, the connection will be made or not and the correct
type of link will be chosen. For example, reservoirs can only be attached to completions and
the type of link is logical; in other cases the link is a piece of tubing. These rules are
reviewed in the description of toolbar items. The network is hierarchical and arrows drawn
on the links indicate the direction of the connections (which is normally the same direction as
increasing vertical depth). Each icon is given a characteristic colour, depending on the
network item it represents. The colours and items are: red (tie-point), green (junction),
yellow (completion), blue (reservoir) and pink (tubing).
Zoom/Unzoom
To zoom or unzoom, first select the appropriate icon from the toolbar or from the right hand
mouse menu, as described above. To zoom in on an area, hold the left hand mouse button
while sweeping the mouse cursor over the area of interest. Alternatively, click once at a point
in the system, and the programme will zoom or unzoom on that point using a fixed scaling
factor (which may be adjusted using the Preferences dialog in the Preferences menu).
To revert to a full system view at any time, double-click the left hand mouse button at any
point in the window (except on an icon). The view will re-scale to show the whole of the
system.
Mask/Unmask
To mask or unmask, first select the appropriate icon from the toolbar or from the right hand
mouse menu, as described above. To mask a node, click on itwith mask selected; to
unmask it click on it with unmask selected. Masking removes a node from the calculation
without removing it and its associated data from the network (which deleting does). Masking
is useful for simulating the effect of removing or adding in completions. Note that masking a
branch will have the effect of masking those below it in the hierarchy.
Moving Items
Select the move option from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. To move a
single item, place the mouse cursor above it and hold down the left mouse button while
dragging the mouse cursor to the desired new location. To move a group, select an area as
with the zoom option and then hold down the left mouse button with the mouse cursor in the
window before dragging the whole group to a new location. Items stay selected after a
group move but can be de-selected using the select option.
Deletion of Items
Select the delete icon from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. Groups of items
may be deleted by group-selecting them as above, but with the delete option chosen. NB:
deletion of a node deletes the data associated with it so this option should be used with
caution. To delete a pure (non data-carrying) link re-do it.
Selection of Items
To select an item or items, first choose the select icon (black arrow) from the toolbar or from
the right hand mouse menu, the selected item will change colour. Group selections can be
achieved by first selecting the select icon then drag the left hand mouse button over the area
of interest. The select option is a toggle, so it can select or de-select items. Group
selections can be used to turn off the selection actioned by a group move.
Editing of Items
If a network item carries data it has an icon associated with it and can be edited by double
clicking on it provided that none of zoom/unzoom, move, delete or select are chosen.
Editing of network item data is covered in the section on Data Entry.
Panning
To move the view around the system, move the cursor close to the edge of the view in the
direction the system will be moved. The cursor will change to an arrow. Clicking the left hand
mouse button will move the system view by a fixed amount depending on the current scaling
factor. To pan quickly, hold the mouse button down and, after a short time, the pan action
will 'auto-repeat'.
Maximise: Click this button to maximise the window to fill the multilateral main
window.
Close: Click this button to remove the window from the workspace.
System menu: This contains various functions allowing the window to be maximised,
minimised, moved, etc.
This window can be used to aid in navigation about a large system. It will always consist of a
system schematic that is independent of any zooming on a system window. In addition to the
network, it contains a tracking rectangle that encloses the portion of the system currently
under view in the system window.
The tracking rectangle has two functions. If the focus is currently on a network window, this
rectangle surrounds the area of the network that that view is displaying. Alternatively, the
rectangle may be used to create new views of the network if the navigator window is
currently in focus. When the mouse is moved over the rectangle, the cursor changes to
allow resizing of the rectangle. In this way, the navigator window facilitates creating views in
areas of interest. Double-clicking the left hand mouse button in the area will create a new
system view displaying the selected area, although resized to preserve a sensible aspect
ratio.
Navigator On Top: By default, the navigator is always on top of all system views. This can
be changed by selecting this item from the menu.
Hide Window: The navigator can be hidden using this option and, once removed, will not
appear in subsequent sessions until reopened from the Window menu. The navigator can
also be hidden by clicking on the cross button at the top right hand corner of the window or
by using the Window menu option.
The toolbar is located below the main menu at the top of the main window. It consists of a
row of icons (described below) which act as accelerators to the menu functions accessed
from the Tools menu or most of those called from the right hand mouse button in the
network window.
The functions of the various buttons are described below. A quick description can be gained
for a given button by holding the mouse cursor over the button for a moment. A small yellow
box with a short description will appear.
Connections between nodes are created by choosing the Link button and holding down the
mouse left hand button whilst dragging between the nodes. There is a connection hierarchy,
which is represented by the branching of a parent branch into one or more child branches, in
the same way that the multilateral well branches out physically. Indicate the direction of the
hierarchy for junction-completion or completion-completion connections by the order in
which they are joined up.
Tie-point. This is the node for which the IPR is solved and is located at the top
of the system (in vertical depth and hierarchically). Hence, the tie-point can only
be a start point.
Junction. The main purpose of the junction is to be a branching node. It can
only have one link into it (from a tie-point, completion or other junction) but any
number coming out.
Completion. This contains both tubing and completion information. It is
attached below a tie-point, junction or another completion. It can only have one
link into it and branches out to either a junction or another completion. It can
also be logically attached (no direction implied) to any number of reservoirs (but
at least one).
Tank/reservoir. This represents a reservoir source and is logically attached to
any number of completions (but at least one).
Link. Connecting to a junction, the link becomes a tubing node and contains
data. Going into a completion, the tubing information is in the completion and
the link is blank only indicating the hierarchical relationship between the nodes
it connects with an arrow. Finally, when connecting a completion and a
reservoir, the link is logical and not hierarchical. Note that re-doing a link
between two nodes will delete it.
Zoom in/out. When 'zoom in/out' is selected, a zoom can be achieved either by
clicking the mouse on the system window, which will zoom in/out a fixed amount
and set the centre of the view to the position clicked. If zoom in is selected,
sweeping an area with the mouse will zoom in on the area selected. The aspect
ratio will be retained when an area zoom is performed.
Mask/Unmask an item. After masking is selected specific items can be
removed from the network for calculation purposes without deleting them. This
is particularly useful for seeing the effect of removing a completion item.
Delete a node. After this is selected, the node may be deleted by clicking on the
item in the system window. The icon automatically becomes unselected
following a deletion to prevent accidental deletion of further nodes. To delete a
pure (non data-carrying) link re-do it.
Move a node. After this is selected, a node may be moved by clicking on the
item in the system window and then, with the mouse button depressed, dragging
the item to the new position. A group of nodes may also be selected and
moved.
Select a node. After this is pressed, a node may be selected/de-selected by
clicking on the item in the system window. The item will reverse its colour to
indicate selection/de-selection.
Finish
Done exits the screen but validates the multilateral structure and data first. If the structure
is not valid a warning message appears providing the opportunity to remain in the
multilateral screen. One can exit the data screen, however, the data are marked invalid.
Cancel leaves the multilateral screen, restoring the network to its state at the start of the
edit session.
Tools
These are equivalent to items to the right of, and indeed inside, the drop-down list box in the
tool bar and have been explained above.
Analyse
This menu contains options to plot and report the IPR results in a similar way to those in the
Single Well IPR. The multi-lateral is treated as one reservoir model option, such as the
multi-layer with dP friction loss. There is also a Calculate option, which brings up the dialog
in the following figure.
The Calculate screen gives the option of calculating one IPR point or a curve. In the former
case pressure can be calculated from a rate or rate from a pressure. In the latter case,
pressure is calculated for a range of rates up to the AOF, as with other IPR calculations.
From this screen it is possible to specify the number of IPR points (maximum 20) and the
minimum pressure to calculate to. These are to help speed up calculations if appropriate.
Results of the points for curve calculation will be reported at the bottom section of the
screen. Also, having a bearing on calculation speed is the switch between infinite and finite
conductivity modes of calculation. In the latter case the pressure drop in the tubing is taken
into account. Before carrying out the calculation, the network structure is validated and any
errors are reported in the white list box in the middle section of the screen. If the structure is
not valid the calculation is not carried out. The Details button is used to display pressure and
rate-related parameters with respect to the measured and vertical tubing depths of each
branch.
During a calculation, diagnostic information is reported to the list box. Also, a Cancel button
is placed above the Calculate button to allow stopping the calculation. The buttons to the
left of the list box perform the functions in the Analyse menu, except Help, which brings up
this section. The push button Done exits the screen.
Visualise
These items are dealt with in the section on visualisation screens.
Preferences
The preferences dialog is gained from the Preferences item of the frame window menu. It
allows customisation of a set of User-interface variables for subsequent PROSPER
sessions. The following options are available:
Enable Flyover Status Information. If this is checked then a status box appear as the
mouse is moved over the network item icons.
Auto-repeat delay when panning. When panning, the left-hand mouse button may be
held down to auto-repeat the action. The value given in this field represents the time (in
ms) before the auto-repeat action starts from when the mouse button is clicked.
Fraction of screen to pan per click. This represents the resolution of panning.
Zoom/unzoom factor. A single click in a system window while the zoom or unzoom icons
are active results in a fixed scaling to be applied to the view, while the centre of the view
is changed to the position in which the mouse was clicked. The value entered in this field
is the fixed scaling factor, and as such should be greater than one.
Background. The background bitmap that is displayed on the background of the main
window (by default this is a PE logo with contact information) may be changed. Select
the required bitmap by pressing the button to the right of the field. The bitmap will only
be loaded after shut down and restarting the multilateral main screen.
Output
Printer Setup - to set up the printer if not already done.
Print - prints the current child window as a hard-copy, metafile or to the clipboard, whether a
network window or a visualisation screen.
Window Menu
New Window. This creates a new system view. The new view is zoomed out to include
all the components.
Close All. Shuts down all system windows in the application.
Cascade. This reorganises the system windows into a cascade.
Tile. Tiles the system windows.
Toggle toolbar display. This will remove the toolbar if it is currently displayed, and
vice-versa. If the toolbar is not displayed, toolbar commands can be accessed via the
right hand mouse button on the system view window.
Toggle navigator display. Displays or hides the navigator window.
Below this is a list of currently active system windows. The current focus window may be
changed by clicking on one.
Help
Brings up this information on the network interface.
Other Items
Apart from the preferences it is possible to change other aspects of the User interface:
namely font and icon sizes.
Network Fonts
Fonts used in the network drawing may be changed. To do this, select the Fonts option from
the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button click in the system window. This will
bring up a font selection dialog. Select the required font and style and press OK. The new
font will be applied to all network drawings and also to labels in the visualisation windows.
Icon Sizes
The sizes of the icons used to represent the network nodes can be changed. Select the Icon
Sizes option from the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button click in the system
window. The following dialog will appear:
The dialog consists of a slider with a data entry field, which contains the current icon size
(this defaults to 50 out of an arbitrary 0 100 range for a new file). Change the icon size by
adjusting the slider or entering a new size in the entry field. Check the Automatic Update
box to update the system window with the new size as the slider is moved.
When the new icon size is entered, click on This View or All Views. In the latter case the
change will be applied to all network windows. In the former case, only the currently active
network view will be changed. The new icon size will not be saved; i.e. all changes will be
lost when the current file is exited.
These screens supply three 2-D views (front, side and top) of the 3-D multilateral object.
The salient visual objects (tie-points, junctions, tubing, completions and reservoirs) are
drawn symbolically but they are spaced to scale. The screens are updated whenever a
network item is edited and has a valid data set and whenever an item is deleted or becomes
invalid. The visualisation objects are given the same colour as their equivalent network
objects (e.g. blue for reservoirs), and are identified by the same labels as in the network
structure.
The geometry used is left-handed Cartesian. It is assumed that the positive x axis is along
the direction of zero azimuth, positive y is at 90 degrees and positive z is in the direction of
increasing depth. The front view shows the (x, z) plane, where y is increasing going into the
screen and consequently positive z corresponds to moving down the screen and positive x
corresponds to moving to the right. The side view shows the (y, z) plane, where x increases
coming out of the screen, z increases going down the screen and y increases going to the
right. The top view shows the (y, x) plane where z is increasing going into the screen, x
increases going down the screen and y increases going to the right.
The screens are brought up using the Visualise menu. One of the three views (front, side
and top) or all of them can be activated using the appropriate menu command. If all the
views are shown then they are tiled with any active network windows. The title bar of each
view window shows the extent of the network for the plane in question. The co-ordinates are
shown with respect to the start of a (hypothetical) straight tubing, which enters the tie-point
in the direction of zero azimuth and has measured and vertical depths equivalent to those of
the tie-points. In a similar way to the network window one can pan across a visualisation
window by moving the mouse cursor close to one of the window edges and clicking on the
left button when the panning cursor appears. The fraction of the screen traversed and the
auto-repeat delay are controlled by the same options as in the network window (chosen from
the Preferences dialog).
The data associated with any network item is accessed by double-clicking on its icon when
none of the network manipulation options (zoom/unzoom, delete, move and select) have
been chosen. This brings up a screen with editable data fields in it.
Apart from the tie-point and junction data screens, the main data entry screen for each node
is similar to that of the single well main data entry screen (see Section 7.1). However, the
reservoir data input child screen does not have any tab buttons in it. The main data screens
differ from the single well case in the action buttons: only the left-most group - Done,
Cancel, Reset, Validate and Help - are available. Their function is the same as in the single
well case. Hence, the differences between the single well IPR data entry and the similar
multilateral ones lie in the model selection and data input child screens.
Given the hierarchical nature of the network, editing a parent branch causes the starting
points (e.g. depths) of child branches to be initialised. Those data fields that are initialised
from outside a particular network item are set read-only (coloured cyan) when the screen to
edit that net item is brought up. Hence, in order to edit a net item and fill it with valid data it
is normally necessary to have edited the parent branch first. However, it is not a
requirement to edit the network in hierarchical order as any child net item can be filled with
invalid data and saved before editing its parent.
Another difference from the single well IPR is that in each screen, on the right hand side,
there is a list box containing a drawing of the network where the data carrying nodes are
sorted hierarchically, by type or alphabetically according to a right-hand mouse button menu
selection. By clicking on the line corresponding to a node the given screen is closed and the
screen belonging to the node clicked on is opened.
The tie-point data consist of a measured and vertical depth, with an implied azimuth of 0.
The junction data are the same but are read-only. A junction must always be hierarchically
below another network item, so its data are entered automatically from its parent. As
mentioned earlier a junction mainly forms a branching point.
7.10.2.3Tubing Data
7.10.2.4Completion Data
The completion data screen represents tubing and a completion. Hence, it is a superset of
the tubing data screen and is the same except for one extra tabbed dialog in the data input
screen, for completion data. This dialog has fields in it similar to the single well IPR
Wong-Clifford model for describing a deviated completion (completion zone start and end
measured and true depths) as well as a field for entering a local (mechanical/geometric) skin
value. There is a drop-down list box in the fifth column, which allows the skin to be
calculated using the Karakas & Tariq method. The selection of Karakas and Tariq enables
the push button in the last column, which brings up an appropriate data entry screen when
clicked upon with the mouse left button. On entering valid data and exiting that screen with
Done the skin value is calculated and entered in the skin data column.
7.10.2.5Reservoir Data
Consistency Validation
Beyond the consistency enforced by the validation of individual network items as they are
edited and the automatic entry of some child branch data from parents, there are other
checks carried out on a complete structure whose nodes are individually valid:
There must be no more than one tie-point in a network; other loose items are ignored.
The top node must be a tie-point.
All branches must end in a completion; completions must be attached to at least one
reservoir.
Reservoirs should not overlap in depth (in the current model they are assumed to be
layers).
The purpose of this exercise is to enter some geometrical data for the simple multilateral in
the following back of an envelope sketch (Figure 7.58) and then visualise it using the V
isualise menu. It is assumed that the fluid selected is Oil and Water and the units system
is oilfield units. We will also show the procedure for running a calculation, to which purpose
some default PVT and geometric data should be entered in the reservoir screens. The
multilateral has two branches, with one branch having an azimuth of 170 with respect to the
other. The zig-zag lines indicate completions and the areas between the horizontal
straight-lines are layers/reservoirs. Note that one tubing branch contains two completions
and goes through two reservoirs. This will be modelled as one completion node and
logically attached to two reservoirs. The point at (12000, 10000) feet will serve as a
tie-point.
(12000, 10000)
10000 feet (12100, 10020)
(12200, 10020)
Kh = 100 mD
(12400, 10100)
10100 feet
10200 feet
(13000, 10210) (13000, 10220)
Kh = 50 mD
(14000, 10220)
(14000, 10280)
10300 feet
The nodes needed are one tie-point (as always), a junction (to model the branching), two
completions (although there are three zones, the data for two will be contained in one node),
and two reservoirs. Each node can be selected from one of the following:
1. Using the Tools | Add Item option in the frame window menu.
3. Selecting the required option from the drop-down list box in the toolbar.
Once the appropriate node addition option has been selected, click somewhere in the blank
network window to create an icon. Allow the programme to attach a default label to the
node by not entering one. Do this for all the required nodes listed above.
Before doing the connections, space the nodes and arrange them in height order with the
tie-point at the top, followed by the junction, followed by the completions and put the
reservoirs at the bottom. Keep the completions and reservoirs at the same horizontal level
with C1 and R1 on the left. Now select the link option and drag the mouse cursor (with the
left button down) between the following icons in order to make the connections: TP1-J1,
J1-C1, J1-C2, C1-R1, C2-R1 and C2-R2. Note that between the tie-point and the junction a
tubing icon is drawn to indicate that this link contains tubing data. The order of the
connections J1-C1 and J2-C2 are important for the reverse would imply that the completions
were above the junction hierarchically.
Tie-point (TP1)
Enter 12000 feet and 10000 feet for measured and vertical depth respectively and then click
on Done.
Tubing (T1)
Make sure that Flow Type is Tubing Flow on the model selection screen and a suitable
value (0.354 ft) is entered for well-bore radius. Then leave the model selection screen with
its other defaults and enter the data input screen using the button Input Data in the top right
hand corner. In the Deviation tabbed dialog enter the three numbers:
12100 10020 0
in the white boxes in row 2. Now enter the Equipment tabbed dialog by clicking on that
tab. In row 1 choose Tubing from the drop-down list box and then enter the four numbers:
Junction (J1)
The co-ordinates (12100, 10020) should already be entered in the junction net item.
C1 Deviation
13000 10210 170 (row 2)
14000 10280 170 (row 3)
C1 Equipment
14000 0.7 0.0006 1 (row 1)
C1 Completion Info.
13000 14000 10210 10280 1 (row 1)
C2 Deviation
12400 10100 0 (row 2)
13000 10220 0 (row 3)
14000 10220 0 (row 4)
C2 Equipment
The other fields in the model selection and data input screens (for both reservoirs) should be
entered with some reasonable numbers. For example: pressure (5000), temperature (200),
salinity (150000), water cut (15), GOR (800), gas gravity (0.9), oil gravity (30), vertical
permeability (10) and drainage area (500).
7.10.3.5Visualise / Calculate
Choosing Visualise |Front should show a picture similar to the one in the sketch in Figure
7-55.
Also, providing the data has been entered correctly, the network structure should be valid;
this can be verified by going to the screen brought up by the Analyse| Calculate menu
command and choosing one of the calculations.
Note that this exercise is not meant to represent a real case but only a reasonable set of
data that the program can process.
The comments below will describe what calculations are performed when a system
calculation needs to be performed and the Multilateral model is used.
a) PROSPER uses the already generated IPR with Analyze | Calculate | Calculate to
get the intersection between VLP and IPR first.
b) The solution FBHP from step a) is then used to refine the solution rate by performing
a single point calculation like Analyze | Calculate | Calculate | Calculation One
Point and this point uses the solution flowing bottom hole pressure
This means that whenever a change is made, the Analyze | Calculate | Calculate routine
needs to be re-run before performing a system calculation so that an updated IPR can be
used.
8
Artificial Lift Data Input 257
This section describes how to enter the description of artificial lift equipment in a well for
calculating a systems analysis. The Design section describes how to select suitable gas lift,
ESP, HSP, PCP and jet pump equipment for new or existing wells.
The required input depends on the choice of casing pressure calculation method. These are
the options available that can be selected in the general options:
Safety Equipment
Friction pressure losses are calculated in the surface piping, tubing/casing
annulus and an annular safety valve where fitted.
To analyse an existing installation, the gas lift details that need to be entered will depend
upon the particular gas lift method that has been selected.
Firstly select the gas lift system type on the Options menu, then enter the gaslift data by
selecting Gaslift data on the System menu.
Enter the required lift gas composition data. It is possible to model CO2 or N2 as the
injected gas. For example, to model CO2 injection enter Gaslift Gas Gravity = 1.53 and Mole
percent CO2 = 100%.
Select one of three gas lift methods available. The methods currently available are:
The program assumes that the casing pressure is sufficient to inject lift gas at the
specified depth to achieve the GLR injection target.
The GLR injected can be subsequently overwritten with entered calculation sensitivity
variables. If the GLR injected is unknown, leave it set to zero. The GLR to inject is set using
Sensitivity variables GLR injected or Injection gas rate in the Calculation section.
For the Gas lifted (safety equipment) option, the compressor discharge pressure is
requested instead of the casing pressure.
If a gas lift design has already been done, or the mandrel depths have been entered for a
Gaslift QuickLook Calculation, the valve details can be copied across using the Transfer
button.
The Casing pressure entered should be the available injection system pressure
for the current operating conditions If calculating sensitivities for a new casing
pressure operated design, always subtract the dP to close valves for each
unloading valve above the operating valve from the design casing pressure.
The safety equipment data can be entered by accessing the Safety Equipment button in this
screen.
The details of the surface injection system are used to calculate the casing head pressure
as a function of gas injection rate and compressor output pressure. Frictional losses in the
annulus are taken into account when calculating the casing pressure at each gas lift valve
depth. The safety valve pressure loss is clearly seen on the following gradient plot:
To specify the position of the gas lift valve, in the surface equipment data select this feature
in the equipment type combo box , as shown below:
And in the Gas Lift Data enter the properties of the gas and the GLR injected:
It is possible to model CO2 or N2 as the injected gas. For Example, to model CO2
injection enter the Gaslift Gas Gravity as 1.53 and enter Mole percent CO2 as
100%.
The Pump wear factor is used to account for deviation from the manufacturer's published
performance curves due to wear etc.
For example, entering 0.05 causes the program to scale the pump head curves
down by 5% (i.e. head is 95% of the database value).
When a downhole gas separator is run, the GOR of the oil above the separator will be lower
than the produced oil GOR. Depending on the completion, the separated gas is produced
up the annulus or a separate tubing string. Both casing I.D. and tubing O.D. are required to
be input on the System Equipment Downhole Equipment.
The Pump wear factor is defined as in the ESP pumps, as seen in the previous section.
Turbine speed is assumed to be the same as the Pump speed. The % Power Fluid of
Reservoir Fluid defines what fraction of the total produced liquids the power fluid represents.
A figure of 100% means that the amount of power fluid used to drive the turbine is
the same as the amount of produced reservoir fluids.
In order to select the correspondent pump and rods, the pump database must be set up first.
The section devoted to the PCP design will describe how to enter the correspondent pump
and rods database.
To analyse an existing installation, enter the data in the Coiled Tubing Data section, as
shown below:
Two lift methods are available: Specified Injection Depth and Optimum Injection Depth.
Please refer to the Gas Lift section above for further details.
With diluent injection, the light hydrocarbon diluent reduces crude viscosity and improves its
flow characteristics.
When Diluent injection is selected as Artificial Lift Method, Diluent Injection is active in the S
ystem menu.
The only input data required are injection rate and depth:
For analysis and optimisation of an existing Jet Pump installation, enter the data on the input
data screen as requested:
In this section the User has to select the Pump and enter specify its position and maximum
size along with injection rate and pressure.
The loss coefficients are also required. These coefficients are a measure of the energy loss
due to the friction in the above quoted sections of the pump.
The coefficients are provided by the Jet Pump manufacturers.
The Pump Wear Factor is defined in the same way as in the ESP pumps. Please refer to
that section for details.
Other input data are the power available, the pump configuration (single pump or pumps in
parallel) and the pump model.
The input data screen is directly connected to the database for the Sucker Rod Pumps.
9
Matching Menu 273
9 Matching Menu
The PROSPER Matching menu is mainly used for the following objectives:
Gradient Matching
Existing correlations can be modified using non-linear regression to best fit a
gradient survey. Comparison of the fit parameters will identify which correlation
required the least adjustment to match the measured data.
This should be used only if for a given rate more than one measurement is
available along the production string.
Pipeline Matching
The program uses actual wellhead and manifold pressures together with
temperature data points to match surface pressure drop correlations. Separate
screens allow the match parameters to be viewed and the best match selected.
Correlation Comparison
This is the primary step in quality control of measured well test data.
This option allows pressure gradient plots to be generated with different correlations
to be compared with measured gradient survey data. The comparison enables the
User to:
- Understand if the measurements make sense, that is to say, violate or not
the principles of physics
- Select the flow correlation that best fits the experimental measurement
Correlation Comparison is a fundamental step in the quality check of the model.
QuickLook
This feature is active only if an artificial lift method (Gas Lift, ESP or HSP) is
selected.
It allows calculation of the pressure gradient in an artificially lifted well for a quick
check of lift performance.
For gas lifted wells, valve opening and closing pressures are calculated to permit
troubleshooting gas lift installations.
For ESP and HSP wells, the performance of the ESP and HSP can be checked.
Correlation Parameters
The tubing and pipeline match parameters can be inspected reset or entered by
hand using this menu option. This capability is useful for troubleshooting, or to input
match parameters determined previously.
Correlation Thresholds
This option allows the User to specify a threshold angle for both tubing and pipeline
correlations at which the program will automatically change to another (specified)
correlation. This option will enable vertical risers in sub sea completions to be
modelled more accurately.
The Gas Oil Ratio is the solution GOR. If the reservoir is under-saturated,
there is no free gas production at the sand face and the GOR free should
be set to zero.
The Gas Oil Ratio can also be entered as Total GOR (Solution + Free
GOR). In this case the GOR Free can be entered as nil. The program will
determine how much gas is in solution and how much in the free phase
according to the PVT.
A comment can be entered for the test. Also, each test can be
Test Point Date and
associated to a date stamp
Comment
Flowing pressure for test rate entered.
Tubing Head Pressure
Flowing temperature at test rate. Usually has only a minor effect.
Tubing Head Temperature
Test water cut. (WGR for Gas or Condensate)
Water Cut
Enter either Oil or Liquid rates as selected. (Oil Wells Only)
Rate
Depth of measured pressure data point.
Gauge Depth
Measured pressure at test flow rate.
Gauge Pressure
Pressure of the reservoir when the test was taken. This field will not be
Reservoir Pressure
displayed if your IPR model is Multi Layer or Multi Lateral
Solution GOR (Oil) , CGR (Gas) or Separator GOR (Condensate)
GOR
Free gas production from a gas cap or injection breakthrough. The
GOR Free
measured total GOR during the test (including the tank gas) must equal
GOR + GOR Free. (Oil Well Only)
Rate of lift gas injection (gas lifted wells only).
Gaslift Gas Rate
Depth of operating valve (gas lifted wells only) .A good bottom hole
Injection Depth
pressure match will not be obtained if an incorrect injection depth is
used.
ESP lifted wells only
Operating Frequency
ESP Lifted wells only
Pump Wear Factor
The Test Point Date and Comment fields are provided to allow the optional entry of
notes to identify the match data set. Examples would be test date, source of
pressure data, comments on test quality etc.
This input screen has a number of features to simplify data manipulation. The
selection buttons on the left hand side are used to select data points for further
editing. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the required buttons to select multiple
points. Copy copies the selected points into memory and onto the Windows
clipboard. Click the selection button of the desired destination and click Paste to
copy the data to the new location. Insert shifts the data down to make room for new
entries. The Delete button deletes the selected records. Data from this table can be
copied to or from the Windows clipboard. Therefore, test data can be read in from a
Windows based spreadsheet by first copying it to the clipboard, and then pasting it
directly into the table.
Bad or inconsistent data points occasionally prevent the program obtaining a good
match. The Disable button causes a selected data record to be ignored in the
matching process. Disabled records are dimmed in the VLP matching screen.
Disabled points can be re-included in the matching process by first selecting the
point and clicking on Enable. By sequentially disabling suspect data points,
potentially inaccurate test points can be identified and eliminated from the match.
The User can now use the Correlation Comparison button to transfer the
selected well test data to the correlation comparison section. The
procedure is:
Click on the button to the left of the well test data that we wish to
perform correlation comparison on.
Click on the Correlation Comparison button
PROSPER will bring us to the correlation comparison screen and at
the same time, populate the correlation comparison screen with the
selected well test data.
New!!! In the current version of PROSPER for each well test it is possible
to enter a date stamp and the reservoir pressure at the time of the test.
This feature can be used to store the actual reservoir conditions and allow
the User to get back in time and check old tests.
Click the Statistics button to examine the match parameters as shown on the
example screen below:
PROSPER uses a non-linear regression to tune the VLP correlations to best match
the measured data. It does this by calculating a pressure traverse using a
correlation and determining the error between measured and calculated pressures.
The gravity and friction terms of the pressure loss equations are then adjusted and
the process repeated until the measured and calculated results agree within 1 psi, or
50 iterations have been completed.
Parameter 1 is the multiplier for the gravity term in the pressure drop
correlation
Parameter 2 is the multiplier for the friction term.
If all the data are consistent, these two parameters should be within a 10%
tolerance from the unity.
If PROSPER has to adjust Parameter 1 by more than +-10%, then there is
probably an inconsistency between the fluid density predicted by the PVT
model and the field data (rates/pressures).
If PROSPER has to adjust Parameter 2 by more than +-10%, then probably
the value of the roughness entered in the equipment is incorrect.
In cases the PVT has been correctly matched, the greatest source of uncertainty in
the VLP calculation for oil wells is usually the hold-up correlation. PROSPER will
attempt to make a gravity component (Parameter 1) match by adjusting the hold-up
correlation. If a match is not obtained with a Parameter 1 more than 5% away from
1.0, the density is adjusted. For single phase applications, no hold-up correction is
possible, so any significant deviation from 1.0 for Parameter 1 indicates a PVT
problem.
Once the matching process is complete, the match parameters will be shown
alongside each of the correlations that have been matched. Use the standard
deviations and the magnitude of corrections made to both parameters to aid the
selection of matched correlation.
Use the Correlation Comparison option of the Matching menu to compare the
optimised (matched) correlations with measured test data. To ensure that the
process has been successful, check that the matched VLP traverses plot close to
the measured pressure data points.
For oil wells, Hagedorn Brown performs well for slug flow at moderate to high
production rates but well loading is poorly predicted. Hagedorn Brown should not be
used for condensates and whenever mist flow is the main flow regime. Hagedorn
Brown under predicts VLP at low rates and should not be used for predicting
minimum stable rates.
Duns and Ros Modified usually performs well in mist flow cases and should be
used in high GOR oil and condensate wells. It tends to over-predict VLP in oil wells.
Despite this, the minimum stable rate indicated by the minimum of the VLP curve is
often a good estimate.
Duns and Ros Original is the original published method, without the enhancements
applied in the primary Duns and Ros correlation. The primary Duns and Ros
correlation in PROSPER has been enhanced and optimised for use with
condensates.
Petroleum Experts correlation combines the best features of existing correlations. It uses
the Gould et al flow map and the Hagedorn Brown correlation in slug flow, and Duns
and Ros for mist flow. In the transition regime, a combination of slug and mist
results is used.
Petroleum Experts 2 includes the features of the PE correlation plus original work on
predicting low-rate VLPs and well stability.
Petroleum Experts 3 includes the features of the PE2 correlation plus original work for
viscous, volatile and foamy oils.
Petroleum Experts 4 is an advanced mechanistic model for any angled wells (including
downhill flow) suitable for any fluid (including Retrograde Condensate).
Orkiszewski correlation often gives a good match to measured data. However, its
formulation includes a discontinuity in its calculation method. The discontinuity can
cause instability during the pressure matching process; therefore we do not
encourage its use.
Gray correlation gives good results in gas wells for condensate ratios up to around
50 bbl/MMscf and high produced water ratios. Gray contains its own internal PVT
model which over-rides PROSPERs normal PVT calculations.
For very high liquid dropout wells, use a Retrograde Condensate PVT and
the Duns and Ros correlation.
There is no universal rule for selecting the best flow correlation for a given
application. It is recommended that the Correlation Comparison always be
carried out. By inspecting the predicted flow regimes and pressure results,
the User can select the correlation that best models the physical situation.
Further details can be found in the PROSPER Help menu, under HelpFlow
Correlations. References about multiphase flow are reported in Appendix B.
Select the desired correlation and then click Calculate, and PROSPER will calculate
the VLP for a range of rates and pressure at the sand face for each of the active test
points that have been entered on the VLP Matching screen. Once this calculation is
completed, click Plot and the VLP/IPR plot will be displayed along with the test point:
The errors between calculated and measured data are shown on the side of the plot.
If the test points are not consistent with the IPR model, the skin, etc. can be
adjusted until a match is obtained. To modify the data of the IPR, select IPR, which
will access the IPR input screen.
NEW!!! During the adjustment of the IPR, to modify the value of the
Reservoir Pressure, change the reservoir pressure entered in the test data
screen
Inconsistent test data points will be easily identified on this plot. Clicking Finish
returns to the Adjust IPR screen. Matching both the VLP and IPR to actual test data
ensures that the PROSPER well model is capable of accurately reproducing the
currently known producing conditions.
The first node pressure is entered in the Input Parameters section - do not include it
in the Match Data table. The Transfer button copies the measured gradient data
from the Correlation comparison data. The same guidelines for GOR apply as for
VLP/IPR Matching. Enter the required data and click Match. The following will be
displayed:
Select the correlations to be matched by clicking on them, and then click Match to
start the matching routine. Parameter 1 is the correction factor applied to the gravity
component of pressure drop whilst Parameter 2 is the factor applied to the frictional
element of pressure drop. The match algorithm continues until the standard error is
less than 1 psi, or 50 iterations have been performed. The adjusted correlation and
measured pressures can be visually compared by clicking Plot. A graph similar to
the following is displayed:
The match points appear as blue squares in the figure reported above.
The calculated pressure gradient can be inspected by clicking View. Click the S
tatistics button to display the match parameters. Use the statistics and knowledge of
well conditions and correlation performance to guide the choice of VLP correlation.
Once a correlation has been matched, the match parameters are appended to the
correlation name for all subsequent operations. Should it be necessary to adjust or
clear the match parameters, click the Reset button for a particular correlation, or use
the Reset All button to reset all correlations to their un-matched state.
The User can now use the Correlation Comparison button to transfer the
selected pipeline test data to the pipeline correlation comparison section.
The procedure is:
Click on the button to the left of the pipeline test data that we wish to
perform correlation comparison on.
Click on the Correlation Comparison button
PROSPER will bring us to the pipeline correlation comparison screen
and at the same time, populate the correlation comparison screen
with the selected pipeline test data.
Enter measured manifold and tubing head pressures for a range of rates and click M
atch to enter the calculation screen. Select the correlations to match in the same
manner as for Gradient matching. All editing and calculation controls operate as
described under Gradient matching. Once the matching is complete, click OK to
return to the main menu.
Click Matching Correlation comparison to display the following data entry screen:
Note that in Correlation comparison, the first node is the wellhead only if
there is no surface equipment or it has been disabled.
Enter the surface flowing conditions at which to compare the flowing gradients
calculations for the selected Vertical Lift correlations. Select a surface equipment
correlation then click on the required Vertical Lift correlations to select a number of
them from the list. Please remember that the lowest and highest pressure drops are
given by Fancher and Brown (no slip) and Duns and Ross Modified (highest
pressure drop in the slug flow regime) for oil wells. These can serve as quality check
boundaries for downhole measurements. Fancher Brown should never be used for
actual calculations.
Ensure that the rate type is correct for the specific application.
The value of GOR should reflect the current solution GOR and at no time
should exceed the initial solution GOR.
The GOR Free variable is used to model the effect of free gas production
from a gas cap or injection gas breakthrough. Leave GOR Free set to zero
if there is no free gas production.
The sum of GOR and GOR Free should equal the producing GOR.
Pressure data from a gradient survey can be entered versus depth in the measured
data boxes. The Transfer button copies the measured depths and pressures from
the Gradient Match section.
For gas lifted wells, both the injection depth and gas lift injection rate are
required to be input.
Note that the producing GOR should not include the lift gas injection.
When the input data is complete, click on Calculate to display the calculations
screen, then press the Calculate button to compute the pressure gradient in tabular
form as shown below:
For all the correlation selected for calculations, use the scroll thumb below the
results box to access the results of calculations.
A visual comparison of all selected correlations and the test data is easily made by
clicking on the Plot button. The plot can be output or saved using the standard
features of PROSPER and Windows. An example comparison plot is shown below:
This plot is a useful quality check on the PVT and field production data. The
Fancher Brown correlation does not allow for gas/liquid slippage, therefore it should
always predict a pressure that is less than the measured value. Measured data
falling to the left of Fancher Brown on the gradient comparison plot indicates a
problem with fluid density (i.e. PVT) or the field data (pressure or rate). The use of
the gradient comparison plot is recommended to help identify flow regimes and
assess input data quality.
artificial lift and production parameters in turn, the experienced User can determine if
the well is behaving as designed, or identify potential reasons to explain the
deviation from design conditions.
9.5.1 Input
The gas lift QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook
from the Matching menu displays the following screen:
The surface measurements section contains two columns for data input.
If unloading valve details have been entered, their opening and closing pressures will
be shown on the plot also.
Tubing head pressure Enter expected flowing pressure for the well.
Total gas rate Enter total gas production through the separator - including the lift gas
contained in the produced well stream.
Orifice diameter Enter diameter of orifice where gas is entering the string. This diameter
is used to estimate the pressure drop between casing and tubing at the
injection depth. For wells having multiple injecting orifices at the same
depth, enter an equivalent area.
Vertical flow correlation Select the most appropriate correlation for the application. Use a
matched correlation where available.
Dome Pressure Correction When set to Yes, the improved high-pressure dome pressure
above 1200 psi temperature method is used.
The purpose of this section is to check that all the data is consistent. The static
gradient can also be displayed on the plot by entering two static pressure
measurement points. Downhole measurement entry is optional.
For PROSPER to determine which gas lift valves should be open and closed for the
current producing conditions, the valve depths and characteristics must first be
entered. Click Valves from the QuickLook screen to display the following:
The valve type (casing or tubing sensitive), setting depth, port size, R-value and
dome pressure at 60 F are required to calculate whether valves are open or closed.
Opening pressure etc. fields will be blank until a QuickLook calculation has been
performed. Entering the valve data for the QuickLook is optional.
Select between the up pass and down pass using the buttons located beside the
Case box as in the following example:
In the Results box, the program displays the theoretical dP across the injecting valve
together with the casing pressure theoretically required to balance the flowing tubing
pressure at the injection depth plus the dP across the orifice.
Click Plot to display the two computed gradients plus the valve opening and closing
pressures on the same graph:
This plot enables the User to see at a glance which valves should be open or closed,
and how changes in operating pressures would impact on the valves. The results
box displays the following computed values:
Temperature at valve Interpolated for Predicting pressure only option. Can also be
calculated using the Rough Approximation temperature option.
GOR Free Calculated from production and injection rates and PVT.
dP across valve Pressure loss resulting from injection through the valve orifice.
Theoretical casing pressure Pressure at surface back calculated from the tubing pressure at
injection depth plus the dP across the operating valve less the gas
pressure traverse back to surface.
Producing draw down Difference in static and flowing sand face pressures.
Equivalent P.I. When flowing above bubble point, the production rate divided by
Critical flow rate Injection rate required for sonic velocity through the orifice.
% Critical flow rate Actual injection rate as a fraction of the critical rate.
Historically, ESP wells have been difficult to diagnose (particularly with limited down
hole pressure data) because of uncertainties below (IPR), across (pump head) and
above (tubing hydraulics) the pump. Using the ESP QuickLook, conditions in each of
these areas can be analysed separately.
9.6.1 Input
The ESP QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook from
the Matching menu displays the following screen:
Select the required pump, motor and cable from the buttons at the top of the screen.
Downhole pressure data Enter gauge data if available, usually pump intake and pump
discharge pressures
Note that PROSPER always calculates from the bottom up for ESP systems
since, in order to find the tubing GOR above the pump, conditions at the
pump intake where gas separation takes place must be known. The
calculation of the downward pressure traverse from the entered tubing
head pressure is therefore iterative.
Select between the up pass and down pass using the buttons located beside the
Case box as in the following example:
Click Plot to display the pressure traverses and the calculated pump intake and
discharge pressures, down hole average rate across the pump (RB/day), free gas
fraction at the pump intake and electrical parameters:
If the well bore, inflow and ESP assumptions are all correct, the two pressure
traverses will overlay and the measured and calculated intake and discharge
pressures and surface voltages should coincide.
The pump discharge pressure is the tie point for the system. First match
the pump discharge pressure (if available) from the top down traverse. The
pump discharge pressure depends only on the weight and frictional
resistance to the flow rate through the tubing to surface.
Next match the pump intake pressure from the top down traverse. If the
calculated and measured pressure differential (head) across the pump is
different, then the assumptions of pump wear, fluid density (water cut) and
pump frequency should be examined.
The top down traverse will now give the resulting bottom hole flowing
pressure. This should be compared with the bottom up calculation and will
indicate any discrepancy with the inflow performance module assumptions.
regarding well and HSP conditions (e.g. pump and turbine speed, wear factor, water
cuts, wellhead pressure, IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses will
overlay.
9.7.1 Input
The HSP QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook from
the Matching menu displays the following screen:
Select the required pump and turbine from the buttons at the top of the screen.
Downhole pressure data Enter gauge data if available, usually pump intake and pump
discharge pressures
Select between the up pass and down pass using the buttons located beside the
Case box as in the following example:
Click Plot to display the pressure traverses and the calculated pump intake and
discharge pressures, down hole average rate across the pump (RB/day) and pump
and turbine parameters:
If the well bore, inflow and pump and turbine assumptions are all correct, the two
pressure traverses will overlay and the measured and calculated intake and
discharge pressures and surface voltages should coincide.
The pump discharge pressure is the tie point for the system. First match
the pump discharge pressure (if available) from the top down traverse. The
pump discharge pressure depends only on the weight and frictional
resistance to the flow rate through the tubing to surface.
Next match the pump intake pressure from the top down traverse. If the
calculated and measured pressure differential (head) across the pump is
different, then the assumptions of pump wear, fluid density (water cut) and
pump speed should be examined.
The top down traverse will now give the resulting bottom hole flowing
pressure. This should be compared with the bottom up calculation and will
indicate any discrepancy with the inflow performance module assumptions.
10
Calculation Menu 309
10 Calculation Menu
This chapter describes all the calculation methods available in PROSPER and how
to calculate system production rates, run sensitivity analyses, generate lift curve
tables etc. The available calculation types are:
Inflow (IPR)
This option calculates the IPR, that is to say, the relationship between tubing intake
rate and the bottomhole flowing pressure (BHFP). The Inflow calculation allows to
quickly run sensitivities without the need to calculate the system solution rate. This
is especially convenient for e.g. frac program design, gravel pack design, perforation
programming.
System (Ipr+Vlp)
This option will calculate both the tubing outflow (VLP) and tubing inflow (IPR) curves
and determine the system operating rate and bottom hole flowing pressure. It also
allows to perform sensitivity analyses with a wide range of variables. Sensitivity plots
can easily be generated.
Two options are available: 3 variables (for naturally flowing wells) and 4 variables.
Gradient (Traverse)
This option enables you to generate gradient plots. If the correlations have been
matched, the gradients will be generated using the tuned correlations.
Choke Performance
This is a convenient choke calculator for flow rates, pressure drop or choke settings.
Choke Performance Curves can be visualised (NEW!!!).
The selection of lift method and IPR model also affects the available
sensitivity variables and specialised calculations.
To select this calculation type, choose Calculation Inflow (IPR) from the main menu
toolbar.
A few data on the fluid quality are required, along with the selection of the rate range
for which to run the calculation.
User selected
You can either enter a table of up to 20 rates directly, or PROSPER will G
enerate them for you. Click Generate from the User Selected rate entry
screen and the following screen will be presented:
Enter values for the first and last rates in the table plus the number of entries
required. Depending on the selection of Linear or Geometric spacing, PROSPER will
calculate the required rate table.
Use the Try button for the preview of the entered range and Done to confirm.
User selected rates can be useful when using the AOF is inappropriate for
the range of sensitivity variables to be considered.
The range of Inflow variables available depend on the particular IPR model entered
in System Inflow performance.
For each of the selected variables enter the values by hand, or click Generate to
have PROSPER calculate a range of values as follows. The Generate feature is
exactly the same as the one for the Rate Method entry.
Leaving the sensitivity variable screen empty will run the calculation with the
default parameters entered in the main IPR section.
Once set up the Inflow sensitivity variables, click OK Calculate to calculate the IPR
pressures. The results will be reported in a table:
In the Variables area scroll teh various parameter to display the desired sensitivity.
The results can be exported to different destinations (like for example the Clipboard)
by selecting Export.
Clicking on Report will instead export the results to a Report sheet.
On this plot by pressing on the VARIABLES option on the menu bar, you
can get a display of all the variables that have been calculated during IPR
calculations, like skin, dP skin etc. These can be plotted as well.
To enter the System Calculation area select CalculationSystem (Ipr+Vlp) from the
menu toolbar.
The first input screen requires the Top Node Pressure and the data concerning the
fluid quality (e.g. WC and GOR) and allows to select correlations for surface and
downhole equipment as well as select a rate method.
The Top Node represents the downstream end of the system, hence it is:
- The manifold if surface equipment is included in the system
- The wellhead if no surface equipment is included in the system
The Solution Node represents the point at which the nodal analysis is
performed. Three options are available:
- Bottom Node. It is the bottomhole, that is, the deepest point in the
downhole equipment
- Top Node. See definition in the previous note
- Well Head. It is the Xmas Tree, that is, the upper point of the
downhole equipment.
According to the last two definitions, if no surface equipment is included,
Top Node and Well Head represent the same point.
As far as the Rate Method is concerned, refer to the previous section for details.
The Solution Rate reported is given by the VLP and IPR curves
intersection. These curves are interpolated between the selected
calculation rates and so the result may change according to the rate values
used.
An IPR is required for both Automatic rate methods. For wells having very
high AOFs (e.g. horizontal wells) the well rate is determined mainly by the
tubing size. Manual rate selection may give better results in such cases.
Normally VLP/IPR intersections that occur when the tubing pressures are declining
(on the LHS) are considered to represent unstable flow and are usually ignored.
When Gas Coning occurs, however the GOR is changing constantly for different
rates and it is possible to have two solutions and for the LHS intersection to
represent stable flow. This option allows to consider or not the left-hand intersection.
Only the sensitivity variables relevant to the chosen system will be available. For
example, if a well is gas lifted you will be given the option of gas injection rate as a
variable. This option will not be available if the well is naturally flowing.
Normally tubing diameter should not be varied in the casing below the tubing shoe.
This option is also useful for determining e.g. the effect of increasing tubing size
above a safety valve while keeping the diameter of the rest of the tubing string
diameter constant.
The Combinations option allows the User to enter specific combinations of field data
(or hypothetical cases) then allow the program to calculate the unknowns. An
example of a Combinations screen is shown below:
If no liquid rates are entered, the program uses the current list of rates
(either internally calculated or User input) and calculates the solution for
the combination of sensitivity variables for each of up to 10 cases.
Once sensitivity values have been entered in either the Combinations or Variables
screen, click Continue to display the calculation screen. Sensitivity values
temporarily overwrite variable values that have been entered on other screens. For
example: Pressure at first node, water cut.
On the right hand side there are the results of the system calculation: solution rates,
FBHP, WHP, WHT, etc.
On the left hand side, instead, there are the calculated parameters related to VLP
and IPR. Scroll to the right to read the results.
In the Variables area it is possible to scroll the different cases or the values of the
sensitivity variables for which the calculation were performed.
Details of Solutions
To examine the solution in more detail, click the Solution Details button. Individual
solution points can be viewed by clicking on the arrow buttons located beside each
sensitivity variable. Outflow or Inflow solutions can be viewed as shown in the
following sample screen:
In the case of wells with ESP, HSP, PCP or Jet Pump, the solution details contain all
the results related to the pump.
Plotting Results
The results can be plotted by clicking Plot. The System plot will appear as follows:
The system plot summarises all the calculations. Each VLP and IPR curve is
identified by up to 3 numbers posted beside them. The variable names and the
corresponding number labels are shown in the panel to the right of the plot. In the
above example, Curve 1,0,0 is for 4500 psig reservoir pressure, 0 % water cut and 4
STB/day/psi productivity index.
To plot the solution rates and pressures versus the selected variables, click S
ensitivity and a sensitivity plot will be displayed. To select sensitivity variables to
plot, click Variables and make your selection on the following screen, for example:
The Sensitivity screen allows you to choose X- and Y-axis variables. Click OK to
view the Sensitivity plot. The program automatically plots the sensitivity values of
the X-axis variable. If variable Combinations have been used, the sensitivity cases
will be automatically plotted.
The pressure gradient for any particular solution rate can be calculated by clicking S
ensitivity PvD (Sensitivity Pressure vs. Depth).
Select the desired case by scrolling on the variables, and then Continue and C
alculate to generate the gradient. The results are displayed on the following screen
example:
By clicking the Extended button, a greater range of plot variables can be accessed.
Virtually any combination of computed results can be plotted against each other.
Return to the standard choice of plot variables by clicking the Original button.
The plots are held in memory until overwritten by a new set of calculations. Plots
can also be displayed or output by selecting Plot from the main menu. The Units
menu can be used to change the display units if required.
Special Note for ESP, HSP, PCP and Jet Pump Applications
When calculating a System solution for a pump equipped well, in the Solution Point
screen lists details of the pump solution such as pump intake pressure etc. (See
example pump solution in the screen below)
Figure 1020
ESP Solution Point
Clicking Pump Plot on the pump solution screen displays the sensitivity solutions
plotted over the pump characteristic curves (this is available only for ESP and HSP).
As shown by the example screen below, the effects of the sensitivity variables on
the pump operating point can be readily evaluated.
This plot is a powerful tool for evaluating how an ESP design can accommodate
future changes of well conditions.
All pump (both ESP & HSP) designs should be validated by calculating
sensitivities and ensuring that efficient operation at the design rate can be
achieved over the entire range of expected well and pump efficiency
conditions.
For pump (both ESP & HSP) equipped wells, the Sens. PvD gradient calculation
shows the pressure increase across the pump. An example gradient plot is shown
below:
These curves can be compared with published pressure traverse curves or actual
well data. Pressure traverses can also computed for combinations of sensitivity
variables. The effect of changing tubing sizes, SSSV I.D. etc. can be evaluated
visually by plotting the gradient results.
Enter the required data, mostly the same as the one requested by System
calculation, plus the first and the last node for the calculation, which will determine
the section of completion for which to run the gradient calculation.
Then select Continue to access the Sensitivity Variables (or Combinations) screen.
Refer to previous sections for the description of this area.
Selecting Continue again will access the calculation screen. In this screen the User
can select the flow correlations for the downhole and the slug method:
Click Calculate to compute flowing gradients for all the sensitivity cases. Once the
calculations have been completed, the results tables can be inspected by clicking
the respective variable arrows until the desired variable combination is visible.
Important
The Gradient calculation results report very useful parameters
concerning details on the DP calculation, PVT data, mass flow
rates and in the case of pipeline gradients, characteristic
parameters of slugs, etc.
A plot of the gradient results similar to that below can be displayed by then clicking
the Plot button:
Gradients can be plotted for the well and flow line separately or combined on the one
plot. Details on the plotting features are available in Section 10.1.1.
10.3.1 Options
Every time a Gradient calculation is performed, a number of post-process
calculations are carried out, like for example maximum grain size, erosional velocity,
liquid loading (Turner velocity) and pigging calculations.
This screen can also be accessed from the main menu toolbar by selecting System
Solids.
Sand will be lifted to the wellhead only if the velocity of the fluid in the wellbore is
greater than the Critical Transport Velocity.
This velocity is function of sand particle size, shape and density and the fluid density
and viscosity.
Two different equations are used: one for oil wells and one for gas well:
1. Oil Wells
The equation used in this case is more applicable to laminar flow, conditions
that are likely to be encountered in oil and / or water wells.
Where:
2. Gas Wells
The equation used in this case is applicable to high gas flows and does not
include a factor for viscosity: viscosity has only an insignificant effect on lifting
sand.
Where:
In both the oil/water and gas cases, PROSPER knows the fluid velocity in the
wellbore. Therefore, it will calculate the maximum particle diameter that can be
transported by the well flow.
These calculations are important when an attempt is made to cut back the
production rate so that the well will stop producing sand and will help determine if the
formation sand may be accumulating at the bottom of the well.
References:
1. Fairhurst.CP Sand Transport in the South East Forties Pipe Line, BHRA,
1983
3. Wasp, Kenny & Gandhi Solid-Liquid Flow Slurry Pipe Line Transportation,
Gulf Publishing Company, Clausthal, Germany 1979
When gradient traverse calculations are performed the program will estimate the
correspondent value of erosional velocity.
Erosion can be caused by the repeated impact of solid particles on tubing and
pipelines. To avoid this we attempt to estimate the velocity at which erosion will
occur.
Normal practise is to use equation of API 14 E. This can be unreliable especially for
clean production where the limiting value of C (125) can be too restrictive. In
practice, values of 1000 for C have been recorded in pipes where no erosion has
been detected.
A Conoco paper (An Alternative to API14E Erosional Velocity Limits for Sand Laden
Fluids) challenges API14E on the basis that it can be very conservative for clean
service and is not applicable for conditions where corrosion or sand are present. It
proposes a simple alternative approach that has been verified by a comparison with
several multi-phase flow loop tests that cover a broad range of liquid-gas ratios and
sand concentrations. Values of S for different components are proposed in the paper
The constants C and S for the two formulations can be customised by selecting S
ystemSolids and tab button Erosional Velocity or the Options button in any
calculation screen.
PROSPER calculates the erosional velocity for solid-free fluid using the API-14E
method and the entered C value. If the sand production rate has been specified,
PROSPER will calculate the erosional velocity using both the API-14E and Conoco
methods and will then compare the results and will use the computed lower-value of
erosional velocity. To review the computed erosional velocity values using the
Conoco method set the value of C sufficiently high until the values do not change
for changing values of C.
After gradient calculations are performed, scroll right on the results screen to view
the erosional velocity values.
The Turner Equation is used to study the continuous removal of liquid from gas
wells.
This equation is used to determine the minimum velocity of the producing fluid
necessary to drag away the droplets of liquid. The original formulation of the
equation is the following:
Results of the calculation of the Turner velocity are reported in the Gradient
10.3.1.4Pigging
This calculation can be used to describe the pigging characteristics of the flow in
pipelines.
Assuming 100% removal efficiency of a sphere and that all the liquid removed by the
sphere is in the form of a continuous slug, the pigged slug volume can be estimated
by integrating the difference between the liquid hold-up and the no-slip hold-up in the
pipeline. Also the time to produce the slug can be calculated from
These are the additional results reported in the Gradient Traverse results table:
Pigged Slug Length
Pigged Slug Volume (cumulative pigged slug volume for the given pipe
element node)
Time to Produce Pigged Slug Length
Time for Pigged Slug to reach Outlet
to the correspondent section for reference). The values of Top Node Pressure,
Water Cut and GOR entered in this screen will be neglected if these variables will be
selected as sensitivity parameters.
When User Selected rates are used, you can enter rates in terms of Liquid, Oil or
Gas. The results will be given in terms of the specified rate type, but depending on
the type of well, PROSPER will first convert the rates to equivalent oil or gas to
calculate the VLP pressure. This feature can be used when preparing lift curves for
high GOR oil wells. Remember when using gas rates, that increasing the water cut
will also increase the liquid production rate. Extreme VLP pressures can easily
result.
Gauge Data: The information on the Gauge Data is used for Integrated Field
Management (IFM) Applications. These can be left blank for use in IPM suite of
tools.
Click Continue to access the Select Variables screen and set up the required
sensitivity variables.
To generate lift curves for simulator (like Eclipse) for an oil well, the VLP is generally
calculated for the following sensitivity variables:
Variable 1: Pressure at first node
Variable 2: Water cut
Variable 3: Gas Oil Ratio
An example calculation variables screen for generating lift curves is shown below:
Select the variables required by your external application and enter a list of values
for each. Click Continue to access the calculation screen, then select Calculate to
generate the lift curves. An example lift curve calculation screen is shown below:
The calculated VLP results can now be exported to a number of external application
programs. Once the calculations have been completed, click Plot to visually check
the results and Export Lift Curves to access the export selection screen.
Currently, PROSPER supports the following export formats:
PROSPER appends the export file with a suffix corresponding to the selected file
format as shown in the table above. Depending on the export format selected, the
User will be prompted for a file name and additional data such as table number, flow
table I.D. etc. Refer to the simulator documentation for further details.
An example of a 4 variable VLP calculation for a gas lifted well is shown on the
following screen:
that the wells are properly represented over the most important range of flow
rates to be modelled in the simulation.
Problems can occur for extremes of water cut and GOR. e.g. if the oil production
rate is fixed, the liquid production rate becomes very high as the water cut
approaches 100%. To maintain lift in a high water cut well, a specific GLR is
required. If injection gas is expressed in terms of GOR injected, the required
GOR approaches infinity as the water cut approaches 100%. A huge range of
GOR injected is therefore required to model the well. The use of liquid rates and
injection GLRs in oil well lift curve tables is recommended to avoid such
problems.
Depending on the particular simulator used, it is not possible to pass the variable
names or units between programs. Users are reminded to ensure that the
sensitivity variables and output units used in PROSPER are consistent with those
expected by the simulator. In particular, gas units (MMscf Vs Mscf), gas lift (GLR
Vs Gas Lift Injection Rate) and rates (Oil Vs Liquid) should be checked.
PVT correlations should only be used within the range of temperature and
pressure for which they were derived. Occasionally, combinations of tubing
curve variables require an excessive VLP pressure to pass the specified rate,
and the PVT correlation may fail. Occasionally, PROSPER may halt rather than
continuing the calculation with a fictitious result. You may have to revise the
range of variables or select a different PVT correlation in such cases. Beware of
chokes and restrictions in the equipment description that may result in excessive
calculated pressure drops. If using externally generated PVT tables, they must
span the entire calculation range. Make sure that GOR is constant above bubble
point, and the FVF is decreasing.
Provided you enter the rates by hand, it is not necessary to enter an IPR to
calculate VLP tables. PROSPER needs the IPR to find the calculation rates if an
Automatic rate method has been selected. Automatic rate selection is not
available for 4 Variable VLP calculations.
Oil well lift curves can now be calculated in terms of gas rates for specialised
applications. Make sure that the liquid rates that result from your choice of GOR,
water cut etc. does not result in impossible liquid rates. Be especially careful
when there are chokes and restrictions in the system.
The 'Tubing Curves (Standard)' option will prompt the user to enter the bottom hole
pressure, i.e. the first node pressure corresponds to the bottom hole pressure.
PROSPER will perform the calculations from the deepest node (i.e. bottom hole) to
the pump depth. Using the pump performance curves, Pump Head is calculated for
the given frequency, water cut etc. and therefore the Pump Discharge Pressure can
be calculated. PROSPER then determines the PVT of the oil above the pump after
accounting for possible gas separation. The pressure drop above the pump is then
calculated to find the top node arrival pressure. These calculations are performed for
each required production rate. The VLP Pressure value indicated corresponds to the
Pressure at the end point of the system; i.e. if there is no surface equipments
entered, the VLP Pressure will correspond to the wellhead pressure, if surface
equipment is entered, then VLP Pressure will correspond to the Manifold Pressure.
'Lift Curves for Simulators' require tables of rates and BHPs ordered by THP. The
Lift curves for Simulators option allows input of Top Node pressure, water cut,
operating frequency etc. PROSPER iterates to find the pressure at the deepest node
(VLP) for the given top node pressure. For this case the Top Node Pressure will
correspond to the Wellhead Pressure (if there are no surface equipments entered) or
the Manifold Pressure (If there are surface equipments entered). the VLP Pressure
will correspond to the Bottom Hole Pressure or the pressure at the last point in the
downhole equipment section.
VLP lift curves for simulators or Petroleum Experts applications (GAP and
MBAL) can be batch generated for groups of wells by PROSPER from
GAP. Refer to the GAP documentation for details.
Calculation Options
Select your required calculation option from the following:
Predict Mass Flow Rate
PROSPER determines the flow rate for specified choke opening and
inlet and outlet pressures
Choke Method
Select a choke calculation method from the following options:
Petroleum Experts
This is an in-house developed choke model based on Perkins work (SPE
206333).
HYDRO
There are 3 distinct methods for modelling specific choke equipment. Until
performance testing is completed and documentation issued, these choke
methods should not be used.
ELF
A model based on Perkins (SPE 206333) approach along with discharge
coefficients determined by the author (Stephane Rastoin of ELF Aquitaine
at TUALP). This is also the recommended method used to calculate
pressure drops down hole for SSSVs and restrictions. It should be used
for the majority of applications.
Click Calculate, and PROSPER will calculate the liquid and mass flow rates. Similar
screens are used to enter data for the dP and Choke Setting prediction options. For
critical flow conditions, it may take some time for the calculation to converge.
PROSPER can be run from within GAP in a batch mode for generating performance
curves for groups of wells or independently of GAP by selecting this option.
PROSPER will automatically calculate solutions for gas lifted or naturally flowing
wells. If the solutions are then saved in a .OUT file, GAP can pick up the data
required to calculate performance curves at a later time. For more information, refer
to the GAP documentation.
Input data required are gas, water and oil rate information as well as wellhead
temperature and pressure.
This information can be in one of several formats (e.g. Liquid rate, WC and GOR,
etc.) and the correct format for your data can be selected at the top of the
appropriate columns. If the data type in a particular column is changed while there is
data already in that particular column, then the data will be converted to the new
type.
In the case of gas lifted wells the gas lift gas rate is required and in the case of ESP
lifted wells the pump frequency must be entered.
The table is quite large allowing to start off with up to 16000 rows of data which is
automatically expandable up to 32000 rows. The data can be scrolled with the
scrollbar at the right hand side of the screen.
Appropriate vertical lift and surface pipe correlations can be selected at the bottom
of the screen.
Selecting the import button allows you to bring in data from an outside source. Table
data can be saved to file using the export button and plots using either time or the
log of time can also be viewed and exported using the plot feature. Within the plot
screen data can be enabled or disabled point by point or in a block manner by using
the right-click mouse button.
Data can be ordered with relation to time by using the sort button. This will also
remove any blank rows between data in the table.
10.7.1 References
Both pressure and temperature losses across chokes and restrictions are accounted
for. A theoretical outline of the Enthalpy Balance model is given in Appendix C.
pipelines
sub sea wells
high pressure/temperature exploration wells
predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict wax/hydrate
deposits.
accounting for Joule-Thompson effects
PROSPER 's Enthalpy Balance temperature model is one of the most accurate
temperature prediction methods available.
11
356 PROSPER
11 Design Menu
The Design Menu enables the User to perform various artificial lift designs.
From this menu the User can access the design modules for the following artificial lift
technologies:
Gas Lift
Electrical Submersible Pump
Hydraulic Pump
Progressive Cavity Pump
Coiled Tubing GasLift
Jet Pump
Sucker Rod Pump
The design menu is active only if an artificial lift method has been selected
in the main Options screen.
The design option will correspond to the artificial lift method selection in the
main Option screen.
Artificial lift design is not enabled when the Enthalpy Balance temperature
model is in use.
From the Design menu the Database containing all the information about gas lift
valves, ESP pumps, motors, cables, etc. is accessible. A dedicated section is
reported at the end of the chapter.
Designs can also be performed for existing wells having mandrels installed at fixed
depths.
Design performance can be evaluated using the Gas Lift QuickLook (as seen in
Chapter 9) or calculating system sensitivities.
New Well
Existing Mandrels
Gas Lift Adjustments
The gas lift design section of the program can be used to determine the optimum
gas lift equipment for a given well. PROSPER calculates the maximum production
rate possible, the corresponding optimum gas lift rate, the valve spacing and size to
unload the well and the test rack setting pressure for each valve for surface
calibration.
Designs can also be prepared for wells having mandrels already set at fixed depths.
Before the User can proceed ahead with artificial lift design, PVT, downhole
equipment and IPR information must be input.
In this screen it is possible to enter the input data for the gas lift design task.
The input data screen is divided into several areas. The Input parameters panel is
used to enter the design operating conditions. The other panels allow the User to
enter the design options for a given application.
Input Parameters
Having set up the calculation options, enter values for the following variables on the
production packer.
Water cut
Design producing water cut.
Minimum Spacing
Sets the minimum spacing between valves. Use 200 - 400 ft normally.
Minimum transfer dP
Only active when Ignoring IPR for Unloading has been selected. If
set to zero, unloading valve trims will be sized to inject sufficient gas to
lower the unloading tubing pressure to the transfer pressure at the
valve depth.
Increasing the value of Minimum transfer dP will lower the unloading
GLR injected and reduce trim sizes.
Referring to the sketch (Figure 11.2) below, the transfer pressure is:
(Pmin) = Ppd - (Ppd - Pid) * % minimum transfer dP /100
Increasing the injection GLR shifts the tubing gradient during unloading closer
to the objective gradient line (i.e. to the left). The unloading valve trim is sized
for the GLR corresponding to the required transfer pressure. Values of 5 to
25% are commonly used.
Unloading valve trim sizing depends on whether or not the IPR is used
to determine well flow rates while unloading. Existing Users should
review this section carefully.
NEW!!!
Thornhill-Craver ReRating- DeRating Percentage for Valves and for Orifice
This coefficient is used to scale down the maximum gas injection rate
that can be flowed through a valve or the orifice. As the maximum gas
rate is decreased, this means that to flow the same gas rate as the
original case (with no de-rating), larger valve or orifice should be used
Valve Type
Casing sensitive valves
o Enter the minimum casing pressure drop to close valves.
Tubing sensitive valves
o Enter the percentage difference in Pcasing - Pwh to close valves.
Proportional response valves Proportional
o PROSPER determines the closing pressure as part of the design
calculations.
This design method ensures maximum injection depth and hence maximises
production rates.
Injection Point
Before the gas lift design is performed, the User can decide if the operating valve is
a gas lift valve or an orifice.
Yes
The API method is used below 1200 psi, and an improved algorithm is used above
1200 psi. This is the default and recommended option.
For speed in comparing designs, this option can be set to No. However,
the User must be aware that the design rate may not be able to be met by
the well.
Yes
This is the recommended PROSPER unloading valve trim sizing method.
Unloading valves are sized to achieve a minimum flowing gradient above the
valve assuming that the load fluid is being produced. The IPR is used to
calculate the well production rates during unloading. Minimum transfer dP (as
explained under inputs below) is ignored for this option.
No
This is the standard hand-calculation method. Unloading valve trims are
sized to achieve the GLR required to lower the tubing pressure to the transfer
pressure. The GLR is based on the full design production rate - the actual
production rate during unloading is not calculated. This results in the
selection of larger valve trims. Minimum transfer dP is used to increase the
transfer pressure, thereby reducing the unloading gas requirement and valve
trim size.
Orifice Sizing On
Two options are available:
Calculated dP at Orifice
Min dP Across Orifice
On the right-hand side of the input Gas Lift Design input screen there is a navigator
window that allows selecting the type of valves to use in the design from an internal
database.
Please refer to the end of this chapter for an illustration of how to access
and edit the database for the gas lift valves
If the design rate is Entered by User, the upper (Rate calculation) part of
the screen is not displayed.
Displaying the Well Performance Curves / Finding Design Rate (New Well)
The first step is to find the design production rate.
Click Get Rate. PROSPER will calculate the Gas Lift Performance
Curve and determine the optimum Gas Lift injection rate and maximum
oil production rate.
The target design rate and GLR injected can be read off the performance curve plot.
The design rate is:
The maximum oil production shown in the Performance curve plot, provided
that the available gas injection and liquid production rate limits have not been
exceeded.
In case the maximum gas available is exceeded by the highest oil rate on the
plot, the oil rate corresponding to maximum available gas is taken as design
rate.
PROSPER will design for the maximum oil production rate entered in the main
input screen, if it exceeds the rate calculated from the performance curve.
The program will then determine the depth of the operating valve and the
spacing for the unloading valves. Depending on the design settings, this will
usually take more than one pass.
On the first pass, the injection and unloading valve depths are determined
assuming no casing pressure drop to close valves.
Having determined the number of valves to use, the operating valve depth is
revised to reflect the new operating casing pressure.
The spacing procedure is repeated using the revised operating casing
pressure until the number of unloading valves and their setting depths no
longer change.
The plot shows the tubing and casing pressure gradients for the design rate plus the
position of the operating and unloading valves. The unloading fluid gradients are
plotted also. The design data box lists the Actual production and injection rates
together with the operating surface casing pressure.
Results
To display the valve details click Results and the table with the results will be
displayed.
Click on Calculate to calculate the Dome Pressure and the TestRack Opening
Pressure (valve setting pressure at 60C).
The valve depths, tubing pressure, unloading gas injection rate and trim
sizes are shown in the left screen panel.
Valve types are identified as Valve for unloading valves or Orifice for the
last mandrel if the injection point is selected as orifice. No opening or
dome pressure calculations are made for the orifice.
The design parameters such as valve depth, opening and closing pressures, orifice
size etc. are displayed in the table. Use the scroll thumb below the table to scroll
right to see items e.g. R-value, not visible in the display window.
This screen is similar to the Gas lift Design (New well) screen, except that the
variables relating to spacing the valves have been removed.
Please refer to the previous section for the description of the entry fields.
For this design type options for the choice of the first valve can be selected:
Minimum Squeeze PI Method (ELF)This method can be used when the well
productivity is sufficient to ensure that completion fluids can be squeezed into
the formation during unloading. An unloading tubing gradient is calculated by
taking the static reservoir pressure and increasing the injected GLR, until the
gradient arrives at the design top node pressure. Unloading valves are spaced
by comparing this tubing gradient with the available casing pressure at depth.
Enter the depth of all mandrels in the well, including those fitted with
dummy valves.
PROSPER will select the best depths for the operating and unloading
valves from this list.
When more mandrels are available than needed for the current design,
PROSPER will automatically set dummies at the intermediate depths.
PROSPER will overwrite the valve type when it performs the design.
This table is effectively a list of the potential valve depths and can be used to
prepare designs for new wells where equipment limitations determine the available
mandrel depths.
If entries are made in the Casing Pressure drop or Max. Gas Injected fields on
the mandrel depth screen shown in the figure above, these values will
overwrite the values entered on the main design screen.
Leave these fields blank to design using the same values of pressure drop
or gas injection for each unloading valve.
If a calculated rate design method has been selected, a screen similar to the
following will be displayed:
The rate is increased and the calculation repeated until an intersection with
the IPR (rate solution) is found.
The injection GLR is increased until the optimum production rate is found.
This procedure ensures that the available mandrel depths are honoured at
every calculation step.
Once the calculations have stopped, click Plot to make a plot of the production rate
Vs gas injected. It is similar to that of a new well design.
injection rates together with the injection pressure at surface while injecting at
the orifice.
Click Calculate to determine the Dome and the TestRack Opening pressure will be
updated for the new valve series.
To access parameters such as the transfer pressure and port size, click on
the scroll arrow at the bottom of the Input parameters panel.
To perform sensitivity calculations for the current design, the valve depths
must be transferred to Equipment Gas Lift before making calculations.
Based on flowing tubing pressures PROSPER determines the injection point
during production.
11.1.3.5Valve Spacing
Valve spacing is not affected by the choice of unloading method, but the trim size
selection depends on whether the well IPR is used for calculating the unloading rate
or not.
For the design rate and GLR injected, a pressure traverse is calculated from
the top node (including the flow line, if present) downwards using the gas
lifted flowing gradient.
The injection depth is the depth at which the flowing tubing pressure equals
the casing pressure gradient less the design dP loss across the orifice or the
Maximum Injection Depth (packer depth), whichever is the shallower. This
step establishes the flowing tubing pressure gradient to be used for valve
spacing.
The shallowest unloading valve is placed at the depth that balances the
tubing load fluid pressure with the casing pressure (less a 50 psi safety
margin) at that depth.
Further unloading valves are placed by traversing down between the load fluid
pressure gradient and gas lifted tubing pressure gradient (calculated for the
design gas lifted production rate) lines.
Valves are placed ever deeper until the inter-valve spacing equals the pre-set
minimum, or the maximum injection depth has been reached.
Once the first pass design is complete, PROSPER re-calculates the flowing
gradient tubing using the current operating valve depth. For casing sensitive
valves, the valve depths are re-calculated to allow for the casing pressure
drop to close valves. The process is repeated until the valve depths no longer
change.
When Check Rate Conformance with IPR is set to Yes, the solution rate is checked
to ensure that it can be achieved. PROSPER reduces the design rate if necessary
and repeats the spacing exercise.
Tubing sensitive valves operate with a constant casing pressure and rely on
increasing tubing pressure as the well unloads to close the unloading valve and
transfer injection to lower valves.
To prepare a design for tubing sensitive valves, the required input is the same as for Casing
Sensitive valves except that instead of entering the casing pressure drop to close valves, the
percentage Pcasing - Pwh to close valves is r
The injection point is found as for casing sensitive valves by finding the intersection
of the minimum tubing gradient line and the casing pressure gradient (less a 50 psi
safety margin).
The first unloading valve is spaced as for the casing sensitive case.
Intermediate unloading valves are spaced by traversing down using the load fluid
gradient from the transfer pressure to intersect the casing pressure gradient for the
operating injection pressure. The transfer pressure (tubing pressure at which the
unloading valve closes) is calculated using the value of % Pcasing -Pwh as follows:
The surface pressure corresponding to the specified % difference between the
operating tubing and casing pressures is calculated.
A straight line is extended from this point to intersect the tubing pressure at the
injection point. The valve transfer pressure is defined at any depth by this line.
A larger value of % Pcasing -Pwh will increase the transfer pressure further away
from the flowing tubing gradient. This provides a greater safety margin against
multi-point injection, but requires the unloading valves to be spaced more closely.
Selecting transfer pressures using only the % Pcasing - Pwh straight line can result
in shallow valves having a too conservative transfer pressure and the deeper valves
may transfer too close to the tubing gradient line. PROSPER adjusts the design
transfer pressures so that valves are spaced efficiently while at the same time
ensuring a good safety margin against multipoint injection.
11.1.3.8Proportional Valves
Once the input data entry is complete, the User has to make sure that the
correspondent valves are transferred. Select Valves and then Transfer to transfer the
valve info from Gas Lift Design or from QuickLook:
Once the gaslift equipment details are entered the flowing gradient or static gradient
can be estimated:
Flowing
Calculations are made for flowing conditions at the User-entered target production
rate. PROSPER calculates well performance curves for gas injection at each
mandrel depth. Production rates and pressures at surface and mandrel depth are
determined. Annulus volume and bottoms up times are also calculated. The flowing
gradient for the operating condition can be plotted with opening and closing
pressures for each unloading valve displayed.
Static
Calculations are made for shut-in conditions. The static tubing gradient is
determined using the liquid density calculated for the producing water cut. When the
reservoir pressure cannot support a full liquid column, a gas gradient is used back to
surface.
The database required to implement this feature is not distributed by Petroleum Experts and must be
obtained from the VPC.
This implementation consists of two parts
Database inspection and valve performance curve calculation and display
Gaslift Design and QuickLook integration
Valve performance calculations will be used to determine the required port size or gas rate through a
given valve
The database required to implement this feature will not be distributed with PROSPER by Petroleum
Experts and must be obtained from VPC.
The Valve Performance Clearinghouse is a service offered by Decker Technology. Its objectives are
Establish an independent source for the collection, consolidation, and distribution of valve
performance data and correlations to members.
Perform tests on gaslift valves selected by the members using the API 11V2 RP
Develop correlations using the Decker Technology proprietary method to predict gas passage
for any pressure and temperature conditions with an accuracy of better than +/-20%.
Provide a Valve Performance Reference manual containing performance data and correlations
for all valves tested by the VPC.
ESP data entered in the System Electrical Submersible Pumps input menu is not
utilised by the ESP design section. The design results will overwrite this section.
In the main ESP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
Design procedure
Designing an ESP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the second part
is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.
The following description assumes that input of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.
Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.
PROSPER uses the IPR from System Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the
Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no ESP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the ESP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections and
should be used with caution.
To check that the separator efficiency chosen in the input is acceptable for
the design case, the Dunbar Criterion may be used as showed below.
Click Sensitivity to display the intake pressure and intake GLR plotted over a range
of gas separator efficiency curves.
Check that the design operating point lies above the empirical limit represented by
the Dunbar Factor line.
To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:
In the Select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
capable of meeting the design requirements.
Select Pump
PROSPER presents pumps that can meet the following criteria:
Select Motor
Once a pump has been selected, the pump efficiency is known; the motor power
requirement can now be calculated.
Proceed to the motor drop-down box and select a motor from those listed.
Select Cable
Once the motor power and voltage option have been determined, a suitable cable
must be selected.
Normally, the first pass design will have an operating point fairly close to
the selected pump's optimum efficiency. However, as well conditions
change with time, this may not be the best design for the life of the
installation
The ESP system design process is completed by iterating between the Calculation
and Design sections until the final design is optimised over the projected pump run
life.
In the main HSP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
Design procedure
The design of an HSP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the second part
is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.
The following description assumes that input of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.
Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.
PROSPER uses the IPR from System Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the
pump intake pressure for the design production rate.
The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive
at the required pump discharge pressure.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across
the pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the
pump inlet.
The mass flow rate and the required head are used to determine the pump
fluid power requirement.
For certain configurations the produced and power fluids can be commingled above
the pump. Hence, the PVT properties of the well fluids can be different below and
above the pump.
Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the HSP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections and
should be used with caution.
The next step is to select the pump, motor and cable capable to provide the
calculated duty.
To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:
In the Select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
capable of meeting the design requirements.
Select Pump
PROSPER presents pumps that can meet the following criteria:
Select Turbine
Once a pump has been selected, the pump efficiency is known, so the turbine power
requirement can now be calculated.
Proceed to the turbine drop down box and select a turbine from those listed.
Normally, the first pass design will have an operating point fairly close to the
selected pump's optimum efficiency. However, as well conditions change with
time, this may not be the best design for the life of the installation.
Different combinations of pump and turbine can be quickly experimented with
in the HSP design section until an optimum design is obtained.
A report can be generated which gives details of the pump selection and
design conditions.
Important Note
The robustness of the first pass design must then be checked over the
range of expected well operating conditions by running sensitivities in the
System Calculation menu.
The HSP system design process is completed by iterating between the Calculation
and Design sections, until the final design is optimised over the projected pump run
life.
In the main PCP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
This is the case of PCP with Sucker Rod. If the PCP is driven by a Downhole Motor,
the data to input are similar to the ones seen in the ESP.
All the parameters are self-explanatory on the basis of the previous sections.
Design Procedure
The design of an HSP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the second part
is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.
The following description assumes that inputs of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.
Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.
PROSPER uses the IPR from System Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the
pump intake pressure for the design production rate.
The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive
at the required pump discharge pressure.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across
the pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the
pump inlet.
Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the HSP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections and
should be used with caution.
The next step is to select the pump, motor and cable capable to provide the
calculated duty.
To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:
In the Select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
capable of meeting the design requirements.
In the case of motor driven PCP, motor and cable will have to be selected.
As seen for ESP and HSP installations, the PCP design should be checked by
performing sensitivities in System Calculation, in order to verify the design against
the expected change of conditions along the life of the well.
Before performing the design, data concerning the gas lift gas and the coiled tubing
equipment should be entered in the Coiled Tubing Data screen, accessible from the
System menu:
The input data and the options to enter in this screen are exactly the same as for the
normal Gas Lift Design (design for a User Entered Rate, or for Maximum Production,
etc).
Please refer to section 11.1 for a detailed explanation.
To perform the Design, select Continue. This will access a screen similar to the Gas
Lift Design:
In the case of the figure above, select Get Rate to calculate the Gas Lift
Performance Curve and then Design to perform the design.
The program will determine the maximum injection depth, the rate produced and the
gas to inject.
In the main Jet Pump Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
Design Procedure
The design of a Jet Pump installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases.
One is where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the
second part is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.
The following description assumes that inputs of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.
Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.
PROSPER uses the IPR from System Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the
pump intake pressure for the design production rate.
The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive
at the required pump discharge pressure.
The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across
the pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the
pump inlet.
According to the Surface Fluid (the Power Fluid) Injection Rate and Injection
Pressure, the program will determine R (ratio between the areas of the nozzle
and of the throat), the diameter of the throat and the diameter of the nozzle
The jet pump design dialogue will show two columns of results: Desired and
Actual. The desired column data is the result from performing the design.
The actual column is the results from the given pump selected from the Select
Pump drop-down dialogue box
Comparing another jet pump from the select pump drop-down box with the
same R-Value will not change any results in the Actual results column, this is
because the same ratio of nozzle to throat area geometry is captured within
the R-value
Once a pump design and the given pump selected the robustness of the
first-pass design must be checked over the range of expected well operating
conditions and also to evaluate wich R-value and power fluid value will avoid
cavitating the pump
Emulsions
If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the HSP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections and
should be used with caution.
The next step is to select the pump suitable to provide the calculated duty.
To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:
Select a pump from the database whose Actual performance (in green in the figure
above) is close to the Desired performance.
As seen for ESP, HSP and PCP installations, the Jet Pump design should be
checked by performing sensitivities in System Calculation, in order to verify the
design against the expected change of conditions along the life of the well.
11.7.1 Background
General hints
The schematic of a conventional Sucker Rod Pump installation is sketched in the following figure along
with the downhole pump:
Working principle:
A prime motor moves the gearbox, which rotates the crank. The crank is attached to a counterweight
and is connected to the Pitman arm. The Pitman arm is then connected to the walking beam.
The rotary movement of the crank is propagated and translated into a reciprocating movement of the
rod connected to the downhole pump.
From the figure above it is possible to see that as the crank rotates, the rod shifts the plunger up
(upstroke) and down (downstroke) in the pump barrel.
The downhole pump is composed of a barrel with a ball-and-seat valve at the bottom (standing valve)
and a plunger with another ball-and-seat valve (traveling valve).
During the downstroke the plunger is lowered in the barrel, the traveling valve is opened and standing
valve is closed; in this way the fluid is displaced in the tubing above the plunger.
During the upstroke, the traveling valve is closed, whilst the standing valve is opened, letting the fluid
flow from the formation into the barrel. The fluid that was in the tubing in the previous step is pushed
towards the surface.
It is possible to monitor the pump performance by measuring the variation of the rod load against the
position of the rod itself by means of a dynamometer.
The resulting plot is called "dynamometer card". This plot is a very useful method to verify that the
pump is working fine and to diagnose eventual problems.
The example reported below illustrates the shape of a dynamometer card for the ideal case of pump
and rod perfectly rigid, no friction, perfect pump action:
- Point A: the plunger is in the lowest point. This is the starting point of the upstroke
- A-B: The traveling valve closes and the standing valve opens. As this is an ideal case, the total load
of the fluid above the plunger is taken over by the sucker rod
- B-C: The plunger travels all the way to the highest point the distance between points B and C
represents the stroke length
- C-D: The traveling valve opens and the standing valve closes. This is the starting point of the
downstroke. The rod unloads
- D-A: The plunger travels back to the lowest point of the stroke A
As mentioned above, the dynamometer illustrated in the figure represents an ideal situation. However,
the examination of actual dynamometer cards allows the Engineer to identify problems related to pump
operative problems, like leaking valves, fluid pounding, gas locking, etc.
Details about the use of dynamometers cards for pump performance diagnostics can be found in the
references reported in Appendix B.
Design
The design of a Sucker Rod Pump installation is a trial and error procedure that consists of:
- starting from assumptions on the pump hardware (pump and rod type, depth, size), flow
conditions and design stroke rate or production rate, and then
- determining the operating parameters, like: pump displacement, peak polished rod load,
minimum polish rod load, peak torque, polished rod horsepower, counterbalance effect (CBE)
etc.
- verifying how the pump installation behaves through the dynamometer card and torque chart
2 u(x, t) 2
2 u(x, t) u(x, t)
2
=a 2
-c +g
t x t
Solutions to this equation have been provided by Gibbs (ref. Appendix B).
The solutions to the equation above allow to determine the surface and downhole dynamometer card
and then a torque analysis can be performed to determine the torque.
These diagnostic plots can be used to verify the working conditions of the designed pump and sucker
rod and in the case the design can be reviewed by changing assumptions and restarting the design.
Also, along with the design, a series of diagnostic plots (the Dynamometer card, the
Torque and Rod Speed plot) are provided, which can be used to verify the actual
pump operating regime and in the case troubleshoot the design itself.
1. Enter design input parameters (PVT, pump data, design input data)
2. Perform the design
3. Perform Rod Sensitivity
PVT Data
These are the PVT data for the fluid
Calculation Mode
This option allows to select the design mode:
- Enter Stroke Rate, calculate Production Rate
- Enter Production Rate, calculate Stroke Rate
Service Factor
- Non-Corrosive
- Salt Water
- Hydrogen Sulphide
Design Input
These inputs specify the design operating conditions (flowing wellhead and
bottomhole temperature, wellhead pressure, pump characteristics and efficiencies,
pump position)
11.7.2.2Perform Design
After entering the input data, select Calculate to perform the design of the Sucker Rod Pump.
The program will calculate the production rate and all the information related to rod load, torque,
stress, etc.
On the right hand side of the screen the plots related to Rod Load, Torque and Pump velocity are
reported.
The Top Rod Loading and Top Rod % Of Goodman Diagram are measurements of the stress in
the top rod based upon the peak polished rod load and the cross-sectional area of the top rod. The
API RP11BR discusses the Modified Goodman Diagram and its construction.
PROSPER is painting in red those parameters if they exceed 100% and there are basically 2 ways of
lowering those values below 100%, 1 is to increase the area of the sucker rods, 2 is to reduce the
peak load.
The Index of Torsional Effectiveness (ITE) is a measurement of the ability of the beam pump unit
type to smooth out and idealize the net crankshaft torque load (under normal conditions handling a full
pump barrel of incompressible fluid).
The ITE is ratio of the average net torque to the peak net torque expressed as percentage.
The higher the ITE the more effective the unit geometry in converting the polished rod load into a
smoother and more ideal torsional load.
11.7.2.3Rod Sensitivity
This option allows to perform design sensitivities changing the rod type, in other
words, verifying the impact of different rod types on the pump performance:
The Chart can be plotted in form of bars or pie and different visualisations are
available:
Production Rate by Rod Type
HorsePower Required by Rod Type
Production Rate Per HorsePower by Rod Type
the data to enter are: manufacturer, valve type, Type, Specification, Port size, R value.
The sample gas lift valve database is provided to allow the User to
run the examples. Before designing for field installation, the User
must first ensure that the database contains current and accurate
valve characteristics.
11.8.2.1Pump Database
Select the tab screen ESP in the Database to access the ESP database:
The performance curves are provided in the form of coefficients for a polynomial
equation fitted to actual performance data.
Selecting a pump and then Plot, the performance curve of the pump is plotted:
Click Variables to select between Head, Horsepower and Efficiency for plotting.
To add a new pump select Add and enter the required information:
Next step is to enter the performance data for head and power as per manufacturer
s performance curves and fit them to a polynomial. To do so, select Head
Coefficients and HP Coefficients and enter the data:
Then Fit to regress and calculate the polynomial coefficients, then Done to go back
to the previous panel. The coefficients have been transferred:
11.8.2.2Motor Database
To access the Motors section select the tab screen Motors:
Enter the data and fit the polynomials by selecting the buttons NamePlate AMPS,
Speed, Efficiency and Power Factor. Use Fit to determine the polynomial
coefficients.
On the right hand side of the screen above (Power Options) enter the different
Power, Voltage and Current the motor is compatible with.
11.8.2.3Cables Database
To access the Cables section select the tab screen Cables:
11.8.3.1Pumps Database
Select the tab screen HSP in the Database to access the HSP database:
The performance curves are provided in the form of coefficients for a polynomial
equation fitted to actual performance data.
11.8.3.3Turbines Database
Select the Turbines tab button to display the Turbines Database:
The Turbine performance is entered by selecting Add in the Turbine Settings area.
The steps to enter the performance data and fit them to a polynomial are the same
as seen in the ESP section. Refer to that section for details.
11.8.4.1Pumps Database
Select the tab screen PCP in the Database to access the PCP database:
As far as motor and cables are concerned, please refer to the ESP section for
details.
11.8.6.1Pumps Database
Select the tab screen MultiPhase in the Database to access the FRAMO Pumps
database:
As far as motor and cables are concerned, please refer to the ESP section for
details.
12
Output 443
12 Output
The Output menu is used to report, export and plot input data entered into PROSPER
and the results generated by the various calculation options in the program:
Report
This option generates reports about input data and results
Export
This option transfers input data and results to different locations (printer,
spreadsheets, screen, etc.)
Plot
This option generates plots for input data and results
These functions are available also in any of the input/output screens of the program.
12.1 Report
The Report option is used to prepare reports and plots from a current analysis. This
section describes how to use the reporting system with the templates provided with
the system and how to customise these templates.
In the File tab screen initialise the data relevant to the reporting system. Enter the
Location Of Report Output Files. This is the default directory where reports printed
to file are to be placed. Also enter the Location Of User-Created Reports. This is
the path to a directory where User-defined report templates are to be stored.
12.1.2 Reports
The reporting interface gives the User complete control over how the reports are
formatted and what information is utilised to make up the report. This is facilitated by
the use of report templates, which can be edited to suit the specific requirements. It
is possible to choose to use the default report templates provided with the system or
to choose to create slightly different versions of these reports. The selected
templates can then be used to generate the actual reports, which can be sent to a
variety of places (printer, file or screen). The report templates are displayed in a
hierarchy and all templates which have been selected (by double-clicking on it) show
an X in the check-box beside the template name.
To access the Reports area, select OutputReports form the menu toolbar.
There are two modes for the editing of report templates: System and User. System
mode does not allow the User to change any template whereas User mode allows
creating new User-defined templates from scratch or based on an already existing
system report template and also allows editing an existing User-defined report
template. Selecting User mode also makes the User Reports section of the template
hierarchy visible. The User Reports hierarchy contains all report templates which
have been tagged as being a derivation of a system report template as well as any
free standing User-defined templates.
The reporting main window consists of four main parts: The command segment at
the top of the dialogue containing the buttons, the report selection hierarchy, the
output device selection group and the template type selection group. The output
device group is only used when printing from selected report templates.
OK Print the selected reports to the selected output device and terminate the dialogue
Cancel Terminate the dialogue
Help Bring up the on-line help window
The native (.FR) file format can only be read by the reporting system whereas the
RTF format can be read by many Windows word processing applications. When
printing to file the User will be presented with the following dialogue:
The default directory will be set to the default output directory but this can be altered
using the Select Directory button. This can then be applied to all output files by using
Change All. If it is necessary to change the output directory of one of the files, this
can be achieved by using the Browse button (button that shown on the right side of
the filename box) associated with each report. The filenames can themselves be
edited in the text box, which contains them.
For any given report in the system hierarchy the User can choose to view or print a
report using either the system report template provided or a User-defined report
template based on that system report template (or at least that position in the
hierarchy) or it is possible to choose a report grouping which can be made up from a
combination of User and system reports. Choose between these options using the
report template type selection group at the bottom right of the main window. If the
User report template option for any hierarchy position is selected and there are
multiple User-defined report templates for that position, then a dialogue appears
which allows selecting the desired template.
Double clicking on any of the report templates (or selecting and pressing Ok) will
cause it to become the User-defined report template for that hierarchy position for
the current reports session. The default choice is the topmost user defined report
template. It is possible to stop a User-defined report template from being associated
with that hierarchy position by selecting it and then pressing Delete. This does not
actually delete the report template (it can still be seen within the User Reports
section of the hierarchy).
If a report grouping is selected, then a similar dialogue appears and the User can
select the appropriate group file. After selecting a file all the reports referenced in the
group will appear checked in the hierarchy and then it is possible to press print for
all of these reports to be sent to the selected output device.
Data fields from PROSPER are added using the F2 key, selecting the data items
required and then pressing Ok when finished. The selected data items will then
appear as fields, one by one, as the left mouse button is clicked. The fields can be
roughly positioned in this way. The User is not limited to one pass at adding data
items to the report template. More items can be added at any time in the same
manner.
Once a field has been added to the report template the User can edit some of the
properties of the text which will be shown in the field and assign a group number to
the field by double clicking the left mouse button on it and the font properties can be
changed by double clicking the right mouse button on it. Other properties, such as
whether the field has a box around it, etc., can be changed through the menu
options, a full description of which are given below.
The template editor commands can be selected by using the menu, toolbar or
keyboard shortcuts. Help can be obtained on any menu item by highlighting the
menu item and then pressing the F1 key or by consulting the index of help topics
under the help menu.
File Menu
This menu contains commands for saving the current report template file and
specifying the report template parameters.
Save:
Use this selection to save the current report template to the current file name. If a file
is not yet specified, the form editor will prompt for a file name. If a file extension is
not provided, the editor automatically appends an .FP extension to the report file. If a
file with the same name already exists on the disk, the form editor will save the
previous file with a backup extension (.RE).
Save As:
This selection is similar to Save File. In addition, it allows saving the report template
Report Parameters:
This option allows setting certain report parameters. Firstly, it allows specifying the
name of the report. The margin for the printed page can be set. It is possible to
instruct the report executor to print trial records for adjusting forms such as labels
and invoices and set the default date format for input. The date format that specified
here will be enforced for parameter input during the report execution session, and
any date constant used in expressions.
Report Filter:
This option allows entering a filter criterion for the report. Each data record will be
tested with the expression provided here. A record is selected only if this expression
evaluates to a TRUE value. For example, if the expression was sales->amount>100,
then only the records with the sales amount more than 100 will be selected.
Printer Setup:
This option allows selecting a printer from a list of installed printers and invoking a
printer specific dialogue box for the selected printer. Select the parameters from a
set of printer specific options. These options include page size, page orientation,
resolution, etc. The printer options selected here determine the width and height of
the report.
Exit:
Use this function to exit from the form editor session. If the current file is modified, a
prompt will ask to save the modifications.
Edit Menu:
This menu contains commands to edit the report objects. One or more report objects
must be selected before using this option.
Cut:
Use this option to copy the current item or all the items in the current selection to the
clipboard. The copied items are deleted from the form.
Copy:
Use this option to copy the current item or all the items in the current selection to the
clipboard.
Paste:
Use this option to paste the items from the clipboard to the current form.
Position Text:
Use this option to position the text within the item boundaries. The text can be
justified on the left, right, top, or bottom edges or it can be centred horizontally or
vertically. This option is valid for the label and field type items only.
Item Outlines:
Use this option to specify the item boundaries (left, right, top, and bottom) to draw for
one or more selected items. The colour and width of the boundary lines can be
specified too.
Item Background:
Use this option to set the background colour or pattern for one or more selected
items.
Centre Horizontally:
This option is used to centre horizontally one or more selected items. When more
than one item is selected, the form editor first centres the selection rectangle and
then moves the selected items such that the position of the selected items relative to
the selection rectangle does not change.
Delete Item:
Use this option to delete one or more currently selected items. If the current section
is being deleted, the program asks for confirmation before the deletion. All items
within the section are also deleted.
Fonts:
Use this function to change the font and colour for the text for one or more selected
objects. This option is valid for the field and label type objects only.
When selecting this option, the form editor shows the font and colour selection
dialogue box. The current font and colours are pre-selected in the dialogue box. Use
this dialogue box to specify the selections.
Snap to Grid:
This option allows turning on or off the invisible grid on the form. When the grid is
turned on and an item is moved, it automatically aligns to the closest grid location.
This option also allows setting the grid width.
Report Size:
The following options shrink or elongate the report in the horizontal or vertical
direction by the amount equal to the width or the height of the selection rectangle.
Expand Horizontally
Use this option to create horizontal space by moving items horizontally. For example,
consider three items, A, B, and C placed horizontally. If a new item between the
items A and B is to be inserted, it is possible to use this function to create the
desired space between these two items and place the new item in the newly created
space. To move the items B and C toward right, create a selection rectangle after
the item A and select this option. The width of the selection rectangle specifies the
movement of the items B and C toward right (noted that the selection rectangle does
not need to include all items to be moved). All items toward the right of the selection
rectangle and with the vertical placement between the vertical spaces spanned by
Expand Vertically
Use this option to create additional vertical space by moving the items downward.
For example, consider three items, A, B, and C placed vertically. If a new item
between items A and B is to be inserted, it is possible to use this function to create
the desired space between these two items and place the new item in the newly
created space. To move items B and C downward, create a selection rectangle
below the item A and select this option. The height of the selection rectangle
specifies the downward movement of items B and C (noted that the selection
rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved). All items below the
selection rectangle are moved.
This option also expands (vertically) the current section by the height of the selection
rectangle.
Compress Horizontally
Use this option to delete extra horizontal space by moving items horizontally. For
example, consider three items, A, B, and C placed horizontally. The User can use
this function to bring items B and C closer to the item A. To move items B and C
toward left, create a selection rectangle after the item A and select this option. The
width of the selection rectangle specifies the movement of items B and C toward left
(noted that the selection rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved).
All items toward the right of the selection rectangle and with the vertical placement
between the vertical spaces spanned by the selection rectangle are moved.
Compress Vertically
Use this option to delete vertical space by moving the items upward. For example,
consider three items, A, B, and C placed vertically. It is possible to use this function
to bring items B and C closer to the item A. To move items B and C upward, create a
selection rectangle below the item A and select this option. The height of the
selection rectangle specifies the upward movement of items B and C (noted that the
selection rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved). All items below
the selection rectangle are moved.
This option also shrinks (vertically) the current section by the height of the selection
rectangle.
Field Menu:
This menu contains options to insert, modify, delete and maintain fields.
Calculation Field: This option is used to paste a calculation field to the report
template. This option will prompt for the name of the field, and the field expression.
The field expression can contain any number of valid operators, functions, system
fields, dialogue fields, and data fields. The field type is determined by the result of
the execution of the field.
After entering the field expression, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle.
Use the mouse to position the field rectangle and click any mouse button. The
current field attributes can be changed using the Edit Current Field Option.
System Field: This option is used to paste a system field to the report template.
This option will display a list of system fields (date, time, page, etc.) to choose from.
When selecting a field, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the
mouse to position the field rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field
attributes can be changed using the Edit Current Field Option.
Dialogue Field: This option is used to paste a dialogue field to the report template.
A dialogue field must have been created using the Edit Dialogue Field Table before
using this option. The dialogue fields are used to prompt the User for data during the
report execution session.
The option will display a list of dialogue fields to choose from. When selecting a field,
the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the field
rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field attributes can be changed
using the Edit Current Field Option.
Edit Current Field: This option is used to edit the field attributes for the current field.
This option is available only when a 'field' type object is selected.
Edit Field Expression: This option is used to edit the field expression for the current
calculation field. This option is available only when a 'calculation field' type object is
selected (see Insert Calculation Field). The option shows the existing calculation
expression and allows making any modifications.
Modify: This option is used to modify the User prompt, width and prompt order of a
dialogue field. The prompt order determines the order at which the dialogue fields
are presented to the User for data input.
Delete: This option is used to delete a dialogue field from the dialogue field table.
The User cannot delete a dialogue field that is being currently used in the report.
Section Menu:
This menu contains commands to insert, edit and delete report sections.
New: This option is used to create a new section. A section is identified by the
section banner and the separation line at the bottom of a section. There are three
basic types of sections. A header section displays the data that remain constant or
changes only when a sort field changes. The detail section displays the transaction
record fields. A footer section is used to display totals and summary information.
ReportEase allows up to 9 header and footer sections. A higher numbered header
section is allowed only when all the lower numbered headers are already selected.
Similarly, a footer section is allowed only when the corresponding header section is
already selected.
Edit Current: This option is used to modify the properties of the currently selected
section. For the 'detail' section, the User can specify the number of records to print
across the page. This option can be used to print multiple address labels across the
page.
Sort Field: This option is used to specify a sort field for a header section. A sort field
is used to sort the data records.
Break Field: This option is used to specify a break field for a header section. The
break field is used to determine a sort break. Typically, the break field would be the
same as the sort field. However the break field can be specified differently from the
sort field. A calculation expression can also be specified for a break field.
Filter: This option is used to enter a filter criterion to print a section. Normally, every
section included in the report template is printed in its appropriate sequence.
However, if the User wishes to print a section depending upon a condition, he can
enter this condition expression using this option. The expression must evaluate to a
logical value (TRUE or FALSE). During the report execution, the section will be
printed only if the expression evaluates to a TRUE value.
Line: This menu contains commands to create and edit a line object:
Create a Line: Use this option to draw a line. When selecting this option, the form
editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the rectangle and
click any mouse key. The line will be drawn within the position rectangle. The line
size can be changed using the sizing tabs.
Edit Current Line: Use this option to edit the angle, colour, and thickness of a 'line' type
object.
Label: This menu contains commands to create and edit a label object:
Create a Label: Use this option to create a new label. When selecting this option,
the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the
rectangle and click any mouse key. The 'label' object will be created within the
positioning rectangle. By default, the form editor inserts the text 'label' in the label
item. The label text can be edited in the editing window.
Edit Current Label: A label text can be edited by simply selecting the desired label
item and clicking on the edit window.
As the User inserts or deletes the text, the length of the label text changes. Normally,
the form editor will automatically adjust the item box boundaries to completely
enclose the new text. However, this automatic size adjustment ceases if the User
manually resizes the item boundary by pulling on the sizing tab. This feature can be
used to enclose the text in an item box larger than the default size.
Arrange:
This menu contains commands to align size and space a set of selected objects:
Alignment At:
Even Spacing:
Horizontally:
Use this option to place the selected items horizontally at an equal distance from
each other. The inter-item distance is equal to the distance between the first two
leftmost items.
Vertically:
Use this option to place the selected items vertically at an equal distance from each
other. The inter-item distance is equal to the distance between the first two topmost
items.
Even Sizing:
Width:
Use this option to change the width of the selected items to the width of the topmost
item.
Height:
Use this option to change the height of the selected items to the width of the leftmost
item.
Report Executor Commands:The report executor allows viewing reports that have
been generated and saved to a native format file. It is invoked by using the View
option from the reporting main window and selecting a file from the file selection box.
The file selection box will point to the default data directory and will have the filter
extension set to the correct file type (.FR).
12.2 Export
An export can be made either directly from the individual sections of the program, or
from the Output | Export menu option. This section describes how to customise
exports.
After entering the choices, Click Done to return to the main export dialogue box. The
User must then select a destination for the export data. Clicking Print initiates
generation of the data and sends it to the selected destination. Setup accesses a
screen for selecting fonts, margins etc. as in the Plot menu (Section 12.1). The font
selections made for export data are independent of the plotting fonts.
File - Creates an ASCII data file and saves it. Clicking Print displays a
dialogue box that requests a file name and destination. Enter a suitable file
name (PROSPER automatically appends a .PRN extension) and click OK to
save the file. The Fixed Format option saves a file in a printer ready format that
can be imported into a DOS based word processor. Use the Tab Delimited
format to save a file suitable for importing directly into a spreadsheet such as
EXCEL.
Clipboard - Clicking Print after selecting this option copies the exported data
onto the Windows clipboard. From the Clipboard, the User can view, edit and
paste the data directly into another Windows application. e.g. a word
processing program.
Screen - Clicking Print after selecting this option allows viewing the
exported data on the screen. Scroll through the data using the scrolling
thumbs or arrows. When finished viewing, click OK to return to the main
menu.
Once a .PRN file has been saved, further copies of the exported data can be made
using a word processor from outside PROSPER. To ensure that printed exports are
correctly formatted, only non-Proportional fonts can be selected for export data. The
fonts on the export setup screen are independent of those selected on the plot setup
screen.
Click the Layout button on the calculation results screen and select the variables to
display from the layout screen:
Show All and Hide All buttons are used to make changes to the entire list of
variables. Individual variables can be selected or de-selected by clicking them
directly. When clicking OK, only the selected variables will be displayed on the
calculation screen.
In addition to the calculation results screens, Layout also controls the variables
displayed in Output Export (to file, clipboard, and printer).
12.3 Plot
A plot can be made either directly from individual parts of the program, or from the Output | Plot menu
option. This section describes how to customise plots for both the screen and hard copy. From the Plot
Output main Window select the plot to view by highlighting it in the list of available plots and then press
the Plot button or simply double-clicking on the appropriate plot
ZoomingPlots can be zoomed simply by placing the mouse pointer (which changes
to a pair of cross hairs over the active plot area) at the corner of the region to
enlarge, and then dragging until the area of interest is enclosed by the zoom box.
Release the mouse button and the outlined area will be zoomed to fill the entire plot
area.
Scales
PROSPER normally picks appropriate scales to display the data. Use Scales to enter
custom upper and lower limits for both X- and Y- scales. To display round numbers
on the intermediate grid lines, ensure that the span of the upper and lower plot limits
fits evenly with the number of plot blocks set in the Options menu.
Replot
Re-plots the graph using the original scales. Use this option to un-zoom a plot.
OutputSelects the output options menu. Plots can be output to the Windows
Select the desired plot options and click Print to output the plot. Depending on the
actual hard copy device connected, the User may need to experiment with font styles
and sizes. Note that some fonts cannot be rotated, and are unsuitable as a Vertical
font. If Y-axis labels are being plotted horizontally, try a different font selection.
Return to the plot menu by clicking OK.
ColoursThis option enables to customise the colour of any item on the plot. Note
that laser printers and monochrome monitors will often produce better results if
colour plotting is disabled. A sample colour customising screen is shown below:
OptionsThe Options button enables to customise the overall appearance of the plot
screen and select font type and size etc. A sample options screen is shown below:
Some plots include a results box on the screen. If the default position of the box
interferes with the plot, it can be moved by holding down the Shift key and using the
mouse to drag it to another location. The fonts selected on the Plot options screen
apply only to plots. The export data fonts are set up on a separate screen.
Variables
Use this button to select variables for plotting. The variables available change
according to the type of calculations that have been completed and the particular
plot type that has been selected. Where applicable, extended plot variables can be
selected.
Test Data
Clicking Test data displays a screen in which the User can enter up to 10 measured
data pairs. Once the test data has been entered, it can be displayed together with
the calculated data when the plot is re-drawn. If the current .OUT file is subsequently
saved, the test data will also be saved and will appear on subsequent plots.
Help
Accesses the on-line Help system. See Section 14 for more details of the Help
system.
13
Units 467
13 Units
This chapter describes the system of units. The built in flexibility of the units system enables the
User to select any variable and define the unit of measurement to be used. This feature allows to
modify the units system so that it corresponds to data reports supplied by a service company or
customise the units system to suit the Users own personal preferences.
PROSPER always works internally in Field units. To facilitate data entry and output
display in any units system, PROSPER accepts data in the specified Input units and
converts it to Oilfield units for calculation. The results (in Field units) are converted
back to the specified Output unit set if necessary. By making selections from the
different categories, it is possible to work in the preferred units and save the results
in the units required by company policy.
The changes made to the units system are retained in the program memory and
apply to all files opened during the current processing session. The program allows
to create a custom units system.
The Units Summary screen is contains the list of parameters and their units options:
Units selection
Select the units for the input and output of the variables
Validation
Used to set up the error checking limits for each selected input variable.
Click on the Details buttons to the right of each variable name in order to view the
details of each particular variable.
To save changes, click Save. A prompt will be displayed to enter a name for the
new Units System. This new system can now be recalled and applied to any file.
Custom unit sets can be erased by clicking the Delete button, then selecting the
unwanted units system. The ability to have separate input and output unit systems
allows the User to work with familiar units and to create reports or export data in any
required unit system. PROSPER calculates them internally in Oilfield Units. To
validate unit conversion factors, click the button located to the right of the particular
variable and the multiplier and shift used for unit conversion will be displayed.
Clicking Report Print will create a summary report of conversion factors in use.
If some particular units have been modified during the course of a PROSPER
session, the changes will be written into the .SIN file when the input data are saved.
Irrespective of the current units system settings, recalling a previously saved .SIN file
will cause PROSPER to revert to the units saved in the recalled .SIN file. To
permanently impose a new set of units on the recalled file, open a custom units file
(or use one of the internal unit sets) and then save the .SIN file. The new units
settings will be used whenever the .SIN file is loaded.
Find the required variable by scrolling through the list, and then enter required
changes in the low and high validation limit boxes. Enter the custom validation limits
in the units currently in use. To permanently attach the new validation limits to a
custom units system, click Save before leaving the validation screen by clicking OK.
Input and Output units can be selected from this screen. Validation limits can be
entered for the selected units. The Options panel enables to set the number of
decimal places to display for each unit type.
14
Wizard 473
14 Wizard
This feature allows the User to set up models and perform certain tasks following a
pre-defined sequence.
The use of Wizards is of particular benefit to inexperienced Users, as it allows to
easily set up a model based on active wizard examples by advancing through the
input screens in the correct sequence and asking at any step the User for the
required information. In this way the User will familiarize with PROSPER windows as
well as with the essential steps required to set up, match and use the models.
In order to run wizard examples follow first of all select Wizard from the main menu
toolbar:
Then select the desired Wizard and click on Run to run it.
All that the User has to do is to follow the instructions that time to time are displayed
and complete the input screens with the required data.
To modify an existing wizard select Edit. This will access the wizard script window:
To create a new wizard select instead New. This will display an empty script window.
The script consists of a series of VB commands using OpenServer strings to set the
values of the input parameters, perform calculations, and retrieve results.
Please refer to the OpenServer User Guides for further details about the basic
OpenServer functions.
On the top part of the script window there is the Commands list window, which
provides immediate access to all the OpenServer variables. This window allows
selecting the desired variable and getting a copy of it, which can be pasted in the
DoCmd(PROSPER.MENU.<tag>)
If <tag> is for example Options, the command will display the main PROSPER
options.
DoCmd(PROSPER.PLOT.<number>)
If <number> is 1, for example, the command will display the IPR plot.
The example scripts can also be used by experienced Users as templates to build
their own scripts.
Recommendation
Petroleum Experts recommends to set up the models according to the worked
examples shown in the Appendix A. This will allow the User to have a better
understanding of the physics that is behind the software and the importance of the
matching process.
15
Help 477
15 Help
PROSPER has an on-line Help facility which enables the User to get information
quickly about a menu option, input field or function command. This facility enables to
display instructions for completing a particular task or input field without exiting from
the current screen. The help windows offer a list of topics which not only include
definitions and functions specific to PROSPER, but details on using some features of
Windows as well.
To use the PROSPER on-line help system, the help file must be located in the same
directory as the program. If the User is new to Windows, information on using the
Help system can be made available when selecting the Help option in the PROSPER
main menu and choosing 'Using Help'. This will display a help screen from which the
information required can be selected from a list of topics.
The Help facility has function buttons located at the top of the windows, which can
be used to navigate within the help system. If a particular feature is not currently
available, the button associated with that function is dimmed. Information on specific
help topics may lead to other related topics. Some words in the Help windows are
marked with a solid underline and appear in colour (green) if the User uses a colour
screen.
These words are called jump terms and can be used to move around Help more
quickly. When clicking a jump term, Help will move directly to the topic associated
with the underlined word(s).
To get information quickly about a specific menu option or entry field in PROSPER,
the following methods will display the help facility:
15.2.1 Help Through the Menu
From the menu bar in PROSPER, click on Help (or ALT H) and select Index. From the
list of help topics, select the topics to see by pointing to the specific item.
Click Help Flow Correlations to access a detailed generalised discussion about the
history and reasons behind flow correlations and issues that relate to their use in
PROSPER.
If the User need to contact Petroleum Experts about a problem with the program, please
have the version number and creation date shown on this screen available should it
be required.
Web Home Page. This option accesses the Petroleum Experts website www.
petroleumexperts.com
Web User Area. This options accesses a dedicated area of the Petroleum Experts
website containing technical information about the IPM Suite and news about the new
developments
Technical Support. This option accesses the section of the Petroleum Experts website on
which it is possible to post technical support requests to the Petroleum Experts Technical
Support Service
16
482 PROSPER
16 Appendix
16.1 A - Worked Examples
To help illustrate the power of PROSPER, examples are provided with the program. We
suggest to run through them to become familiar with the program and its various options.
These examples are in ~\samples\PROSPER directory. The location of this directory
depends on where the program has been installed.
A very useful Quick Start Guide will provide the User with an example showing how to build,
match and use a well model.
The design assumes that the reservoir pressure will drop to 4000 psig and that the
water cut will rise to 80%.
This example will guide you through opening the existing OILWELL.OUT file,
changing the calculation options and reservoir conditions, performing the design and
finally saving the file under a new name.
16.1.1.1Model Set Up
Let's start by opening the file created in the Quick Start Guide "oilwell.out" which
correspond to a naturally flowing well.
The next step is to modify the inflow performance section to model future conditions
requiring gas lift.
Select the System Menu and click Inflow performance (the IPR screen
can also be activated by double clicking in the IPR section of the
PROSPER interface)
Change the reservoir pressure to 4000 psig. Click on Calculate | Finish |
Done to exit
Variable Value
Gas lift gas gravity 0.8
H2S 0
CO2 0
N2 0
GLR Injected 0
For performing a gas lift design, the gas lift method and GLR injected can be ignored
at this stage.
Click Done and leave the gas injection depth set to zero.
The program has found that around 1470 STB/d of oil could be produced with 5.0
MMscf/d of lift gas injected at the optimum depth of injection. Click on Finish to exit
the plot.
Note down the Actual Gas Injection rate, Actual Injection pressure and Actual
Liquid rate from the graph. Having determined the number of valves and their
depths, the next task is to calculate the valve test rack setting pressures as follows:
Click Results to display valve depths and pressures
Click Calculate to display the opening and closing pressures together with
the test rack setting pressures.
The number of valves required to pass the design lift gas rate is shown at the left of
the screen. Click on the scroll arrows to see the selected port sizes, gas injection
rates, etc. Click Report to generate a hard-copy of the gas lift design then click M
ain to return to the main screen.
16.1.1.4Calculating Sensitivities
To run sensitivities on the design for e.g. different reservoir pressures, water cuts,
etc. the gas lift design must be transferred to the System Gas Lift equipment as per
the following procedure:
Return to the main menu
Click System Gaslift Data and select Valve Depths Specified as the
gas lift method.
Click Transfer From Gaslift Design OK. The design valve depths will
appear.
PROSPER now has the valve depths and surface injection pressure, but since GLR
Injected is still set to zero, no gas is being injected in the calculations. The rate of lift
gas injection will be set using a sensitivity variable.
Click through the solutions and check the solution for 90% water cut and 3500 psi
reservoir pressure. This design is still capable of injection at the deepest (orifice
valve) and the production rate is around 400 BOPD. The sensitivity calculations
show that the design is suitable for the expected future producing conditions.
To set up this problem, open GL Design.OUT and make the following changes:
Options Menu
Predict Pressure and Temperature on land
Temperature Model Rough Approximation
Click System | Equipment (tubing etc) | Surface Equipment, input the following
data:
NOTE: Change the Pipe Length units to miles by right clicking on the pipe length
units
Click Done | Summary | Draw Surface and check the equipment data has been
correctly entered.
Gaslift Data
Return to the main menu and click System Gaslift Data. Select Fixed Depth of
Injection as the gas lift method, and enter an injection depth of 7535 ft. The
injection gas gravity (S.G) should remain at 0.8.
To find the well flow rate, click Calculation System (Ipr + Vlp) 3 Variables. Enter
the following input data:
Use the Generate feature to enter the calculation rates, Click Generate and enter
100 and 15,000 STB/day for the minimum and maximum rates. Enter 20 for number
of rates and use Geometric spacing to propagate the table. Click Done and
PROSPER will fill in the rates table.
For variable 1
- Select Gaslift gas injection rate
Enter 1,2,3,4,5,6
For variable 2
- Clear any existing entries by Pressing Reset
For variable 3
- Clear any existing entries by Pressing Reset
The long flow line will slow the calculations, so please be patient.
Once the calculation has stopped, click Sensitivity Variables and select Liquid rate
. Click Done to display the following plot:
Note that the production rate is relatively insensitive to the volume of lift gas injection
and that the optimum injection rate has decreased from the optimum found in
Example 1 to around 4 MMscf/day. Click Finish and return to the Calculation S
ystem menu.
Click Sensitivity PvD and use the scroll arrows to select the solution rate for 4
MMscf/day. Select the Manifold as First node and the Casing at 11400 ft as the
last node. Click Continue Calculate to compute the gradient at the solution flow
rate. The pressure profiles for the flowline and tubing can be displayed on the same
or separate plots. Click Plot Variables and select Length (surface & down hole)
on the Y-Axis and Pressure and Temperature on the X-axis, then click Done to
plot the profiles in the tubing as follows:
Note the change of slope of the pressure gradient at the depth of injection. The fluid
temperature approaches that of the surroundings about halfway along its length.
The pressure gradient in the flowline rapidly increases over its last third. This is due
to high flow velocities as ever increasing volumes of gas breaks out of solution.
Increased frictional pressure losses in the flowline account for the decrease in
optimum lift gas injection rate observed in this example.
This example shows how PROSPER's Enthalpy Balance temperature model can be
used to predict the wellhead flowing temperature (WHFT) of a high pressure / high
temperature oil well.
It is planned to drill an appraisal well to test the extent of a discovery. The objective
is to flow the well for four days at a rate of 10000 STB/d provided that the wellhead
flowing temperature remains below 200 degrees F.
The objective of this example is to determine the WHFT profile versus time.
Click Done.
The well equipment, riser, surface environment and the properties of the formations
penetrated by the well must be specified to allow PROSPER to calculate heat
losses. This necessitates significantly more data entry than for predicting pressure
only applications.
Click Done
In this example as there is no surface equipment section to skip this section and
advance to the next section click on Cancel.
Xmas tree 0 ft
tubing type mild steel tubing
measured depth 13600 ft
Inside diameter 4.778"
Outside diameter 5.5"
Roughness 0.0006
The User can enter a sea temperature gradient in the enthalpy balance model. We
are going to assume a linear change of temperature from the sea level (50 degree F)
to seabed (42 degree F). Hence, enter the following in the Sea Temperature
Gradient Table:
300 42
The above data describes a drilling rig with a rotary table 100 ft above sea level
located in 300 ft of water.
Formation Formation
Measured Temperature
depth ft deg F
400 42
14000 290
Define the drilling and completion by entering the drilling and completion data as
shown on the table below.
This describes a well with all casing strings hung off at the sea bed and the well is
tied back to surface using a 30" riser.
Here, we are assuming that the annulus is filled with mud. The users can also
customize their own completion liquid or gas type if the appropriate fluid data is
available.
Click Done.
Define the lithology by entering the data shown on the screen below:
In the Database section the conductivity of the different materials could be modify, in
this case will use the default values.
Define the reservoir inflow model by clicking System Inflow performance. Select PI
Entry IPR and enter the following:
Reservoir pressure 6100 psig
Reservoir temperature 290 degrees F
Water cut 0%
Click on the | Input Data button and enter a PI of 8 BOPD/psi
Click | Calculate and an AOF around 28660 STB/day will be calculated. Click Main
and return to the Main menu.
16.1.3.3Calculation Section
The objective of the calculation is to determine the well head pressure and well head
temperature and check whether the wellhead flowing temperature will rise above 200
degrees F within 4 days whilst flowing at a constant rate of 10000 STB/d.
In order to achieve that we can perform a gradient calculation, for that we will need
From the IPR section we can see that a flow rate of 10000 stb/day can be achieved
with a bottom hole pressure of 4789 psig.
For an Enthalpy balance model the gradient calculations are perform on the direction
of the flow, so for a producing well the calculations are perform from bottom to top.
Enter the flowing bottom hole pressure as first node pressure (4789 psig), the first
node temperature is the reservoir temperature.
Click Continue
In the sensitivity section select as variable 1 "Time since production started" with
values of 1, 5 and 100 days as shown in the next screen shot:
We can see that the WHP is approximately 1867 psig and the well head temperature
increase through time from 174 F to 198 F from 1 day to 100 days of flow.
Click Continue and select "Time since production started" as sensitivity variable
selecting values of 1, 5 and 100 days.
Select Sensitivity
16.1.4.1Model Setup
From the main menu, click File New and reinitialise the program input and output
files. Open the file OILWELL.out from the Quick start guide and make the following
changes to set up an ESP example:
Set the tubing O.D. to 4.5 inches and the casing I.D. to 6.184 inches.
Return to the main menu.
There is free GOR at the pump intake, so it is possible to check if a gas separator is
required. Click on Sensitivity to check the Dunbar plot which can be used to
estimate the separator efficiency required to reduce the intake free GLR to an
acceptable level.
This is an empirical correlation where the operating point (blue square) should lie
above the red curve labeled Dunbar factor. If the operating point lies below the red
curve a gas separator should be installed and the efficiency of the separator required
depends on the quality line at which the point is located.
Click | Done and | Design and PROSPER will display the ESP Design screen.
In the Input data section the design calculation has been transferred into this section
where several parameters are displayed such as (average down-hole rate, pump
intake pressure, pump discharge pressure, etc) .
A centrifugal pump can be selected from the Select Pump drop down menu. The list
of pumps available has been automatically filtered for those pumps that can deliver
the conditions specified above in the Input data section.
For this example, select the Centrilift KC12000 pump from the list of suitable pumps.
The pump needs 71 stages and will require 395 HP at the design rate
.
From the list of suitable motors, select a 400 HP Centrilift 544 - Standard motor with
2225 Volt windings.
Click Plot to display the design operating point superimposed on the pump
performance curve:
The operating point (red square) should lie between the minimum and maximum
operating range of the pump performance curve to ensure an acceptable run life
specially in floating impeller pumps.
If it is necessary the user can select another pump and cross check with the
performance curve plot which pump has the operating point close to the best
efficiency line.
Return to the main section by clicking on Finish in the plot Done | Done. PROSPER
automatically transfer the ESP designed into the System | Electrical Submersible
Pump section.
Now, we must check whether this design will be able to cope with expected
variations in the well conditions expected to occur over the next few years. This is
done using the Calculation System section to compute sensitivities as follows:
Click Main to return to the main menu
Click Calculation System - 3 Variables and enter a top node
pressure of 250 psi and a water cut of 80%
Check that Petroleum Experts 2 is selected for the vertical lift
correlation
Select Rate Method Automatic - Linear
Click Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables:
For variable 1
- Select Water cut
Enter 80, 90
For variable 2
- Reservoir Pressure
The solution of the system is shown in the right hand side and in order to see the
solution for each sensitivity variable we can scroll down using the little arrows next to
each sensitivity.
Click on Plot select Variables and select VLP and Pump discharge pressure. In an
ESP well the solution of the system is given by the intersection of the VLP and the
pump discharge pressure.
This is the main difference with respect to a naturally flowing well. The Pump
discharge pressure PDP includes the IPR, pressure drop in the casing and pump
duty. The VLP includes the first node pressure and pressure drop in the tubing/pipe
from the first node to the pump depth.
Click Solution Details, In this section we can inspect all the parameters related to the
pump and motor at the current operating condition.
Plot the sensitivities by clicking Pump Plot from the pump solution screen as follows.
Here the operating points at different conditions can be inspected with respect
to the performance curve of the pump selected.
16.1.5.1Model Set up
From the main menu, click File New and reinitialise the program input and output
files. In order to be consistent with the previous examples and be able to compare
the requirements, we will be using the same example. Open the file OILWELL.out
from the Quick Start Guide and make the following changes to set up an HSP
example:
Click Options and select Lift method Hydraulic Drive Downhole
Pump with type method Commingled Annular Supply.
Enter the Power fluid (water) salinity as 10000 ppm.
Revert to unmatched PVT correlations by clicking Correlations Reset
All. Return to the main menu by clicking | Done twice.
Edit the System Equipment (Tubing) description to include the annulus
dimensions as per the following input screen:
Set the tubing O.D. to 4.5 inches and the casing I.D. to 6.184 inches.
Return to the main menu.
Lower the reservoir pressure by clicking on | System Inflow performance and
setting the reservoir pressure to 4500 psi.
Change the water cut and Total GOR to 80% and 300 scf/stb respectively.
Leave the other parameters at their original values and click on CALCULATE
For designing a new HSP installation, do not enter any HSP System data - go
directly to | Design | Hydraulic Pump | Design and enter the following design
specifications:
Click | Calculate to display the pump duty calculation screen. Click Calculate again
to find the pump duty as per the following example:
Click | Done and | Design and PROSPER will display the HSP Design screen.
For this example, select the Weir TP115AH(4250-12325) rpm from the list of suitable
pumps. The pump needs 72 stages and will require 244 HP at the design rate.
From the list of suitable turbines, select a weir T55-B.
Click Pump Plot to display the design operating point superimposed on the pump
performance curve:
Now, we must check whether this design will be able to cope with expected
variations in the well conditions expected to occur over the next few years. This is
done using the Design | Hydraulic Pump | System section to compute sensitivities
as follows:
For variable 1
- Select Water cut
Enter 80, 95
For variable 2
- Reservoir Pressure
Enter 4000, 4500
For variable 3
- Select pump speed
Enter 5000-6000-7000
Click | Continue | Calculate to perform the sensitivity calculations.
Once the calculations have been completed, click | Solution Details, select the
design case variables of 80% water cut, 4500 psi reservoir pressure and 6000 rpm
pump speed by clicking on the variable arrows. The calculated liquid off-take rate is
close to 6000 STB/day.
Plot the sensitivities by clicking | Pump Plot from the pump solution screen as
follows:
The Jet pump design section calculates the pump duty required to achieve a given
design rate. According to the input data such as power fluid information the program
calculates the ratio between the nozzle and throat area and calculates the nozzle
diameter and throat diameter. A pump is then selected from the user-defined
database of jet pump characteristics.
16.1.6.1Model Set up
Start a new instance of PROSPER by clicking in the PROSPER main menu on File |
New
From the main menu click on Options and make the following selection:
16.1.6.2PVT Section
In a Jet Pump system two fluids have to be characterized: The Power Fluid and the
reservoir fluid.
The PVT properties of these fluids should be known in order to calculate the mixture
properties to calculate the pressure drop in the well.
Therefore in the PVT section we have to define and match both the power fluid &
the reservoir fluid.
In this example the power fluid is 30 API oil with 20 cp viscosity at standard
conditions. Therefore the Power Fluid must be specified as Other Fluid in the drop
down box.
Furthermore the Viscosity of the Power fluid must be defined with changing pressure
and temperatures (for the expected conditions). To generate the viscosity tables with
the appropriate correlation the following procedure must be completed:
Select Other Fluid in the drop list box and enter the density of the power fluid
in the input box.
GOR: 0 scf/stb
Oil Gravity: 30 API (power fluid density)
Gas gravity: 0.7 (It is not used since GOR=0)
Water salinity: 100000 ppm (Not used)
Match data input screen. In this section enter the viscosity of the power fluid
at the measured temperature. (Up to 5 tables for different temperatures can
be input).
Perform a regression to match all the viscosity correlations with the match
data.
Review and select the viscosity correlations that need the least correction
factors (Multiplier and shift). For this particular case Beal et.al. requires the
least correction 0.98 and -0.21.
Select the most appropriate correlation from the drop down menu in the main
PVT section.
Enter the range of temperature and pressure data then click Generate to
calculate the table.
Click Plot to visualize the power fluid viscosities vs. pressure at different
temperatures.
Once the viscosities tables for the power fluid have been generated, the
regression parameters must be reset. To do this, select Correlations | Reset
all.
For this example, PVT matching parameters for reservoir fluid are also available.
Enter these in the Match Data Section.
Temperature : 150F
Bubble Oil
Point GOR FVF OIL VISC
psig scf/stb rb/stb cp
820 100 1.08 11.1
Perform the regression analysis and select the correlations that need the least
correction. In this particular case Standing for bubble point, solution GOR and
formation volume factor and Petrosky et al for the oil viscosity.
From the main menu in PROSPER click on System | Inflow performance and enter
the information given.
Click on the Input Data button on the right hand side to enter the PI of the well and
hit Calculate to inspect the IPR plot.
16.1.6.4Downhole Equipment
The following data is available to model the down-hole equipment section:
In this section the user has to define the design conditions of the jet pump:
Click Calculate | Calculate. The program will calculate the pump duty required
based on the inflow performance relationship, the pressure losses in the tubing and
the entered well head pressure. Based on the power fluid injection rate and
pressure PROSPER will calculate R (ratio between nozzle and throat area), the
diameter of the throat and the diameter of the nozzle.
The next step is to choose a jet pump that best-fits the calculated data, select Done |
Design
The column labeled Desired shows the calculated jet pump design results. The
selected jet pump calculated values from the defined user database (selected from
the drop list box) must closely match the theoretical calculated results.
After the jet pump design has been completed, a System analysis calculation can be
performed.
Click Continue | Continue | Calculate and to plot the system analysis result click Plot
From the plot main menu bar select Variable and then: VLP curve and Pump
discharge pressure. The solution of the system is given by the intersection of these
two variables as shown in the next plot.
A retrograde gas condensate well example will be computed using the Equation of
State PVT method.
To set up this problem, first open the PROSPER file CONDEX.OUT located in the
Sample folder usually located under c:\Program Files\Petroleum Experts\IPM6.0\
Samples\PROSPER
Options Menu
Select Options and ensure the following options are set:
Click | Done, then PVT Input to display the PVT input screen:
The EOS input data is intended to be loaded from an external PVT simulation
program file using the Import button.
To ensure that all the data has been correctly entered, and to check the type of fluid
described by the pseudo components entered.
You can do so by pressing the Phase Envelope button and hitting plot.
Once the input data has been specified, the user has the option of selecting
Click Properties, and PROSPER will display the equivalent Black Oil
PVT properties for the reservoir fluid.
An identical well example as the previous one will be computed using the black oil
condensate PVT model.
How the data input for black oil condensate PVT works
To set up this problem, firstly clear the existing calculations by clicking File New.
Recall the condensate example by clicking File Open and double clicking on the
filename of the previously saved condensate example (CONDEX.OUT).
Click | Done, then commence entry of the PVT data by clicking | PVT Input data.
Note that the above properties have been derived from an EOS calculation using the
Properties function.
Click Matching Correlation Comparison. Leave the analysis variables set as for the
other PVT methods and repeat the computations selecting the Petroleum Experts 4
mechanistic model Once the calculations have stopped, click | Plot to display the
following:
This is in close agreement (0.5% difference) with that obtained from compositional
modelling - even though the liquid dropout values have not been matched in the
Black Oil model.
For condensate wells, the black oil PVT method can be recommended for:
Accuracy of mixture density calculations
Simplicity
Speed of calculation
Accuracy of pressure calculations
Proceed to the calculation screen and click Calculate. The solution rates are shown
on the following plot:
The above condensate example has shown how to set up the PROSPER
calculations for the different condensate PVT methods. It also illustrates that the
Black Oil PVT method is capable of accurate well pressure prediction and is more
computationally efficient than more complex PVT methods.
From the main menu, click on | File New to reset input, analysis and output data.
Set up a new problem by making the following selections on the | Options menu:
16.1.8.2Options Menu
16.1.8.3PVT menu
Click | Done and enter the following data on the PVT Input screen:
Separator pressure 1200 psig
Separator temperature 120 deg F
Separator GOR 25,000 scf/STB
Separator gas gravity 0.7 specific gravity
Tank GOR 1 scf/STB
Tank gas gravity 0.7 specific gravity
Condensate gravity 55 API
Water to gas ratio 4 bbl/MMscf
Water salinity 10,000 ppm
Dew point at reservoir temp. 4500 psig
Reservoir temperature 220 degrees F
Reservoir pressure 5000 psig
Select the Lee et al gas viscosity correlation, then click | Done to return to the main
menu.
Equipment Data
Click System Equipment All Edit and enter the following equipment description:
Deviation Survey
Bottom MD TVD
(ft) (ft)
0 0
10000 10000
Enter NO surface equipment. (Click on Cancel to continue)
Enter the tubing string details as follows under down hole section:
Bottom MD ID Roughness
(ft) (ins) (ins)
Xmas tree 0
Tubing 500 3.958 0.0006
SSSV 3
Tubing 9800 3.958 0.0006
Casing 10000 8.681 0.0006
Enter the flowing temperature survey data in the Geothermal gradient section:
Click on the | Input data button on the top right hand corner of the window. In the
reservoir model data entry screen, enter the following:
Reservoir permeability 300 mD
Reservoir thickness 100 ft
Drainage area 640 acres
Dietz shape factor 31.6
Well bore radius 0.51 ft
Perforation interval 50 ft
Reservoir Porosity 0.2 fraction
Time 100 days
Connate water saturation 0.2 fraction
Non-Darcy coefficient Calculated
Then click on the | Mech./ Geom. skin tab and enter the following:
Perforation diameter 0.5 ins
Shots per foot 6 1/ft
Perforation length 12 ins
Damaged zone thickness 12 ins
Damaged zone permeability 150 mD
Crushed zone thickness 0.2 ins
Crushed zone permeability 75 mD
Shot phasing 60 degrees
Vertical permeability 30 mD
Click on the | Gravel pack tab and define the gravel pack parameters as follows:
Gravel pack perm 40000 mD
Gravel pack length 1.3 ins
Perforation efficiency 1
Click | Calculate and the program will calculate an AOF of approximately 116
MMscf/day display the IPR on a plot. Click | Main and return to the main menu.
perforation density
gravel pack permeability
Select Dukler Flannigan as the surface equipment correlation and Duns and Ros
Modified for the VLP correlation.
Leave the rate method set to Automatic linear. Set the top node pressure to 1200
psig and the water/gas ratio to 4 bbl/ MMscf.
Click Continue to display the sensitivity variables screen.
The results for the different sensitivity variables can be seen by scrolling down on the
little arrows on the top right hand side.
From the calculation screen select Sensitivity to plot the sensitivity data select V
ariables and select dP Completion as the Y-axis variable, Shots per foot for the
X-axis and gravel pack permeability for the parameter variable.
Plot the results for 1200 psi top node pressure.
Note that when the sand face pressure drops below the dew point,
liquid dropout occurs. The Petroleum Experts IPR reduces the relative
permeability to gas when liquids are being produced.
In this producing area, field trials and lab tests have established that gravel pack
failure should not occur provided that the total pressure drop across the
completion is less than 430 psi (for purposes of illustration only)
By inspection, the above sensitivity plot shows that 12 shots per foot perforations
and a gravel pack permeability of 40 Darcies will be required to ensure that the
well will not have to be choked back unnecessarily.
Return to the calculation screen and click on | Solution Detail, then select the
solution for
From the solution summary, we know that the pressure drop across the completion
is almost all due to the gravel pack. In excess of 88 MMscf/day can be safely
produced with this completion design.
Make a sensitivity plot with dP completion on the Y-axis, First node pressure on the
X-axis and Gravel Pack Permeability as the parameter variable. Shot density = 8 / ft
Assume that the gravel pack has 40000 mD permeability. Zoom on curve 1 (8 SPF)
near where it is around 400 psi dP completion and read off the First Node Pressure.
You should get around 2500 psi.
To calculate the gas production rate for 400 psi dP completion, use the Co
mbinations option on the Select variables screen. Enter the following for
combination Case 1:
Leave the rate field blank. Click | Continue and then | Calculate. PROSPER will
calculate the system solution. Click | Solution details and check that the well can
flow at 63 MMscf/day with a THP of 2500 and a dP across the completion of around
410 psi. Note that the allowable rate at 8 shots per foot is more than 20 MMscf/day
lower than the allowable with 12 shots per foot.
The example shows how to set up the input data for a Horizontal well - Friction dP
IPR model. It is based on the OILWELL example file.
Note that the reservoir permeability must be increased from 50 in the base
example to 500 millidarcies in order to see the friction pressures drop along the
well bore.
From the main menu, click File New to reset input, analysis and output data. Click F
ile Open and select OILWELL.OUT from the SAMPLES sub-directory. This will
avoid the need to enter down hole equipment or PVT data.
This well has alternating perforated and blank sections, which are identical.
We will enter the data for two only two zones, one blank one producing.
Then we will use the editing features to copy identical data to the other zones.
For the first zone enter the following:
Zone Type Perforated
Skin Method By Hand
Gravel Pack This will be automatically skipped
Zone Length 100 feet
Zone Permeability 500 mD
Flowing Radius 0.15 feet
Zone Roughness 0.001 inches
These calculations also calculate the pressure loss along the well bore and allow
the user to display the pressure profiles.
All the IPR input must have been defined before performing the
coning calculations.
Click | Calculate, and the breakthrough time and critical rate estimates will be
displayed.
To calculate and display the horizontal well pressure profile and production
contribution from each zone for the entered rate, click Plot. PROSPER will display a
graph similar to the following:
The source of inflow can be plotted by clicking Variables and selecting Rate per Unit
Length. As shown in the following plot, more production enters at the heel of the
well than the toe:
Once the Horizontal well dP friction IPR, has been calculated, System calculations
can be carried out as normal. If you need to calculate a wide range of sensitivity
cases, the dP friction model could be used to prepare a table of test data points to
be entered in one of the fast-calculating multi-rate IPR models.
Then we will use the well model created to obtain the total production and
contribution of each producing zone when the well is flowing with a well head
From the main menu, click File New to reset input, analysis and output data. Click F
ile Open and select OILWELL.OUT from the SAMPLES sub-directory. This will
avoid the need to enter down hole equipment or PVT data.
Multilayer Dp Loss IPR Data Input
16.1.10.2
Click on | Input data, and the layer data entry screen will be displayed.
The following description shows how to set up a well model with two layers
separated by 100 feet.
Enter the location of the top of the producing zone - measured depth 11,400, TVD
10,430. This is the deepest depth in the deviation survey table.
Click the Layer PVT data button and enter the following:
Layer formation GOR 820 scf/STB
Layer oil gravity 34 API
Layer gas gravity 0.7 s.g.
Click | Done.
The layer flowing radius is the radius of the pipe connecting the layers i.e., 0.5 x tubing I.D.
The wellbore radius (rw) is the radius of the drill bit.
Layer 2 is the section of blank pipe that separates the two producing layers. Enter
the following for Layer 2.
Layer type Blank
Measured depth 11,600 feet
True vertical depth 10,600 feet
Layer flowing radius 0.25 feet
Layer roughness 0.0006 inches
The layer flowing radius is the radius of the pipe connecting the layers i.e., 0.5 x tubing I.D.
The wellbore radius (rw) is the radius of the drill bit.
Click the | Layer PVT data button and enter the following:
Layer formation GOR 820 scf/STB
Layer oil gravity 34 API
Layer gas gravity 0.7 s.g.
Layer water cut 30 percent
Click | Done.
Calculate and PROSPER will calculate the composite IPR, the reference depth for
the composite IPR is at the TOP node (11400 ft MD) which should correspond with
the deepest point entered in the down-hole equipment section.
In the IPR plot click on Variables and select Layer's IPR.
Note: The IPR for each layer is referenced to the Top of each layer. The composite
or total IPR (green curve) is referenced to the Top node (e.g. 11400 ft MD).
Click Results to see the layer pressures and production contributions. Crossflow into
a layer appears as a negative production value as in the following example:
In this case the Down-hole equipment section has already been completed, so we
can use the well model to perform some calculations.
We can notice that in this section is not possible to select a Water cut and GOR like
in the example OILWELL.out.
If we select a Multilayer IPR model the Water cut, GOR, Reservoir pressure, etc
should be modify for each layer in the IPR section. (The reason behind that each
layer will have different values).
On the right hand side we can read the results. Clicking on Solution Details button.
Then select Inflow Layer Details to inspect the contribution of each layer.
A multilateral well is a well that has more than one branch going out of the bore hole
and connecting the well with the reservoir.
One of the main objectives of a multilateral well is to produce a larger drainage area
than a single mono-bore. This give a great benefit on the production, especially in
faulted reservoirs .
The multilateral wells are common in offshore environment, where a limited space in
the platform with a limited well slots available may encourage this type of completion.
Options
16.1.11.1
From the main menu click on File | New to re-initialize PROSPER.
Click Options | Options to set up the type of well model according to the following
table:
Separator : Single-Stage
Hydrates : Disable Warning
Water Viscosity : Use Default Correlation
Water Vapour : No Calculations
Viscosity Model : Newtonian Fluid
Note: This section is used to determine the type of well to be modeled. (Gas, Oil,
artificially lifted, etc). The next sections will be adapted according to the options
selected here. A good methodology to complete the input data in PROSPER is to use
the main menu bar and go to the sections from left to right and from top to bottom.
PVT section
16.1.11.2
The information in the next table describes the PVT properties of the fluid.
From the main menu select PVT | Input Data to enter the properties.
Temperature 65 deg F
Equipment Data
16.1.11.3
The next section (moving from left to right in the main menu) is the System | E
quipment section where we need to specify the deviation survey, equipment
information (tubing, casing depths and diameters), etc.
In the case of a Multilateral well in this section we are going to describe the well from
the top node (well head or manifold) to the Tie point (depth in the well where the first
branch is going out of the main well-bore).
In the following diagram the blue part is entered in the System | Equipment section.
The rest of the well including the reservoir will be modeled in the Multilateral IPR
section.
From the main menu select System | Equipment and click on All | Edit to complete all
the section (deviation survey, down-hole equipment, etc).
Once the deviation survey is entered click on Plot to inspect the deviation survey.
The next section is the Surface Equipment section, as we are modeling the well from
the well head (no surface equipment) click on Cancel to continue.
In the Down-hole Equipment section we can enter the configuration of the well from
the well head to the Tie point.
Tubing
Measured Inside
Type Depth Diameter
(feet) (inches)
Xmas Tree 0
Tubing 260 6
SSSV 4.5
Tubing 1577 6
In the next screenshot we can see the data entered in the down-hole equipment
section.
The temperature of the surroundings of the well is given in the next table, let's
assume an overall heat transfer coefficient of 3 BTU/h/ft2/F.
Formation
Measured Formation
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 40
1578 62
Multilateral IPR
16.1.11.4
From the main menu click on System | Inflow Performance to access the IPR
section.
In the IPR section the multilateral section of the well is modelled. The data required
is the description of the well from the Tie point (deepest point of the Down-hole
equipment section) to the reservoir.
Therefore we need to model the branches (In this case 2 branches) and the
information related to them (deviation survey, tubing/casing depths and diameters,
perforation interval, etc) and the reservoir (or reservoirs, in case of multiple layers).
In the next plot we have a graphical representation of the situation that we would like
to model:
For Element T1, i.e. the pipe between Tie Point Data to Joint 1.
Deviation survey:
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
1577 1398.4 0
1650 1424.3 230.6
Equipment data:
Tubing Tubing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter Roughness
(feet) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 1650 7 0.0006
Joint data
Branch 1 data
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
1650 1424.3 230.6
1701 1437 243
1840 1449.3 264.9
1940 1450.9 269.8
Tubing Tubing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter Roughness
(feet) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 1900 3.5 0.0006
Branch 2 data
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
1650 1424.3 230.6
1710 1430.1 231.3
1784 1432.7 239.2
1908 1432.2 257.6
2024 1438.5 267.1
2155 1447.9 256.6
2290 1445.8 248.1
2395 1449.8 238.8
2436 1449.9 235
2483 1449.8 231
Tubing Tubing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter Roughness
(feet) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 2483 4 0.0006
Reservoir data
PVT data:
Petrophysical parameters:
The IPR interface consist in a Network section where we can draw the situation of
the example using the short cut icons.
Select the fist short cut icon, or click on the drop down menu and select "Add Tie-
point" as shown in the next screen shot.
Click somewhere else in the screen to add a Tie point and for label called it "Tie
point"
Right clicking on the Tie point red square added will allow the user to (Change label,
delete the icon).
The next short cut icon (Going from left to right) is the Add Junction.
Select Add Junction and click somewhere else in the screen to add the junction, call
it "Joint".
Then select the Add Completion and click in the screen to add a completion, label it
"Branch 1".
Click somewhere else in the screen to add a second completion, named it "Branch
2".
Then select Add Reservoir from the drop down menu and click on the screen to add
a Reservoir icon.
From the drop down menu select the command "Move" and then click on a added
objects like the "Reservoir" to move it and re-locate the icons.
The next step is to connect the different objects together, so we can select the
Then click on the Tie point and drag it to the Joint, this will create a connection
between them.
Joint to Branch 1
Branch 1 to Reservoir
Joint to Branch 2
Branch 2 to Reservoir
Tie point
At this stage we need to start entering the data for the different sections.
Double click on the Tie point added icon to access the input panel.
Enter the depths of the Tie point as shown in the next snap shot.
Double click on the next element called "T1" which is a piece of casing going from
the Tie point to the joint where the branches are separated.
In this section enter the well bore radius as shown in the next picture and then click
on Input data.
In this section there are two tabs to be completed, deviation survey and equipment.
Equipment Tab:
Joint
In this section the data has been transferred automatically from the deepest point of
the previous element.
On the right hand side we can see a that the elements that need to be completed
are marked with a red x.
Click Done.
Branch 1
Double click on Branch 1 to access the input panel of the completion element.
Enter the well-bore radius and Dietz shape factor as shown below.
In the Input data section there are 3 tabs to complete (Deviation, Equipment,
Perforation Details).
Deviation:
Equipment:
Perforation Details:
Branch 2
Double click on the Branch 2 to start entering the information for this icon.
Enter the well-bore radius and Dietz shape factor, then click Input data to move to
the next section.
In the Input Data section there are 3 tabs to enter the data:
Branch 2 Deviation:
Branch 2 Equipment:
Branch 2 Perforations:
Reservoir
Double click on the blue reservoir icon to enter the data for the reservoir.
Select the Petroleum Experts Reservoir model on the left hand side, enter the PVT
data for the reservoir and click on Input Data.
In the Input Data section enter the reservoir parameters as shown in the next
snapshot.
From the main menu of the IPR section select Visualise | All
This option will display the Network window (where we have constructed the model)
and different views (Front, Side, Top) of the system where we can check that the
perforations (yellow curves) are inside the reservoir (blue area).
In this case we can see the two branches producing from the same reservoir.
In this section we are calculating a curve (e.g. 20 values of pressure, ranging from
10 psig to 557 psig).
In conductivity switch the default option is "Finite conductivity", this option will
calculate and consider the pressure drop across the branches and casing and it will
include the interference of the branches as they produce from the same reservoir.
The "Infinite Conductivity" option does not considers the pressure drops in the
pipes, therefore this option can be used to obtain the reservoir deliverability
neglecting the pressure drop in the wellbore, from the reservoir to the Tie point.
In this case using "Finite Conductivity" as shown in the screenshot above we have
obtain the following IPR plot:
Note: The IPR plot obtained is referenced at the Tie point and it considers the
pressure drop across the pipes. In other words, the IPR curve represents the
relationship between the gas flow rate produced and the Tie Point Pressure.
The IPR plot curve is calculated for 20 values of pressure and calculating the
corresponding 20 values of rate.
In this IPR plot we can see that at very high flow rates (close to the AOF) the IPR
curve goes backward.
The reason of this behavior can be explained by the fact that at low Tie Point
Pressures, the expansion of the gas in the wellbore causes high gas velocities that,
on their turn, produce high pressure drops along the well. The higher pressure drops
cause a reduction in the production itself, therefore the "knee" in the curve.
Usually this behaviour will not affect the performance of the well as the intersection
of the VLP/IPR is rarely close to the AOF.
In order to achieve this objective from the main menu select Calculation | System | 3
variables
In this section under Branch Summary we can see the contribution of each branch.
In this case we can see that Branch 1 is contributing 16.4 MMscf/day and Branch 2
is producing 44.3 MMscf/day.
In the Segment Details by Branch we can select a Branch to inspect the pressure
drop, and rate contribution.
Clicking on Plot and Variables will allow us to select different variables such as
Pressure and Cumulative Rate that can be analyzed within selected Branch.
In this example we have seen how to create a Multilateral well model for a two
branch system. We have obtained the total gas rate for a given condition of well
head pressure and the contribution of each branch.
This example shows how to set up a water injection well model in PROSPER
Here are listed all the inputs needed to build the model:
interval)
The completion details consist in a piece of tubing that runs down to 11,000 ft
(2.9 ID) and the casing below (6 ID)
The temperature of the reservoir is 250 F
The temperature of the environment at the wellhead is 50 F
The Overall Heat Transfer coefficient is assumed to be 8 Btu/hr/ft2/F
The temperature of the water injected (at the wellhead) is 60 F
The reservoir pressure is 4,000 psig
The Injectivity Index is 4 stb/day/psi
Click Done, and the all the PROSPER screens are customized to receive input
data in regards to a water injector well.
We will use the same procedure to enter the inputs as if we were dealing with a
producer.
Access the Deviation Survey and enter the deviation survey. Click Done:
No Surface Equipment is modeled; the system will only model the injector from the
wellhead.
Access the Downhole Equipment section and enter the completion details given.
Keep the roughness by default and Click Done:
Access the Geothermal Gradient section and enter the temperature of the
surroundings given. Enter the Overall Heat Transfer coefficient as given by input #6
and Click Done:
Eventually, still under the Equipment section, enter the Injected Fluid Temperature
given. Click Done:
Select the PI Entry model (because the information we have is the injectivity
index).
Enter the Reservoir Pressure and Reservoir Temperature given. It will be noticed
that the Water Cut and Total GOR inputs can be ignored because the well is a
water injector. Values are however required to validate the model.
The Water Injector well has now been built and we can use the PROSPER file to
perform a Calculation for different Well head injection pressures to check the
intersections of the VLP and IPR.
Click Continue.
Select First Node Pressure as sensitivity variable and enter values of 500, 1000 and
1500 psig as shown in the next screen shot.
The objective of this exercise is to construct a multilateral oil well with two branches
producing from the same reservoir.
The idea is to evaluate the contribution of the branches for different azimuth angles
such as 180 degrees, 90 degrees, 45 degrees and finally only 1 branch.
With this exercise we can evaluate the interference of the branches in the reservoir
and the contribution of each branch.
Stat PROSPER and open the Oilwell.out created in the Quick Start Guide section or
from the Sample folder.
The following schematic represents the situation to be modeled where there are two
branches in the reservoir at 180 degrees.
In the following tables is the data required to represent the branches and the
reservoir.
T1 data:
Deviation Survey
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
11400 10430 0
11450 10480 0
Equipment data
Tubing Tubing Tubing Tubing Casing Casing
Equipment Inside Inside Outside Outside Inside Inside
Measure
d
Type Depth Diameter Roughness Diameter Roughne
Roughnes Diameter ss
s
(feet) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 11450 3.9 0.0006
C1 data:
Deviation Survey
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
11450 10480 0
11850 10480 0
Equipment data
Tubing Tubing Tubing Tubing Casing Casing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside Outside Outside Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter Roughness Diameter
RoughnesDiamete Roughne
s r ss
(feet) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches)
Tubing 11850 3.9 0.0006
Perforation details
Perforation
Perforatio
n
Interval Interval Perforation
Perforatio Gravel
n
Measured Measured Interval Interval Gravel Pack
Depth Depth TVD TVD Skin Pack Non-Darcy
Start End Start End Value Skin
Factor
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (1/(STB/day))
11450 11850 10430 10430 0
C2 data:
Deviation survey
True
Measured Vertical
Depth Depth Azimuth
(feet) (feet) (degrees)
11450 10480 0
11850 10480 180
Equipment data
Tubing Tubing Tubing Tubing Casing Casing
Equipment Measured Inside Inside Outside Outside Inside Inside
Type Depth Diameter
Roughnes Diameter Roughnes Diamete Roughne
s s r ss
Perforation details
Perforation Perforation
Interval Interval
Perforatio Perforation
n
Measured Measured Interval Interval Gravel Gravel Pack
Depth Depth TVD TVD Skin Pack Non-Darcy
Start End Start End Value Skin
Factor
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (1/(STB/day))
11450 11850 10480 10480 0
Reservoir data
Using the short cut icons in the menu bar the different components can be added in
the system.
Starting from left to right, select the first short cut icon called "Tie-point" and click
somewhere else in the screen to add it.
The Tie point is the depth at which the pressure of the IPR plot is reported. The Tie
point should be equal to the deepest point of the down-hole equipment section.
Continue drawing the lay out of the system using the icons from left to right (juction,
completion and reservoir) to create a schematic as shown in the next screen shot:
- Tie point (Connection point between IPR and down-hole equipment section).
Double click on the Tie point and enter the data for the tie point.
The depths in this section should be the same as the deepest point entered in the
down-hole equipment section.
Click Done.
T1 is an horizontal 50 ft long casing going from the Tie point to the joint where the
branches are split.
Deviation tab:
Equipment tab:
Click Done.
The next equipment is J1, which correspond to a joint where the branches split.
Double click on J1.
Click Done.
Equipment tab
The same procedure should be used to enter the data in the completion 2 "C2".
Completion C2 has the same input data as completion C1, except for the azimuth in
the deviation survey tab.
In the deviation survey section the azimuth is 180 degrees rather than zero.
Double click on the R1 icon and enter the reservoir properties according to the next
screenshots:
Here we can inspect if the two branches (yellow lines) are inside the reservoir (blue
rectangle). This is useful to spot typos in the deviation surveys and reservoir depths.
From the main menu in the IPR section select Analyse | Calculate
1. Curve
2. Point
2. The point calculation is used to analyze the pressure drop in the branches and
contribution of the branches.
For example, selecting "One Point" then we need to specify the pressure at the Tie
point (e.g. 3000 psig)
Then click Calculate. The solution rate for that pressure is approximately 40300
STB/day.
Clicking on the "Details" button we can inspect more information for the calculated
conditions such as:
Using the model modify the Azimuth of the second branch can be changed in order
to compare the results.
40000
35000
30000
25000
20000
15000
10000
5000
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 2
Azimuth ang
In this example we will perform a design of a PCP (Progressive cavity pump) in an oil
well.
In this example it will be demonstrated how to enter PCP pump data in the
database section
To perform a Design of a PCP to increase the oil production.
To perform a Calculation System using a PCP lift system.
- Set up a naturally flowing well and perform a Calculation System to obtain the
solution of the system.
- Input a PCP pump in the database. (By default the PCP database is in blank and
the user should enter the pump data according to the vendors information).
We shall initially evaluate the performance of a naturally flowing well, and then look
at increasing the performance by adding a PCP in the well.
PCP lifted well design Input data
16.1.14.2
From the main menu click Options | Options
Fluid : Oil
PVT Method : Black Oil
Equation Of State :
Separator : Single-Stage
Emulsions : No
Hydrates : Disable Warning
Water Viscosity : Use Default Correlation
Water Vapour : No Calculations
Viscosity Model : Newtonian Fluid
Then from the main menu select System | Equipment and click on All | Edit to
complete all the sections.
The well is a vertical well, well head located at 0 ft and going down to 4000 ft.
There is no surface equipment data, the well is modelled from the well head to the
perforations.
Enter the following data and click Calculate to display the IPR.
Let's perform a Calculation | System with a well head pressure of 120 psig to inspect
the solution of the system.
Enter the Top node pressure and click on Continue | Continue | Calculate.
The objective is to increase the liquid production rate to 700 stb/day using a PCP.
In this section we will see how to enter PCP data in the database.
Select the PCP tab, select the Pumps tab and Click on Add to access the input
section and enter the following data:
Manufacturer : PCM
Pump Series : 4"
Pump Model : 400TP1350
Click Done.
Now we can see in the list a PCP pump, ideally we should enter several PCP pumps
so we can compare the performance of different pumps and select the most
appropriate pump during a design.
For this example with only one pump in the database is enough.
In this section we will see how to set up the model to perform a PCP design.
Enter the tubing outside diameter: 3.5 inches and casing inside diameter 7 inches.
From the main menu in PROSPER select Design | Progressive Cavity Pump
In this section PROSPER is calculating the pump duty required, pump intake and
pump discharge pressure and PVT properties of the fluid.
In this section we can select PCP pump from the drop down menu (Pumps entered
in the database will be available to select).
Once the pump is selected PROSPER will calculate the rotational speed required,
power required, etc.
This will automatically transfer the PCP design into the System | Progressive Cavity
Pump section
Using the PCP designed we can use PROSPER to perform some Calculation System
in order to analyze the well performance.
Enter a well head pressure of 100 psig, water cut of 30% and click Continue.
In the sensitivity variable section select for variable 1 the "Pump speed" and enter
values ranging from 100 to 200 rpm as shown in the next screen shot:
The solution of the system can be check on the right hand side and scrolling up and
down by clicking on the little arrows next to the Pump Speed (top right hand side) the
different solutions can be seen.
Click Plot
In the case of a PCP well the solution node is located at the discharge of the pump.
Therefore to inspect the solution of the system we should at the intersection of the
VLP and Pump discharge pressure.
In this plot we can see that in order to achieve the target liquid rate the pump speed
should be close to 170 rpm.
Black oil modelling is a technique that works back from values of density and GOR
measured at known surface conditions to predict properties at other points in the
system and the technique is fast and accurate when applicable. The black oil
condensate model is preferential to use as the computational time is significantly
faster than using an EOS PVT approach. The matched EOS can be used to validate
the black oil condensate model.
The use of Volume Shift as an EOS match parameter will inevitably cause mass
balance errors in the EOS if used for multiple temperature and pressures (like a
pressure gradient calculation) and will adversely impact the results in PROSPER.
Objectives
16.1.15.1
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/condvalid.out
Model Set Up
16.1.15.2
Begin by opening the above PROSPER file and from the main menu select PVT |
Input Data to access the PVT section or double click in the PVT window section of
the main PROSPER interface.
A matched EOS can be passed to PROSPER via the ImportPRP button, from PVTP
for example.
PROSPER will use the EOS data to generate condensate black oil model data.
Select Generate to activate the EOS Calculation Range dialogue:
The temperature corresponds to the reservoir temperature and the pressure values
range from initial reservoir to depleted reservoir conditions.
The saturation pressure shown in the figure above is the dew point pressure
required for the black oil model.
Select OK | OK | Properties to generate the black oil fluid properties from the EOS
flashed through the separator stages down to standard conditions. At this point we
have all the properties to build a black oil fluid model:
From the main PROSPER menu select Calculation | Gradient Traverse and input
the values as shown below.
No sensitivity variables will be used in the calculation and the Petroleum Experts 4
mechanistic model will be used.
Record a fewcalculated measured depth vs. pressure values from the gradient
traverse calculated tabular data:
Enter them in the gradient traverse plot Test Data section (Figure A15-6) found on
the gradient plot main menu bar
The gradient traverse plot will now look like the following:
From the Options menu select the black oil fluid model options then enter the
previously calculated black oil data in the PVT section.
Repeat the gradient calculation and plot the data to see if the EOS test points are
still valid using the gas condensate black oil model:
Zooming in to investigate the off-set gradient point shows that the error is
approximately 60 psig (1.2 % difference) indicating that for this case the black-oil
condensate model is valid with the EOS gradient predictions.
Given the data listed below, it is intended to install a sucker rod pump in the well
SRP#1.
The aim is to produce at least 200 stb of liquid per day with the pump installation.
You are supposed to design a Sucker Rod Pumping system for the well and assess
the impact of the pump speed on the well performance.
PVT Data
Deviation Survey
Geothermal Gradient
Step-by-step approach
Note that the Sucker Rod Pump option has been selected as Artificial lift method.
Select |Done to proceed to the next step.
Step 4: You select |Done|Regression and Match All and this is what you would get:
Now you select |Done|Done and save the file to preserve all changes made so far.
Step 5: You select |System|Equipment|All|Edit and this takes to the deviation survey
screen:
You select |Done and |Cancel to move to the down hole equipment description
screen. Here the following entries need to be made:
Step 6: You enter the geothermal gradient and the overall heat transfer coefficient
as below:
Note that the default Inflow model is PI Entry. It is the first choice in the list of IPR
model. This is why there is no need to make a selection for the reservoir model
here.
To complete the IPR data entry, select |Input Data and enter the well productivity
index of 0.25 stb/d/psi:
Step 8: To proceed with the pump design, select |Design|Sucker Rod Pump an
enter the following input data:
Step 9: To proceed with the design, select |Calculate and the program computes
and displays the rod load plot, the torque plot and the rod speed as below:
Note that one can here sensitize on different rods. For this, select |Rod
Sensitity|Calculate and this is what can be seen:
Now select |Done|Done and save the file to secure the changes made so far.
You select |Done and |File|Save |Yes to secure all changes made so far.
You select | Continue, select the desired variable (here, Pumping Speeed) and then
enter the desired values of 6 and 8 spm as below
These examples shows that the installed pump can produce 260 stb/d at a speed of
8 spm.
The rate would be reduced to 225 stb/d if the pumping speed is decreased to 6
spm.
This example consist of a gas lifted well, several well test that has been carried out
through time are available.
Analyze different well test using the VLP/IPR matching section and the Quicklook
section.
Identify and troubleshoot inconsistencies between the model and the
assumptions/data.
Update the model accordingly
From the main menu, click File New to reinitialize the program input and output files.
Open the file Gasliftedwell.out located in the Sample folder.
Let's perform a quick review of the model to familiarize ourselves with this specific
system.
This is a an horizontal well assisted with gas lift, let's inspect the different sections of
the model:
PVT
The PVT is described using black oil correlations (Glaso and Beal) and there is no
match data available.
We can use the PVT calculator to estimate the bubble point pressure at the reservoir
temperature, in this case the bubble point pressure is 2241psig.
- Deviation Survey
IPR
The IPR is modeled using the Horizontal well Dp friction loss in wellbore model with
an horizontal well length of 2870 ft.
The initial reservoir pressure was 2498 psig in January 2001 and it has been
declining since then.
From the main menu click under Matching | Matching | VLP/IPR (Quality Check).
In this section 4 well test were entered for different periods since January 2001 to
November 2002.
There is a column to enter the reservoir pressure and we can see that is declining
from the initial value 2498 psig to 2305 psig for the last well test.
To analyze the well test we will use a the Correlation comparison and Quicklook
options.
- Correlation Comparison
Select the first well test by clicking on the row number 1 (left hand side).
- Fancher Brown (No slip correlation that will calculate the minimum pressure drop)
- Duns Ros Modified (This correlation will over-predict the pressure drops in an oil
The above mentioned correlations are used as Quality Check/Quality control. If the
measured test point lies outside of the above correlations that indicates some
inconsistency in the data.
The 3rd correlation selected is Petroleum Experts 2 that was given good results for
the wells in this field.
Clicking on Calculate | Plot will display the gradients (Pressure vs depth) for the
selected well test for the 3 correlations. From this plot we can see that the test point
(blue square) lies between the quality check correlations (green and red curve) and it
is quite close to blue curve (Petroleum Experts 2 correlation).
- QuickLook
Another way of analyzing the test point is by using the QuickLook section.
The Quicklook consist of two gradients, the green curve correspond to the upward
gradient which start at the flowing bottom hole pressure which is derive from the IPR
section using the well test rate.
The blue curve is a downward gradient which starts at the well head pressure of the
well test. If all the assumptions in the model and data entered are correct these two
gradients should be overlaying one on the top of each other. If there is an
inconsistency in the model then the gradients will be separated.
In this case the two gradient are on the top of each other and the data seems to be
consistent, square symbol represents the gauge pressure which is also consistent
with the gradients.
Selecting test point #3 and performing a correlation comparison we can see that the
test point lies between the Quality Check correlations.
However the test point is deviating from the correlation that was giving good result in
the previous test points.
Analyzing test point number 3 in the QuickLook section we can see that Upward
gradient and Downward gradient are not overlaying. That indicates an inconsistency
in the data or in the assumptions of the model.
The square (Gauge pressure) is over the green curve (upward gradient) therefore
something should be corrected that can modify the blue curve (downward gradient).
To make the downward (blue curve) gradient to shift to the right to meet the upward
gradient (green curve) the modification should cause a higher pressure drop.
There are lot of variables that affect the pressure drop, let's assume that the PVT,
down-hole equipment description and measured values from the well test are
correct.
We can think that the we are really injecting a lower amount of gas lift, this will
increase the production fluid density causing a higher pressure drop in the well which
can displace the downward gradient to the right. Another possibility is that we are
actually injecting higher up in the well in one of the unloading valves. Let's analyze
In the QuickLook section we can modified the assumed Injection depth to the last
unloading valve. (Tip: clicking on Valves button will display the depths of all the
unloading Valves).
We can see that with the assumption of injecting the gas at 5672 ft rather than 7763
ft the Quicklook match.
The QuickLook tool can help us to diagnoses if the well have a problem and we can
try to identify the source of the problem.
Note: The casing pressure is not transferred, therefore the correspondent value
should be entered by hand if necessary. (In this example the Casing pressure is left
constant).
In the VLP/IPR section the gas lift gas injection depth for test point #3 should be
updated as shown in the next screen shot.
Performing a correlation comparison with the corrected gas lift injection depth the
test point lies over the Petroleum Experts 2 multiphase flow correlation.
Another well test is carried out at the end of the month (Well test #4) to confirm the
production loss due to injecting gas lift gas higher up in the well.
Following the same procedure we can check that for Test point#4 the gas lift gas
injection depth is also 5672 ft (last unloading valve) rather than the firstly assumed
value 7763 ft (operating injection depth).
Using the VLP/IPR matching menu and performing Correlation comparisons and
Quicklook analysis we have determine that in the last two test points the gas lift gas
was being injected in the last unloading valve located at 5672 ft instead of injecting
in the operating valve located at 7763 ft.
Now we have corrected our mathematical model by modifying the gas lift injection
depth to the "true injection depth" and it is representing the reality that we have in
the field.
We the updated model it could be useful to know how much oil we could increase if
we restore the situation with a slick line operation.
- Gas lift gas injection rate with a value similar to the last test point
- Injection depth with values of 5672 ft (last unloading valve) and 7763 ft (operating
valve).
From the results we can see that 330 stb/day can be increase if the gas lift is
injected at the deepest operating valve instead of injecting at the unloading valve.
Based on this analysis this well can be included in the "intervention list" for slick line
operations.
Another calculation that we might perform is sensitivity analysis to the gas lift gas
injection rate (we can add a range of gas lift injected as shown in the next screen
shot). This can determine the optimum gas lift gas injection rate for the well for a fix
well head pressure.
In this plot we can see the Liquid rate vs the gas lift injected for two curves (Injecting
at 7763ft and injecting at 5672 ft).
This can determine the optimum gas injection rate and the difference between
injecting in the operating point or injecting in the last unloading valve.
16.2 B - References
16.2.1 PVT Calculations
16.2.1.1CO2 Injection
The best approach to model CO2 Injection is to use fluid type "Retrograde Condensate" and not "Dry
And Wet Gas". The reason behind this is that the "Dry And Wet Gas" models considers the fluid as a
single phase throughout the entire system and modifies the gas properties to account for the
condensate. The "Retrograde Condensate" model assumes multiphase flow modelling allowing for gas
and/or liquid phases to be present anywhere in the system (depending on the prevailing pressure and
temperature).
N.B. In CO2 Injection, depending on the conditions of pressure and temperature, it is possible to have
phase changes somewhere in the system (Gas-.Liquid->Gas)
The Gray (and Modified Gray) correlation uses its own internal PVT calculator that overrides the
Prosper-calculated pvt properties and therefore this should not be used to model CO2 Injection.
The objective is to obtain the properties of the Well stream gas from the separated gas, tank vented
gas and condensate. (Please see next diagram).
The ideal way to do this is to perform a compositional analysis where the composition of the gas
separated, condensate and the gas vented are known. Then these fluids are recombined to get the
well stream composition and properties.
However most of time the compositions are unknown, and also the quantity and gas specific gravity of
the stock tank gas vented are often not measured.
In those cases, correlations can be used to calculate the gas specific gravity and the GE (Gas
equivalent) or VEQ (volume equivalent).
The VEQ or GE represents the volume of gas vented in the tank plus the volume in scf that would be
occupied by a barrel of stock-tank liquid if it were gas.
PROSPER is using a correlation that depends on the separator pressure to calculate the GE.
The GE is added to the gas rate and used to calculate the pressure losses in the tubing using the
energy balance equation.
In fact from the diagram above we can see the separator pressure dependency, for instance if the
separator pressure is 0 psig, the tank vented gas will be zero, if the separator pressure is higher then
more gas will pass in solution with the liquid towards the tank. So the separator pressure has an
impact on GE.
Other correlations of GE available in the literature that depends on the separator pressure can be
found in the following references: An Improved method for the determination of the Reservoir gas
specific gravity for retrograde gases Gold et.al., also the in the book The properties of Petroleum
Fluids W. McCain (Chapter 7: Properties of Wet Gases) explains and show some these correlations
available.
5 Jones L.G., 'Use of Short Term Multiple Rate Flow SPE 6133 SPE ATCE, New
Blount, E.M. et al Tests to Predict Performance of Wells Orleans, Oct. 3-6.
Having Turbulence,'
6 Vogel J.V. 'Inflow Performance Relationships for JPT (Jan. 1968), 83-92.
Solution Gas Drive Wells,'
7 Houz, O.P., 'Infinite Conductivity Vertical Fracture in a SPE 12778 SPE Regional
Horne, R. & Reservoir with Double Porosity Behaviour' Meeting, Long Beach,
Ramey, H.J. Jr. California, April 11-13, 1984.
8 Karakas, M. & 'Semi-Analytical Productivity Models for SPE 18271 SPE ATCE,
Tariq, S. Perforated Completion' Houston, Texas, Oct. 2-5,
1988.
9 Dikken, B.J. 'Pressure Drop in Horizontal Wells and its Journal of Petroleum
Effect on Their Production Performance' Technology, November, 1990;
Trans., AIME, 289.
10 Chaperon, I. 'Theoretical Study of Coning Towards SPE 15377 SPE ATCE, New
Horizontal and Vertical Wells in Orleans, Oct. 5-8.
Anisotropic Formations'
11 Goode, P.A. & 'Inflow Performance of Partially Open SPE 19341 1989 SPE Eastern
Wilkinson, D.J. Horizontal Wells' Region Meeting, Morgantown,
WV, Oct. 24-27. Also JPT,
August 1991, pp 983-985.
12 Papazatacos, P., 'Cone Breakthrough Time for Horizontal SPE 19822 SPE ATCE, San
Herring, T.R., Wells' Antonio, Texas, Oct. 8-11.
Martinsen, R. &
Skjaeveland, S.M.
13 Cinco-Ley, H., 'Transient Pressure Behaviour For a Well SPE 6014 SPE ATCE, New
Samanieogo, F. & With a Finite-Conductivity vertical Orleans, Louisiana, Oct 3-6
Dominguez, N. Fracture ' 1976
14 Mavor, M.J. & 'Transient Pressure Behaviour of SPE 7977 California Regional
Cinco Ley, H Naturally Fractured Reservoirs' Meeting SPE, Ventura,
California, April 1979
15 Wong, D., 'Application of the Pressure Derivative SPE 13056 SPE ATCE,
Harrington, A. & Function in th Pressure Transient testing Houston, Texas, Sept. 16-19,
Cinco Ley, H of Fractured Wells' 1984
16 Warren, J.E. & 'The behaviour of Naturally Fractured SPE 426, SPEJ (Spet 1963),
Root, P.J. Reservoirs' 245-255
17 Hegre, T.T. & 'Productivity of Multifractured Horizontal SPE 28845 SPE European
Larsen, L. Wells' Petroleum Conference,
London, UK, October 1994
18 Urbanczyk, C.H, & 'Optimization of Well Rates under Gas SPE Advanced Technology
Wattenbarger, Coning Conditions.' Series, Vol. 2, No. 2, April
R.A 1994.
19 Larsen, L. 'Productivity Evaluations of Wells in Long
Rectangular Drainage Areas.'
20 H. Cinco, F. G. 'Unsteady-State Pressure Distribution SPE 5131
Miller, H. J. Ramey, Created by A Directionally Drilled Well'
Jr.
2. Ashford, F.E, and Pierce, P.E.: The Determination of Multiphase Pressure Drops
and Flow Capacities in Downhole Safety Valves (Storm Chokes), paper SPE 5161
presented at the 1974 SPE Annual Fall Meeting, Houston Oct. 6-9.
3. Beggs, H.D. and Brill, J.P.: A Study of Two Phase Flow in Inclined Pipe, JPT (May
1973), 606-617.
from a Horizontal Cylinder, International Journal Heat Mass Transfer (1975) 18,
1049-1053.
5. Fancher, and Brown, G.G.: Prediction of Pressure Gradients for Multiphase Flow in
Tubing, SPE Journal (Mar. 1963), 59-64.
6. Fortunati, Two Phase Flow Through Well-head Chokes, paper SPE 3742
presented at 1972 SPE European Spring Meeting, Amsterdam, May 17-18.
8. Mandhane et al, A Flow Pattern Map for Gas-liquid Flow in Horizontal Pipes,
International Journal Multiphase Flow, 1, 537-541.
9. Moody, Friction Factor for Pipe Flow, Trans., AIME (1944), 66, 671-675.
10. Mukherjee, H. and Brill, J.P.: Liquid Holdup Correlations for Inclined Two-Phase
Flow, JPT (May 1983), 1003-1008.
11. Oranje, Condensate Behaviour in Gas Pipeline is Predictable, Oil and Gas Journal
(July 1973), 39-43.
12. Orkiszewski, Predicting Two Phase Pressure Drop in Vertical Pipes, JPT (June
1967), 829-833.
13. Duns, H. Jr and Ros, N.C.J.: Vertical Flow of Gas and Liquid Mixtures in Wells,
Proc., Sixth World Petroleum Congress, Frankfurt (1963) 451.
14. Tansev, E. Startzman, R.A. and Cooper, A.M.: Predicting Pressure Loss and Heat
Transfer in Geothermal Wellbores, paper SPE 5584 presented at the 1975 SPE
Annual Fall Meeting, Dallas, Sept. 28-Oct. 1.
15. Gould, T.L, Tek, M.R. and Katz, D.L.: Two-Phase Flow Through Vertical, Inclined,
or Curved Pipe, JPT, August, 1974, 915-925.
1 Chiu, K. and 'Modeling of Wellbore Heat Losses in SPE 22870 1991 SPE Annual Fall
Thakur, S.C. Directional Wells Under Changing Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 517 -
Injection Conditions,' 528.
2 Hasan, A.R. 'Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow SPE 22866 1991 SPE Annual Fall
and Kabir, in Wellbores: Part I - Formation Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 469 -
C.S. Temperature,' 478.
3 Hasan, A.R. 'Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow SPE 22948 1991 SPE Annual Fall
and Kabir, in Wellbores: Part II - Wellbore Fluid Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 695 -
C.S. Temperature,' 708.
1 Gibbs 'Predicting the Behavior of SPE 588 SPE Rocky Mountain Regional
S.G. Sucker-Rod Pumping Systems' Meeting, May 27-28, 1963, in Denver, Colorado,
769-788.
2 Schmidt 'System Analysis for Sucker-Rod SPE 15426 SPE ATCE, October 5-8, 1986, in
Z., Doty Pumping' New Orleans, Louisiana, 125-130.
D.R.
3 Gibbs 'Computer Diagnosis of SPE 1165 SPE Annual Fall Meeting, October
S.G., Down-Hole Conditions in Sucker 3-6, 1965, in Denver, Colorado, 91-98.
Neely Rod Pumping Wells'
A.B.
4 Patton 'A Computer Technique for SPE 1986 SPE 38th California Regional
L.D. Analyzing Pumping Well Meeting, October 26-27, 1967, in Los Angeles,
Performance' California, 243-249.
5 Jennings 'Design of Sucker-Rod Pump SPE 20152 Petroleum Technology in the Second
J.W. Systems' Century, October 16-19, 1989, in Socorro, New
Mexico, 77-87.
6 Gibbs 'A Review of Methods for Design SPE 9980, December 1982, 2931-2942.
S.G. and Analysis of Rod Pumping
Installations'
16.3 C - Equations
16.3.1 Black Oil Model for Condensate
PSEP
TSEP
ggtot TANK
g gsep g gtnk
GOR sep GOR tnk
Known Parameters:
This expression thus gives, the average gas gravity of a mixture, which
has a condensate to gas ratio of CGR STB/SCF, with the gas having a
gas gravity of ggt and the condensate having a specific gravity of c and
molecular weight of Mc.
This also can be used to work out the condensate to gas ratio of a
mixture gas if the gas gravity is known as shown in the following
equation.
Based on this formulation based on the separator gas gravity and the average total
gas gravity, the effective CGR vaporised in separator gas is estimated as follows
g g sep - g g tot
CGR sep =
4588 .3 g c - 132904 g g sep g c /M c
Also assuming that the condensate is above dew point, the initial CGR under
reservoir conditions is,
1
CGR res =
Rsep + Rtnk
At Separator Conditions:
g g sep - g g tot
CGR sep =
4588 .3 g csc - 132904 g g sep g csc /M c
NOTE:
where
Pmin being the maximum liquid dropout pressure and a function of the dewpoint
pressure.
i.e.
Pmin = F (Pdewpoint )
Pdew is an input to the model.
The vaporised CGR curve as a function of pressure looks as below:
comp
f
P 1
Pdew
16.3.1.3Estimation of CGRmin
7.08
f = 0.15 + + 1.45 * % Condensate
TRES - 161
(From Eilerts et al)
Bg
CGR min = CGR res - Lmax
561 .5 Bo
Where
Lmax is the maximum liquid dropout percentage.
Thus we need to estimate Bo and Bg to find CGRmin from the following equation
=
CGR res - Lmax B g
CGR min
561 .5 Bo
k P
q o = 2prh o *
m o r
k g P
q g = 2prh *
m
g r
k P
q w = 2prh w *
w r
m
Total Mass Flow Rate:
k kg k P
m r = 2prh r o o + r g + rw w
mo mg mw r
ko kg k P
r
r r o + rg + rw w = rf
r mo mg mw r
t
1 and 2 .....................3
By Definition:
Equation 3 becomes:
ro rg r P _
P
r k o + kg + kw w = rf r c
r mo mg
m w r t
To Linearise this Equation:
p
ko rg r
m( p ) = r o
mo
+ kg
mg
+ k w w P
m w
0
p
k o k g mo k m
= m r + r g + w o r w P
o k m ko m w
0 o o g
p
ko q q
= r o + g r g + w r w P
0
mo qo qo
p
ko GOR out B g WOR out Bw
= r o + rg + r w P
0
mo Bo Bo
Combining we get:
m( p ) rf r c m o m( p )
r ko = *
r r F t
Where
GOR out Bg WOR out Bw
F = ro + rg + rw
Bo Bo
2 m( p ) 1 m( p ) _
m m( p )
2
+ =fc o
r r r Bo t
So ro + S g r g + S w r w
C = c
F
For Condensates:
2 m( p ) 1 m( p ) m g m( p )
+ = fc
r 2 r r kg t
So ro + S g rg + S w r w
C=c
Fg
Bo CGR out B WGR
Fg = ro + r g + w rw
Bg Bg
Where:
Ta1 = Ambient temperature at L1
T1 = Fluid temperature at entry
T(x) = Fluid temperature at current location
q = Deviation angle
= Fluid mass flow rate
This value is used to calculate heat loss in surface or downhole pipe work This should not be confused
with the thermal conductivity for a particular type of pipe. The overall heat transfer coefficient accounts
for the heat flow through the pipe, annulus (in a well) and insulation (if present) to the surroundings.
Heat transfer by forced and free convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in the
value of the overall heat transfer coefficient. Insulated buried flowlines can have heat transfer
coefficients as low as 0.1 (BTU/hr/F/ft2) whereas uninsulated, unburied flowlines can be higher than
100. Typical values for individual flowlines are :-
1.0 Buried Carbon Steel Flowlines
16.0 Unburied Carbon Steel Flowlines
18.0 Carbon Steel Risers in Water
5.6 Carbon Steel Risers in Air
2.8 Flexible Pipe in Water
The overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) used to determine the heat exchange in the Surface
Equipment (Xmas Tree to Manifold) is entered in the Surface Equipment section of the Equipment
Data input area.
The overall heat transfer coefficient entered in the Geothermal Gradient section is the one used to
determine the heat exchange in the Downhole Equipment (Xmas Tree downward).
The U values entered in the two sections mentioned above will be used throughout the model when
running a calculation like System, Gradient, VLP calculation, or also the VLP matching itself.
During the VLP/IPR matching process the U value can be tuned in order to match the observed
temperature profile (using the feature Estimate U value in the VLP/IPR matching screen).
The values of the heat transfer coefficient above reported are the ones that we suggest to use as
starting point during the temperature matching process, as we found out that in many cases they are
not too far from the actual values.
Please, note that the heat transfer coefficient, which accounts at the same time for the different
mechanisms of heat transfer, may have very different values, depending on all the factors affecting
the heat transfer (the packer fluid, fluid characteristics, flow regime, type of completion, materials
used, thickness of tubing and casing etc.).
Again, if a measurement of wellhead temperature is available along with the well test, it is possible to
get the correct estimation of the U value.The overall heat transfer coefficient is referenced to the
pipe inside diameter
16.3.3.2Enthalpy Balance
Enthalpy Balance temperature model in PROSPER applies the general energy
equation for flowing fluid:
In terms of Enthalpy
this is written:
In other terms:
If heat transfer with the surroundings (Q) is neglected, the usual pressure equation
solved in multiphase flow results. PROSPER solves the general energy equation by
considering the enthalpy balance across an incremental length of pipe. The
enthalpy term includes the effects of pressure (including Joule-Thomson effect) and
phase changes.
The algorithm commences by calculating the enthalpy
at the known pressure and temperature of the first
calculation node. i.e. H1 at (T1,P1)
Where
dt
P2 = P1 - GDL ; T2 = T1 - DL
dz
to give the first estimate of H2
The total heat transfer coefficient is estimated for the T, P of the iteration step to
calculate the heat exchanged. Using the energy equation, we can find dh. If dh
does not equal H2-H1, the iteration continues until convergence. The Enthalpy
Balance method solves the energy equation simultaneously for both temperature
and pressure. The solution temperature at the downstream side of the pipe
increment is therefore the value of T2 when the iteration has converged.
The heat transfer coefficient is used to calculate dQ within the enthalpy balance
iterations and not the temperature.
The heat transfer coefficient is itself a function of the temperature of both the fluid
and the surroundings; therefore iteration is required to find both the heat transfer
coefficient and the enthalpy balance. The formation is a thermal sink at temperature
Te. The temperature profile near the wellbore is dependent upon producing time and
the thermal diffusivity of the formation. The heat diffusivity equation accounts for
localised heating (or cooling) of the formation by the well fluids.
Where: is the temperature difference between the fluid and the formation at
infinity.
is the effective thermal conductivity of the formation (including allowance for well
fluids in porous formations)
For intermediate times, PROSPER uses a fit of the TD vs tD generated using the
exact solution. At later times a logarithmic approximation is used:
This formulation approximates the exact solution with less than 1% error. (From
Kwan-Chu and Subash Thakur).
is the overall heat transfer coefficient.
The overall heat transfer coefficient takes into account forced convection inside the
pipe and free convection outside the pipe plus radiation and conduction.
Conduction
Forced Convection
Free Convection
and Radiation
Now, let us examine the components of the overall heat loss coefficient individually:
H2
H1
rti H1 P1 , T1
rto
rci
rco
rcem
Similar expressions are used for each casing string and each term combined to find
the total conductivity term .
Cp Conductivity
BTU/lb/deg F BTU/hr/ft/deg F
Water (Low salinity) 1.0 0.35
Water (High Salinity) 1.02 0.345
Heavy Oil 1.04 0.34
Medium Oil 0.49 0.083
Light Oil 0.5 0.0815
Gas 0.26 0.0215
The dry rock properties are modified to wet rock properties using the in-situ porosity, permeability and
rock consistency.
Downhole Equipment
Conduction Emmissivity
Heat Transfer
Coefficient
BTU/ft/hr/deg
F
Mild Steel Tubing 26 0.65
Plactic Coated Tubing 20 0.65
Stainless Steel (13%) 18 0.4
Stainless Steel (15%) 15 0.3
Line Pipe 27 0.9
Plactic Coated Pipe 20 0.9
Flexible 0.3 0.95
Bitumen 0.6 0.95
Foam 0.02 0.8
Concrete 0.1 0.9
From Bernoulli:
In the throat, the maximum velocity is the speed of sound. Under critical conditions,
the choke becomes independant of the downstream pressure and temperature.
Vms : 2 phase sound velocity from FORTUNATI, Vms will be much lower than the
velocity of either phase. Critical conditions are reached at much lower velocities.
- For deviated wells, the Beggs and Brill hold up correction is used.
- To determine interfacial tension, the Parachor technique is used.
- Petroleum Experts correlation uses the Gould et al Flow Map and for the various
flow regimes we use the following:
In bounded reservoirs 1
2 4.86
31.6
1
2.07
30.9 2
1
4 2.72
31.6
1
4 0.232
27.6
1
4 0.115
60 27.1
1
3 21.9 3.39
1
1 1
22.6 3.13
2 2
1 1
5.38 0.607
4 2
1 1
5 2.36 0.111
2
4
3 0.098
12.9
In water-drive reservoirs
4.57 19.1
1 In reservoirs of unknown
10.8 production character
2 25
16.5.1 Introduction
This appendix contains examples of some file formats used by PROSPER. For
further details and advice regarding interfacing PROSPER with other applications,
please contact Petroleum Experts Limited customer support.
*
* UNITS for the imported PVT variables must be defined in field units
*
* TABLE IDENTIFIER RECORD
*
* N LINES TEMP BP
*
* N - Table Number
* LINES - Number of lines in the table (max 15)
1 3 100 1300
1.21 453 .99 46 2000
1.31 454 .98 47 2010
1.41 455 .97 49 2020
2 3 200 1310
2.21 553 .89 56 3000
2.31 554 .88 57 3010
2.41 555 .87 59 3020
3 3 300 1390
3.21 653 .79 76 4000
3.31 654 .78 77 4010
3.41 655 .77 79 4020
4 3 400 1400
4.21 753 .69 86 5000
4.31 754 .68 87 5010
4.41 755 .67 89 5020
5 3 500 1800
5.21 853 .59 96 6000
5.31 854 .58 97 6010
5.41 855 .57 99 6020
Note:
Import table units must be defined in field units. Once the data has been imported
the PROSPER units system can be used to display the values in any desired units.
16.5.4 IPR
*
* This is an example IPR input file
*
The format is pressure, rate, curve value
*
The numbers can be space, tab or comma delimited
* Up to twenty points per curve, up to five curves
*
*Blank lines or lines with an asterisk (*) in the first
* column are ingored.
*
0 5000 1000
1000 4000 1000
2000 3000 1000
3000 2000 1000
4000 1000 1000
5000 0 1000
*
* Next curve
*
0 3000 2000
1000 2000 2000
2000 1000 2000
3000 0 2000
****************************
****************************
****************************
*** CENTRILIFT PUMPS ***
****************************
****************************
****************************
Reda
2 3450. 60.0
*Series OD
456 4.56
*amps
6.53822E-01 -1.34128E+00 8.86349E-01 -1.06114E-01 5.61883E-01 3.43896E-01 *
*rpm
-6.24718E+01 2.04999E+02 -3.03911E+02 1.45552E+02 -1.15803E+02 3.58291E+03 *
*efficiency
-5.57129E-01 1.60591E+00 -7.30540E-01 -1.98693E+00 2.49918E+00 1.91886E-03 *
* power factor
-5.44220E-01 2.16557E+00 -2.81504E+00 7.11957E-01 1.04810E+00 2.49609E-01 *
*Series OD
540 5.4
*amps
-2.16508E-01 6.79101E-01 -5.79651E-01 3.59379E-01 5.24583E-01 2.26834E-01 *
*rpm
-2.14557E+01 8.55182E+01 -1.66122E+02 9.44086E+01 -1.44510E+02 3.58175E+03 *
*efficiency
3.67150E-01 -1.64327E+00 3.01018E+00 -3.02514E+00 1.72215E+00 4.17187E-01 *
* power factor
4.64765E-01 -2.48102E+00 5.12024E+00 -5.23541E+00 2.71560E+00 2.75835E-01 *
#1 Aluminium
0.33 95
#2 Aluminium
0.53 70
#4 Aluminium
0.84 55
#6 Aluminium
1.32 50
#8 Aluminium
2.08 50
#10 Aluminium
3.32 50
****************************
****************************
****************************
*** WEIR PUMPS ***
****************************
****************************
****************************
* Number of Settings
4
16.6 F - Glossary
Bottom Hole Flowing Pressure measured at the producing formation. Intake node pressure.
Pressure
Formation Gas-Oil Quantity of oil dissolved in 1 stock tank barrel of oil at prevailing pressure
Ratio and temperature. Solution GOR. See GOR Definitions
Formation Volume Volume occupied by 1 barrel of stock tank oil and its associated solution
Factor (Bo) gas at a given pressure and temperature.
Heat Transfer Coefficient describing the total resistance to heat loss from a producing
pipe to its surroundings. Includes heat loss by conduction, convection and
Coefficient (HTC)
radiation.
(Liquid holdup). Proportion of pipe area occupied by liquid. Equal to 1.0
Holdup
for single phase liquid and 0.0 for single phase gas.
A fictitious gas that obeys the equation of state PV=RT/m where V is
specific volume, T is absolute temperature, R is the universal gas constant
Ideal Gas
and m id the molecular weight. Real gases deviate from ideal behaviour at
atmospheric pressures.
A volume ratio that indicates the deviation of the actual volume from that
Compressibility which has been determined by the Ideal Gas Laws. The Compressibility
Factor is a multiplier
The relation between reservoir pressure, flowing bottom hole pressure and
Inflow Performance production rate. Can be calculated from reservoir properties (reservoir
Relationship (IPR) pressure, permeability, skin) or fitting an empirical relation to measured
pressures. See IPR Definition
Gas injected into a reservoir for pressure maintenance. Not to be
Injection Gas
confused with gas lift injection.
Slope of inflow performance relation for injection. Expressed as injection
Injectivity Index
volume per unit of injection pressure. (BBL/psi, Sm3/Bar).
Joule-Thomson
Coefficient
The value of depends on the specific gas, as well as the temperature and
pressure of the gas before expansion. For all real gases, it will equal zero
at some point called the inversion point and the Joule-Thomson
inversion temperature is the temperature where the coefficient changes
sign (i.e., where the coefficient equals zero).
In any gas expansion, the gas pressure decreases and thus the sign of dP
is always negative. The following table explains when the Joule-Thomson
effect cools or heats a real gas
If the gas then is since dP is dT must be so the gas
temperature
is
below the
always
inversion positive negative cools
negative
temperature
above the
always
inversion negative positive heats
negative
temperature
It should be noted that is always equal to zero for ideal gases (i.e., they
will neither heat nor cool upon being expanded at constant enthalpy).
Depth measured along the flow path from the depth reference to a point in
Measured Depth
the well.
A reference point in the well. A calculation node is inserted whenever there
Node
is a change of I.D., deviation angle or temperature gradient.
Permeability (commonly symbolized as , or k) is a measure of the ability
of a material (typically, a rock or unconsolidated material) to transmit fluids.
It is of great importance in determining the flow characteristics of
hydrocarbons in oil and gas reservoirs. The intrinsic permeability of any
porous material is:
k = C * d2
where
k is the intrinsic permeability
C is a dimensionless constant that is related to the configuration of the
flow-paths
d is the average, or effective pore diameter
Permeability needs to be measured, either directly (using Darcy's law) or
through estimation using empirically derived formulas.
A common unit for permeability is the darcy (D), or more commonly the
Permeability
millidarcy (mD) (1 darcy @10- 12m). Other units are cm and the SI m2.
Permeability is part of the proportionality constant in Darcy's law which
relates discharge (flow rate) and fluid physical properties (e.g. viscosity), to
a pressure gradient applied to the porous media. The proportionality
constant specifically for the flow of water through a porous media is the
hydraulic conductivity; permeability is a portion of this, and is a property of
the porous media only, not the fluid. In naturally occurring materials, it
ranges over many orders of magnitude. For a rock to be considered as an
exploitable hydrocarbon reservoir, its permeability must be greater than
approximately 100 mD (depending on the nature of the hydrocarbon - gas
reservoirs with lower permeabilities are still exploitable because of the
lower viscosity of gas with respect to oil). Rocks with permeabilities
significantly lower than 100 mD can form efficient seals. Unconsolidated
sands may have permeabilities of over 5000 mD.
Calculation of well pressure vs depth by integrating the pressure gradient
Pressure Traverse
for increments of pipe.
A homogeneous body of material which differs in its intensive properties
Phase
from that of its neighbouring phases. e.g. Gas, liquid.
Produced Gas/Oil Gas production divided by oil production. Includes gas in solution and any
free gas production. Excludes lift gas returned to surface with the
Ratio
produced fluids.
Measure of a well's ability to flow. Expressed in bbl/psi (Sm3/day / Bar) of
Productivity Index (PI)
drawdown. Applies above the bubble point.
Pseudo-Critical The Critical Pressure of a gas is defined as the saturation pressure at the
These conditions are usually 14.696 psiA and 60F, or 1 barA and 0C.
The rate of change in enthalpy with temperature. It may be measured at
Specific Heat or Heat
constant pressure or at constant volume. The values are different and are
Capacity
known as Cp and Cv, respectively.
The volume of a given weight of gas usually expressed as cubic feet per
Specific Volume
pound, or cubic meters per kilogram (cubic centimeters per gram).
The property of a substance which gauges the potential or driving force for
Temperature
the flow of heat.
Any gas or gas mixture in which one or more of the constituents is at its
Wet Gas saturated vapour pressure. The constituent at saturation pressure may or
may not be water vapour.
The energy transition and defined as force times distance. Work cannot be
Work
done unless there is motion.
Dimensionless Dimensionless fracture conductivity is a key design parameter in well
Fracture Conductivity stimulation that compares the capacity of the fracture to transmit fluids
(FCD) down the fracture and into the wellbore with the ability of the formation to
deliver fluid into the fracture.
The equations used in PVT are derived from Van der Waals Equation and in
common with it represent the total pressure as a summation of an attractive and a
repulsive element:
RT a
P= - 2
v-b v
where b represents the hard-sphere volume of the molecules and
a the intermolecular attraction.
RT a(T )
P= -
v - b v (v + b ) + b (v - b )
and,
2) the Soave-Redlich-Kwong(SRK)EoS:
RT a(T )
P= -
v - b v (v + b )
Z 3 - (1 - B) Z 2 + ( A - 3B 2 - 2 B) Z - ( AB - B 2 - B 3 ) = 0
and for SRK
Z 3 + Z 2 + ( A - B - B 2 ) Z - AB = 0
where
a(T ) P
A=
( RT ) 2
bP
B=
RT
and
bP
B=
RT
see also:
Binary Interaction Coefficients
Acentric Factors
Volume Shift
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
16.7.1.1Binary Coefficients
The cubic equations of state were originally developed for pure substances. With
time their use was extended to mixtures. This extension required some method of
introducing a measure of the polar and other interactions between pairs of dissimilar
molecules. The binary interaction coefficient was put forward.
This variable enters the calculation as a component in the intermolecular attraction
a.
For mixtures :
N N
a = xi x j aij
i =1 j =1
where
xi
and
xi
are mole fractions of components i and j, respectively and :
a = ai a j (1 - k ij )
k ij
is the binary interaction coefficient.
The attraction functions
ai
and
xi
represent the a(T) functions for each individual component. (see acentric factor
help)
Binary Interaction Coefficients represent a flexible way of molding the ideal Equation
of State to match the non-ideal reality of many mixtures.
The PVT package offers the user a variety of correlations for Binary Interaction
Coefficients as well as the opportunity to enter values manually.
This flexibility ,however, brings with it the problem of where to start when
characterizing a mixture. Hint on Binary Interaction Coefficients puts forward a
possible approach.
The manipulations of
k ij
are carried out within the BI Coefficient Dialog:
see also:
Equation of State
Volume Shift
Accentric Factors
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
16.7.1.2Accentric Factors
The acentric factor was put forward as a means of representing the non-sphericity
and polarity of many compounds. The original Equation of State PV=nRT was based
on a model of hard spheres which behaved in a classical and predictable fashion.
The vast majority of compounds are, unfortunately, far from ideal and far from
spherical. The acentric factor provides a number which can be used in the equation
of state to match predicted PVT behavior with reality.
To quote the authors in
Molecular Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria by J Prausnitz and R. D.
Lichtenthaler.
"Acentric Factors are arbitrary and chosen for convenience"
Based on deviation of some fluids from that predicted by what the corresponding
states theory suggests for simple fluids, Pitzer proposed an experimental method for
determining the acentric factor.
It had been observed for simple fluids that for simple fluids that the following
relationship held i.e..
As the Temperature (T) approached 7/10 of the critical temperature (Tc) the
measured saturation pressure(Ps) approached 1/10 of the critical pressure(Pc).
Ps 1
=
Pc 10 when
T 7
( = )
Tc 10
Pitzer's proposal was to use the logarithmic deviation from this relationship as a
measure of acentric factor
w
Ps
w - log 1 0( ) T / Tc =0.7 - 1.0
Pc
The acentric factor enters the equation of state as a component which describes the
change in the intermolecular attraction component with temperature a(T) .
The Peng Robinson Equation is
RT a(T )
P= -
v - b v (v + b ) + b (v - b )
with
R 2TC2
a(Tc ) = 0.45724( )
PC
and
a (TR , w ) is a function of the reduced temperature T/Tc and the acentric factor as
follows
a = (1 + b (1 - TR0.5 ) 2
w is an empirical quadratic or cubic of the acentric factor
At values of
w less than 0.49 the equation is quadratic:
b = 0.37464 + 1.54226w - 0.2699w 2
The estimation changes to a cubic at other values of
w :
b = 0.379642+ 1.485030w - 0.164423w 2 + 0.016666w 3
In addition the repulsive factor b within PR is given by:
RTC
b = 0.0778( )
PC
Soave Redlich Kwong varies from PR in the constants within the empirical functions
i.e..
R 2TC2
a(Tc ) = 0.427( )
PC
b = 0.480 + 1.54w - 0.176w 2
and
RTC
b = 0.08664( )
PC
Table 4.1 shows some typical acentric factors. Note that the value increases with the
size of the molecule and its polarity.
Ethane C2 0.099
Butane nC4 0.199
Hexane C6 0.299
Octane C8 0.398
Decane C10 0.489
see also:
Equation of State
Volume Shift
Binary Interaction Coefficients
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
16.7.1.3Volume Shift
Volume Shift arises from an inherent weakness in the 2 parameter(a and b)
Equations of State in estimating liquid densities.
The Peng Robinson variant is
RT a(T )
P= -
v - b v (v + b ) + b (v - b )
In the 3 parameter version
a is replaced by a corrected version
x2 where
v s = v + cv
c is the third parameter and is the sum of the individual
xi ci
N
c = xi ci
i =1
Since this correction is done after the flash equilibrium calculations, the component
K values,saturation pressure and phase envelope are not affected.
What is changed is the compressibility Z and anything derived from it i.e..
Density,GOR,FVF,Relative Volume etc.
The use of Volume Shift seems to be very attractive,since it corrects a known
problem.
However , there can be problems associated with such a powerful regression option.
This method can result in very significant errors as the fluid is transported through a
range of temperatures. This can result in such a significant material balance error
that a program such as Prosper becomes unuseable.
Volume shift within the Petroleum Experts IPM suite is based on a method from
see also:
Equation of State
Binary Interaction Coefficients
Accentric Factors
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
OmegaA and OmegaB
16.7.1.4OmegaA and OmegaB
Within the 2 most common Equations of State i.e.. Peng Robinson and Soave
Redlich Kwong OmegaA and OmegaB are empirically derived constants .
How these variables fit into the overall equation is given in the help on Acentric
Factors.
In the Peng Robinson(PR) equation the a(T) function at the critical point is given by
the empirical relationship
R 2TC2
a(Tc ) = 0.45724( )
PC
The constant 0.45724 is the OmegaA parameter.
In addition the repulsive factor b within PR is given by:
RTC
b = 0.0778( )
PC
The constant 0.0778 is the OmegaB parameter.
The equivalent values for the Soave Redlich Kwong(SRK) equation are 0.427 for
OmegaA and 0.08664 for OmegaB.
A methodology has developed within the industry to treat OmegaA and B as
variables for use within the matching process.
This is really an alternative to using individual components Tc and Pc properties.
One advantage of this approach is that it leaves measured properties such as the Tc
and Pc of methane untouched while giving additional parameters to match with.
This methodology is particularly important if a corresponding states model for
viscosity or thermal conductivity is to be used.
see also:
Equation of State
Binary Interaction Coefficients
Accentric Factors
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
16.7.2 LBC Viscosity Model
This model (ref 1) is probably the most commonly used for hydrocarbon mixtures. Is
is an adaptation of a model proposed by Jossi et al (ref 2). The main property used
is the component crtical volume. At the core of this model is a fourth-degree
polynomial in reduced density.
2 3 4
[(h - h*)x + 10-4 ]1 / 4 = a1 + a 2 r r + a3 r r + a 4 r r + a5 r r
where a1 = 0.10230
a2 = 0.023364
a3 = 0.05833
a4 = -0.040758
a5 = 0.0093324
h * is the low-pressure gas mixture viscosity and is determined by the method
proposed by Herning and Zippener
N N
* 1/ 2
h* = z h MWi
i i / z i MWi1 / 2
i =1 i =1
the individual component viscosities are given by the following expressions
* 1 0.9 4
h i = 34x10-5 Tri
xi for
Tri < 1.5
* 1
h i = 17.78x10-5 (4.58Tri - 1.67) 5 / 8
xi for
Tri > 1.5
g 2 is the component viscosity-reducing parameter.
For a mixture this variable is determined as follows:
1/ 6 -1 / 2 -2 / 3
N N N
x = z i Tci i z MWi i ci
z P
i =1 i =1 i =1
g 2 in equation 1 is the mixture density divided by the critical density of the mixture.
r
rr =
rc
The variation introduced by Lohrenz et al was in the calculation of the critical
density.
This variable was rewritten in terms of the critical volumes of the mixture
components.
-1
1 N
rc = = ( z iVci ) + z c 7 +VcC7 +
Vc i =1
i C 7 +
The origins of the LBC model lies in gases rather than liquids. Its dependence on the
density term causes inaccuracies with viscous fluids.
References
1) Lohrenz,J.,Bray,B.G., and Clark, C. R.," Calculating Viscosities of Reservoir Fluids
from Their Compositions",J.Pet.Technol.,Oct.1964,pp 1171-1176
2) Jossi,J.A.,Stiel,L.I.,and Thodos,G.,"The Viscosity of Pure Substances in the
Dense Gaseous and Liquid Phases",AIChE J.,8,1962,pp 59-63
see also:
Equation of State
Binary Interaction Coefficients
Accentric Factors
Interfacial Tension
Ml and Mg are the molecular weight of the gas and liquid at equilibrium. P x and y
are the component parachors, liquid and gas mole fractions respectively.
Reference:
Weinaug, C.F. and Katz,D.L.:- "Surface Tension of Methane-Propane Mixtures," Ind.
Eng. Chem. (1943) 35,239-242
16.7.4 Hydrate Modelling
Hydrate calculations are included within the Phase Envelope calculation and as a
warning within IPM.
See
Background to Hydrates
Hydrate Models
Hydrate Inhibition
Hydrate Reference List
16.7.4.1Background to Hydrates
This help is not intended to be a comprehensive guide to the subject of hydrates.
A detailed explanation of hydrates is available in references 1-4 of the Hydrate
Reference List.
Gas Hydrates are solid meta-stable compounds which form at higher temperatures
than that expected for pure water ice.
Gas hydrates can be referred to as compounds because they have a fixed
composition.
However, a hydrate is a particular type of compound which derives its formation not
from covalent bonds but from weak van der Waals attraction forces.
Within a hydrate, water molecules form a cage with spaces(cavities). If a gas
molecule is of the right size it can occupy a cavity and weakly bond to the
surrounding water molecules.
This bonding makes the overall energy of the hydrate lower than that for the
molecules in non-hydrate form and acts as the thermodynamic driving force for
hydrate formation.
The compounds formed by this type of loose entrapment are termed Clathrates.
Water has been identified as forming three types of hydrates VIZ. I ,II and H (ref.1,2)
For the purposes of this program we will consider only the more common I and II
forms.
The differences between the two structures derive from the number of molecules
which make up a single unit.
Both types of hydrate contain a variety of small and large cavities.
The number and size distribution of the cavities within a hydrate determines the
types and amount of gas molecules which can be held.
Not all cavities need to be filled to form a stable hydrate.
Typical of the data supplied for the two hydrate types:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------
With a small number of potential guests and two possible structures, the calculation
of hydrate formation can be dealt with by the application of statistical mechanics (van
der Waals and Platteeuw ref. 5)
Estimating hydrate formation is explained in more detail in Hydrate Modelling.
Inhibitors
Since hydrate formation is can be an expensive process problem ,much work has
been carried out to engineer its reduction or prevention.
pure water (state 1) -> empty hydrate lattice(state 2) -> filled hydrate lattice(state H)
State 2 is really hypothetical , only being used to make the calculation practical.
Written in terms of chemical potentials the transition becomes.
m H - m1 = ( m H - m 2 ) + ( m 2 - m1 )
The
m H - m1 term represents the gain from adsorption of the gas molecules.
It is this difference that is a measure of the weak van der Waals forces which are
giving the energy advantage to forming the structure.
The estimation of this term is treated as a statistical gas adsorption problem and the
varying aproaches to its solution make up the majority of the differences between the
model options (see Hydrate Formation Pressure and Minimum Inhibitor
Concentration).
The difference between the chemical potential of pure water and the filled hydrate is
given by
m H - m1 = - RT nci ln(1 - y ji )
i j
where
nci
is the number of cavities of type i
and
y ji
is the probability that cavity of type i is occupied by gas molecule of type j (see
table in Background to Hydrates).
C ji f j
y ji =
(1 + Cki f k )
k
where
fj
and
fk
are the fugacities forgas molecule j and k calculted by the Equation of State
Model.
nci
is a temperature-dependent Langmuir adsorption constant whose value is
calculated differently for the various models.
The
C ji
term is commonly determined using the Lennard-Jones-Devonshire spherical
cell model.(ref 1).
This model requires an estimation of the potential function describing the interaction
of guest molecules and the water molecules at any distance r within the cage.
The lower the potential , the higher is the probability of finding a guest gas molecule
at this position. Of the alternative methods for calculating potential the most
commonly used is the Kihara (see ref 1 and 6 for more details).
In the Sloan option (ref 1) within the program the adsorption constant
nci
is derived as follows:
4p R w (r ) 2
C ji = exp(- )r dr
kT 0 kT
where R is the cavity radius and r is the distance from the cavity centre.
The experimentally fitted Kihara cell potential
w (r ) is calculated from :
s12 10 a 11 s 4 4 a 5
w (r ) = 2 ze 1 1 (d + d ) - 5 (d + d )
R r R Rr R
........eqn 1
and
1 r a -N r a -N
dN = (1 - - ) - (1 + - )
N R R R R
where N = 4,5,10 or 11 as in eqn 1
z = the coordination number of the cavity
R = the free cavity radius
This model outlined in the Petroleum Engineer's Handbook (ref 4) uses a simplified
fit for the adsorption constant VIZ.
A B
C ji = exp( )
T T
where A and B vary for the gas molecule , the hydrate and the type of cavity.(see
Background to Hydrates)
m H - m1 Dm w (T0, P0 ) T Dhw P Dv
w
= - 2
dT + dP + ln a
RT RT T0 RT P0 RT
where
Dm w (T0, P0 )
is the chemical potential at the chosen reference state with temperature
T0
and pressure
T0
Dhw
is the specific enthalpy difference and
Dvw
is the specific volume difference going from
T0
to T
The models used vary a little in the experimentally determined values for
Dm w (T0, P0 )
,
Dhw
, and
Dvw
. Model details are available within the references quoted.
a is the activity of water within the system. The value of pure water is taken as 1.
When an inhibitor is used the value of a is adjusted to include the inhibition effect.
See Hydrate Inhibition for more details.
16.7.4.3Hydrate Inhibition
With electrolytes the water molecules form a coat of many layer around the ions in
solution.
This destroys the normal liquid crystal structure of water making it more difficult for
the ordered hydrate structure to form.
Both mechanisms result in a lowering of the water activity term a in the hydrate
modelling equation.
m H - m1 Dm w (T0, P0 ) T Dhw P Dv
w
= - 2
dT + dP + ln a
RT RT T0 RT P0 RT
Activity correlations are found in references 1,2 and 7 for the inhibitors supported
16.7.4.4Hydrate Reference List
1) Clathrate Hydrates of Natural Gases by D.S.Sloan :-Marcel Dekker Inc., New York
(ISBN: 0827 99372)
2) Hydrates of Hydrocarbons by Yuri F. Makogon :- PennWell Publishing Company,
Tulsa,Oklahoma
3) Properties of Oils and Natural Gases by K.S.Pedersen,A.Fredenslund and
P.Thomassen :- Gulf Publishing Company.Houston
16.7.5.1Wax Models
Won (ref 1) originally proposed a model for wax formation based on an ideal
solution.The derivation of the basic equation is as follows:
The problem is analysed in terms of a subcooled liquid and a thermodynamic cycle
(see diagrams below). This analysis is outlined more fully in Prausnitz (ref.2).
The fugacity of the solid is equal to that of the solute in liquid and for the system at
position 2 is given by:
f solid = g 2 x2 f 20
................eqn. 1
where
T0
is the mole % solute in the solvent or solubility,
g 2 is the liquid-phase activity coefficient and
f 20 is the standard state fugacity.
if it is assumed that the solvent and solute are very similar making
g 2 =1 and equation 1 becomes
P1( pure _ solid )
x2 =
P2 ( subcooled _ liquid )
with P being the vapour pressure and
x2 now referred to as the ideal solubility
{bmc WONDIAGRAM2.WMF}
The problem can be more generally solved using the thermodynamic cycle shown in
figure 2.
{bmc THERM_CYCLE2.WMF}
f 2s
x2 =
g 2 f 2L
ASSUMPTION 2 It is assumed that the fugacities depend only on the solid forming
component and are independent of the nature of the solvent.
The thermodynamic cycle allows the ratio of the two fugacities to be calculated. The
change in Gibbs free energy going from a to d is given by:
f 2L
D G = RT ln( S )
a ->d f 2 ...............eqn2
In addition the energy change can be written as:
D G = D H - TD S
a ->d a ->d a ->d
Using the thermodynamic cycle a->d is replaced by a->b->c->d . enthalpy becomes:
D H =D H +D H +D H
a ->d a - >b b - >c c ->d
This can be rewritten in terms of the Heat of Fusion(Melting) and the specific heats
in going from temperature T to the triple point.
T Pt t P
dDv
D H = Dh f + DC p dT + T ( )dP - DvdP
a ->d
Tt P
dT P
ASSUMPTION 3 The volume change at the melting point is assumed to be
negligible and these terms are ignored,giving:
T
D H = Dh f + DC p dT
a ->d
Tt
The entropy cycle can be written as:
D H =D H +D H +D H
a ->d a - >b b - >c c ->d
T Pt
DC p dDv
D S = DS f + dT - dP
a ->d T Tt P
dT
ASSUMPTION 3 again the volume change is assumed to be negligible giving
T
DC p
D S = DS f + dT
a ->d
Tt
T
The entropy change at fusion is defined as:
DH f
DS f =
Tt
Substituting the results of the cycle in eqn 2 and rearranging gives the equation
which acts as the fundamental for many wax models:
f 2L DH f Tt Dc p Tt Dc p Tt
ln( S ) = ( - 1) - ( - 1) + ln( )
f2 RTt T R T R T
ASSUMPTION 4 for most materials the melting point line is nearly parallel with the
Pressure axis allowing the triple point temperature to be replaced with the melting
point.
.......4
where
xi
and
xi
are the mole fractions of i in the liquid and solid respectively.
Won simplified this equation by assuming the second and third terms were equal to
zero and the ratio of activity coefficients
gL
( iS )
g i was equal to 1.
This leaves a fairly simply equation which unfortunately exaggerates both the Wax
Appearance Temperature and the amount of wax formed.
si DH f T
K iS L = = exp[ (1 - )]
xi RTt Tmelt
Within the model the required values for Melting Points and Heats of Melting are
taken from the following correlations
20172
Tmelt = 374.5 + 0.02617.M i -
Mi
and
DH f = 0.1426.M iTi m
where
xi
is the molecular Weight of component i
S
= exp[ {(d - d i ) L - (d - d i ) 2S }]
2
gi RT
where
ai
is the molar volume given by :
Mi
vi =
d 2L5
xi
is the molecular Weight of component i and
L
d 25 is the liquid density of the component at 25 degrees C estimated by:
L
d = 0.8155+ 0.6272e - 04M i - 13.06 / M i
25
The paper gives estimates of the solid and liquid solubility parameters
d up to C40
-
d is the average solubility parameter for the respective phase
Within this model the author uses the correlations outlined in his original model for
estimating melting points and heats of melting.
CHUNG ORIGINAL
This model is outlined in reference 5 .
This model is very similar to Won with Sol Params above.The difference lies in the
assumption that the all the species in the solid are very similar and that the activity
coefficient of the solid can therefore be set to 1.
Equation 4 in Won Original above is modified by the introduction of solubility
parameters to be:
SL si DH f T vi - v v
K i = = exp[ (1 - )+ (d - d i ) 2L + ln( i ) + 1 - ( i )]
xi RT Tmelt RT Vm Vm
with
Vm = xi vi
Within this model the author uses the correlations outlined in won original for
estimating melting points and heats of melting
In addition the following correlations are suggested for molar volume and liquid
solubility parameter.
13.06
vi = M i /(0.8155+ 0.6272e - 04M i - )
Mi
and
d iL = 6.993 + 0.781b - 0.049b 2 - 10.235 / b
where
b = ln(M i )
and
T0
is the molecular Weight of component i
CHUNG MODIFIED
This model is outlined in reference 5 .
This model is very similar to Won with Sol Params above.The difference lies in the
correlations listed below:
DH f = 0.9Ti m ( M i0.55 )
vi = 3.8( M i0.786 )
and
d iL = 6.743 + 0.938b - 0.0395b 2 - 13.039 / b
PEDERSEN WAX
This model is outlined in reference 3 .
The model is derived from the simplified version of equation 3 (Wax Modelling) used
by Won i.e..
f 2L - DH f T
ln( S ) = (1 - melt )
f2 RTt T
Substituting fugacity coefficients for fugacities,this equation becomes:
- DH f T
f i = xifi p exp[ (1 + )]
RTt Tmelt
where
x2 is the fugacity of component i in the solid phase
f iL
is the liquid fugacity coefficient of component i
fk
is the solid phase mole fraction of component i
and
p is the pressure
The basis for the model is the presumption that not all the high molecular weight
material can form waxes.
The fraction which is allowed to do so within the model comes from an empirical
relationship :
S total p - pip C
z =zi i [1 - ( A + B - M i).( p ) ]
pi
where
ziS
is the fraction of
total
z i allowed to become wax,
x2 is the C7+ molecular weight
g 2 is the SG of component i
and
r ip
is the SG of an equivalent paraffin given by:
p
r = 0.3915+ 0.0675ln(M i )
i
The component melting points and heats of melting are calculated using
correlations proposed by Won(ref 1)
20172
Ti m = 374.5 + 0.02617.M i -
Mi
and
DH im = 0.1426.M iTi m
16.7.5.3Wax Reference List
Kvalues are the ratio of the mole fraction of component i in the gas yi to the mole
fraction of i in the liquid xi.
The single set covering all separator train will caculate faster but not be as accurate
at lower pressures.
Having a set for each separator is slower but more accurate over a wider range.
K Values can be used to represent complex separation processes or surface
facilities. They will however require periodic update as the plant and the feed
compositions evolve.
K Values can be viewed and produced within PVTp from the Separator Calculation
Analysis Display,.
In addition the K value dialog allows the user to enter,edit import and export K
Values.
Within the IPM suite the K value option is initiated within the Main Options Dialog.
For each defined separator stage there is a K Value for each component.
If multi-stage K values are used separator pressures and temperatures are required
for each stage. If overall K values are used the pressure and temperature of stock
tank conditions should be entered as shown below
*
* Petroleum Experts - PKS Separator K Values Export File
*
*
*Export File Signature
*#PetexPKS
*Export File Version
*#1
*
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! FILE DETAILS !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
* FILE NAME : C:\PVTp_Files\SpeedUpEoS\K Value Test\Heavy Oil.pks
* Exported : Thu Apr 15 13:52:34 2004
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
*
*
*
* Number of Components
*
12
*
* Number of Separators
*
5
* Press(psig) Temp(deg F)
* --------------- --------------
100 176
55 158
10 95
0 85
0 60
*
*
* KVal Stage 1 KVal Stage 2 KVal Stage 3 KVal Stage 4 KVal Stage 5 Component
* ------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- -------------
*
The description of the composition will be displayed in the window title. The critical
volume is the main variable used in the LBC Viscosity Model.The parachor is the
main variable used in calculation of Interfacial Tension. Volume Shift can be
switched on/off from the main options dialog. OmegaA and OmegaB are normally
constants within the equation of state but they become variables when used as
match parameters. Boiling temperature is used as an indicator of the general
characteristics of a component. As such it is used as a key in the creation of various
correlations. Other keys include specific gravity and molecular weight. For example
all three of these key variables are used in the correlation which calculates the ideal
enthalpy of a pseudo component within the EoS DLL.
See also:-
Accentric Factors
Equation of State Model
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
Volume Shift
OmegaA and OmegaB
OPTIONS
The major equation of state options are set within the main options screen of the
individual IPM suite program. Only one set of options is allowed for each system.
Included in the options are:
Equation type: Peng Robinson or Soave Redlich Kwong
Optimisation mode
Volume Shift mode
Definition of path to surface: straight to stock tank, through a separator train,
using K Values
BI Coeffs
Click this button to enter/edit/view the binary coefficients of the fluid composition via
the binary interaction coefficient dialog.
Phase Env
Click this button to calculate and plot the phase envelope for the current
composition.
Import
Click this button to import a fluid composition from a PRP file. This file type can be
exported by the Petroleum Experts PVT program.
Export
Click this button to export the current fluid composition to a PRP file.
Generate
Click this button to generate a table of fluid properties for the current fluid
composition using the EoS selected. A range of temperatures and pressures may be
entered and the properties calculated for each combination of temperature and
pressure. See help for Calculation Range Display. The calculation done is a constant
composition expansion.
Fill in Table
Not all properties used within the composition may be available from the PVT match
source. When this button is clicked the program will try and estimate the missing
properties.This operation is always carried out prior to any equation of state
calculation. This operation makes these automatic selections visible.
Reset
Click this button to delete the current composition.
Properties
Click this button to send the fluid through the defined separator train and determine
its black oil properties and more useful data. See help on Properties Dialog
Target GOR
Click this button to call the Target GOR Dialog. See also help on Options Dialog
OK
This option saves any changes that have been made and closes down the dialog.
Cancel
This option closes down the dialog without saving any changes..
16.7.7.2Composition Dialog (PROSPER)
This dialog is used to enter/edit/view the fluid composition. Called from the PVT
section of PROSPER this dialog allows you to enter the number of components as
well as their names. One can then enter the various properties per component.
There are additional dialogs which can be accessed from this screen.
The critical volume is the main variable used in the LBC Viscosity Model. The
parachor is the main variable used in calculation of Interfacial Tension. Volume Shift
can be switched on/off from the main options dialog. OmegaA and OmegaB are
normally constants within the equation of state but they become variables when
used as match parameters. Boiling temperature is used as an indicator of the
general characteristics of a component. As such it is used as a key in the creation of
various correlations. Other keys include specific gravity and molecular weight. For
example all three of these key variables are used in the correlation which calculates
the ideal enthalpy of a pseudo component within the EoS DLL.
See also:-
Accentric Factors
Equation of State Model
LBC Viscosity Model
Interfacial Tension
Volume Shift
OmegaA and OmegaB
OPTIONS
The major equation of state options are set within the main options screen of
PROSPER. This can accessed by clicking on the Change button. Only one set of
options is allowed for each file.
Included in the options are:
Equation type: Peng Robinson or Soave Redlich Kwong
Optimisation mode
Volume Shift mode
Definition of path to surface: straight to stock tank, through a separator train,
using K Values
Calculation Type
This option allows the user to choose between having all the calculations being done
as the come up with the EoS or by interpolating from a set of stored tables.
Reservoir Temperature
This value is used at various points in the program. Since PROSPER has a phase
fixed within the options, the program checks routinely if this phase setting is valid.
This calculation is done for the reservoir temperature entered here.
Salinity
This value of water salinity is used for all water PVT calculations.
BI Coeffs
Click this button to enter/edit/view the binary coefficients of the fluid composition via
the binary interaction coefficient dialog.
Phase Env
Click this button to calculate and plot the phase envelope for the current
composition.
Import
Click this button to import a fluid composition from a PRP file. This file type can be
exported by the Petroleum Experts PVT program.
Export
Click this button to export the current fluid composition to a PRP file.
Generate
Click this button to generate a table of fluid properties for the current fluid
composition using the EoS selected. A range of temperatures and pressures may be
entered and the properties calculated for each combination of temperature and
pressure. See help for Calculation Range Display. The calculation done is a constant
composition expansion.
Fill in Table
Not all properties used within the composition may be available from the PVT match
source. When this button is clicked the program will try and estimate the missing
properties.This operation is always carried out prior to any equation of state
calculation. This operation makes these automatic selections visible.
Reset
Click this button to delete the current composition.
Properties
Click this button to send the fluid through the defined separator train and determine
its black oil properties and more useful data. See help on Properties Dialog
Target GOR
Click this button to call the Target GOR Dialog. See also help on Options Dialog
OK
This option saves any changes that have been made and closes down the dialog.
Cancel
This option closes down the dialog without saving any changes..
16.7.7.3Options Dialog
This dialog is called from the various options screens within the IPM suite of
programs
PROSPER
GAP
MBAL
Only one set of options are allowed within an IPM suite EoS system.
The main option are made up of:
timestep. The separator composition may be that accumulated from the total
separator train or taken up to a specified stage.
If the latter is selected an edit box appears to designate the final stage.
o GOR
o CGR
o Oil FVF
o Oil API
o Separator Gas Gravity
o Accumulated Gas Composition
o Stock tank oil API
The user can select either a straight flash to stock tank or to send the fluid through a
train of up to 10 separators.
The final option is to replace the separator train with a set of overall or stage K
Values. See K Value help for more information.
These options give the user some control of the stream blending that occurs within
compositional IPM. Component pairs can be taken as selected for blending based
on their NAMES only or on a combination of their NAMES and PROPERTIES. The
property principally considered is the Molecular Weight of the individual
components.
Traditionally when using GAP in compositional mode, it was required that all the
fluids have the same number of components. The blending of the streams was then
done sequentially through the components.
It is now possible to model a situation where there are unequal number of
components in the fluids. The blending of the components would then be performed
based on the option selected in the 'Match Components By' section.
The 'Use Number of Components as Key' option is used in a situation when the
fluids each have the same number of components, but the properties of these fluids
are different. This requires that the each of the components be treated separately in
the combined fluid. In this case, the Use Number of Components as Key must be
switched to 'NO'. This can be further explained with the following example.
Let us say we have three wells producing into the separator. The wells have the
following compositions.
If the 'Use Number of Components as Key' is set to 'YES' the blended stream will
have only three components. If this option is set to 'NO' then the blended stream will
have nine components.
This dialog is called by clicking on the Phase Env.. button within the main
composition display.The envelope is automatically calculated when the display is
initiated. As part of the calculation the program detects the phase of the fluid at
reservoir temperature and displays the result.The mixture critical point is also
calculated and displayed. Please note that some fluids may not have a critical point
within the temperature and pressure range of the calculation. If none is found the
values will be set as undefined.
Plot
Click this button for a graphical representation of the phase envelope at 100 percent
vapour fraction and 100 percent liquid fraction.
Copy to Clipboard
Click this button to send all data to the clipboard. This includes phase envelope and
solid calculation results as well as profile data if it exists
View Profile
An option exists to plot a temperature|pressure profile on the phase envelope plot.
The values can be entered or imported within the Plot Profile Dialog. Whether the
points are displayed can be set by the Show Profile Points combo.
FLUID TYPE
The program can work out the fluid type for the user. This requires a reference
temperature which would normally be the reservoir or layer temperature. This
reference is not always available within the IPM suite, but where it is the value will be
passed up into this display as the Local Reference Temperature. The value can be
changed by the user and the fluid type reassessed by clicking on the Recalculate
Envelope button. Note that any changes made to this temperature will not be
passed back down to the calling program. When the composition dialog is closed
down the value will be lost.
SOLIDS
The program can be instructed to calculate the hydrate formation pressure curve and
the wax appearance temperature of the mixture. The calculations can be initiated by
selecting yes on the appropriate combo box and clicking on the Calculate
Hydrate...Wax button. The hydrate values reported are the the lowest calculated
between Hydrate I and Hydrate II forms. The curve appears on the phase envelope
plot along with a line representing the wax appearance temperature. The effect of
hydrate inhibitors can be found by entering a percentage inhibitor and selecting the
inhibitor type from the combo box provided.
This display can be initiated by clicking on the Plot button within the Phase Envelope
Calculation Dialog.
If a hydrate curve or wax appearance temperature values exist these will appear on
the plot. In addition a set of profile points can be entered or imported which will
To rescale your plot, select the Scales option. You will need to enter new minimum
and maximum values for the X and Y axes.
If you wish to view a particular section of your graph more closely, you can magnify
or zoom in on any portion of the plot. To magnify, first place the plot cross-hair
cursor over the area of interest. Next , press down the mouse left hand button and
keep the button depressed. A rectangle will appear which you can "stretch" or drag
over the area you want to magnify. Release the mouse button and you will
automatically zoom in on the area inside the rectangle. To return to the original plot,
click on Replot.
When selecting the area to magnify, first place the cross-hair cursor on any outside
corner of the box you wish to draw, drag the mouse in the diagonally opposite
direction. When the magnifying rectangle is large enough, release the mouse
button.
This dialog is called from the Phase Envelope Calculation Dialog by clicking on the
View Profile button.
The values entered will appear as curve on the phase envelope plot. If the points fall
within the danger area for hydrates or waxes the curve points change colour.
Export...Import
The profile points can be exported and imported as an ASCII file with the *.pxprof
extension.
The format is a simple table as shown below:
*
* Petroleum Experts - pxprof P T Profile Export File
*
*
*Export File Signature
*#PetexPROF
*Export File Version
*#1
*
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! FILE DETAILS
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
* FILE NAME : C:\Temp\2.pxprof
* Exported : Fri Aug 13 15:42:37 2004
*
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!
*
*
*
* Number of Points
*
60
* Press(psig) Temp(deg F)
* --------------- --------------
36.25 1000
37.5625 1100
39 1200
40.5625 1300
42.25 1400
44.0625 1500
46 1600
48.0625 1700
50.25 1800
52.5625 1900
55 2000
57.5625 2100
60.25 2200
63.0625 2300
66 2400
69.0625 2500
72.25 2600
75.5625 2700
79 2800
82.5625 2900
86.25 3000
90.0625 3100
94 3200
98.0625 3300
102.25 3400
106.563 3500
111 3600
115.563 3700
120.25 3800
125.063 3900
130 4000
135.063 4100
140.25 4200
145.563 4300
151 4400
156.563 4500
162.25 4600
168.063 4700
174 4800
180.063 4900
186.25 5000
192.563 5100
199 5200
205.563 5300
212.25 5400
219.063 5500
226 5600
233.063 5700
240.25 5800
247.563 5900
255 6000
262.563 6100
270.25 6200
278.063 6300
286 6400
294.063 6500
302.25 6600
310.563 6700
319 6800
327.563 6900
*
*
*
*# End of file
*
This dialogue is used to enter the temperature and pressure ranges for the
calculation of fluid parameters from the equation of state.
Enter the lowest temperature required in the From field and the highest in the To
field. Then enter the number of points required. Note that if only one temperature is
required then enter the same value in the From and To field.
Repeat for the pressure.
Then click on the Calculate button to calculate and view the results within the
calculation results display. A row or fluid parameters will be generated for each
combination of temperature and pressure.
This dialog is called from the calculation range display. If results already exist they
will be displayed when the dialog is called.
Note that the results displayed are from a Constant Composition Expansion done on
the selected composition.
Calculate
Click this button to calculate and display the fluid properties in the grid using the
Peng-Robinson equation of state.
Plot
Click this button to display the fluid properties in a plot. Each property may be plotted
against pressure or temperature.
Clipboard
Click this button to display the send all data within the table to the clipboard.
To change the pressure and temperature ranges, click OK to go back to the ranges
dialog.
NOTE
To ensure that the table is useable for interpolation the saturation pressure for each
temperature is automatically calculated and inserted into the results.
The grid is symmetrical. Only one set of values need be entered. Note that IPM only
stores and exports non-zero binary interaction coefficients.
16.7.7.8Properties Dialog
This dialog is called by clicking on the Properties button within the Composition
Dialog.
A typical display looks like this:
Clicking on the More button gives all the data calculated, including compositions for
the stock tank oil and the accumulated gas.
A single composition will only provide a single value of GOR through a defined
separator train. There are applications when other GOR values are required e.g.. in
the production of lift curves. This calculation takes the gas and oil derived from the
fluid and recombines them until it reaches the target value. This calculation is used
automatically at various points within the IPM suite. This display allows the user to
investigate the use of this methodology and if required prepare new fluid
compositions (see Accept Composition below).
Working and Original Compositions
A composition is created within the IPM suite by either a) importing a *.prp file or b)
entering the values into the composition dialog. When this operation is complete the
composition is stored in two places VIZ the working and original versions. At this
point both sets of mole percents are the same. All subsequent IPM EoS calculations
with the exception of the target GOR will be done on the working composition. If a
target GOR is done within IPM the new composition overwrites the working
composition with the calculated version. Holding an original composition ensures that
the program can reestablish the originally entered values. The table within this dialog
shows the working and original compositions as well as the values that have been
calculated using the target GOR Calculate facility. Compositions can be moved
between the two stores using the Copy Original To Working and Copy Working
To Original buttons,
By default, the target GOR calculation uses the original composition as a source of
the gas and oil compositions which are subsequently mixed to the target. This drop
down list allows the user to select either the working or original composition as the
source.
When a new composition has been calculated this button allows the user to
overwrite the working composition with the calculated version. Note that this option is
only available if the composition to be written to is one that can be edited. This would
normally be an input composition within the IPM suite. Compositions which are part
of any results display cannot be edited and as a consequence this button is not
enabled.
OPTIONS
The major equation of state options are set within the main options screen of the
individual IPM suite program. Only one set of options is allowed for each system.If
the calling program is prosper, a Change button will allow the user to go directly to
the options dialog. With the other program the user must go to the programs main
screen and access the options from the requisite menu.
Included in the options are:
Equation type: Peng Robinson or Soave Redlich Kwong
Optimisation mode
The display and entry mode for the dialog can be swapped from GOR to CGR by
selecting the required mode from the show combo box.
There are two methods available to the user. The difference between them lies in
the source of the gas and liquid to be mixed. The option is set for the whole system
within the main options dialog.
Method 1 Use Separator fluids uses the dead oil and accumulated separator gas to
create the mixture.
Method 2 Use fluid from PSAT finds the saturation pressure of the fluid. The
program then flashes just below PSAT to get an oil and gas composition. These are
mixed to achieve the target GOR. It should be noted that this restricts any target that
can be found to the RS of the oil below PSAT and the GOR of the equivalent gas.
Although more restricted, this mixture better reflects the case of an oil entraining gas
cap gas etc. The limits on the GOR target are displayed as the min and max GOR.
A reservoir or layer temperature is required for this method. The PSAT is found at
the entered temperature.
To initiate the calculation, enter a target GOR and click on calculate. If successful
the resulting composition will be displayed. The final GOR will also be calculated and
displayed.
This input allows the user to adjust how accurately the calculation is to be done. The
final value calculated must be less than the entered precision to be successful. Note
that the IPM programs have internal precisions for the Target GOR which are
changed by any entry made in this dialog.
This feature allows the user to investigate the results that can be found using the
three compositions. Select the composition and call the required dialog. The Phase
Env.. button will call the Phase Envelope Dialog while the Properties button will call
the Properties dialog. The latter dialog gives comprehensive information on the
results of a separator calculation using the selected fluid.
There are two methods available to the user. The difference between them lies in
the source of the gas and liquid to be mixed.
Method 1 Use Separator fluids uses the dead oil and accumulated separator gas to
create the mixture.
Method 2 Use fluid from PSAT finds the saturation pressure of the fluid. The
program then flashes just below PSAT to get an oil and gas composition. These are
mixed to achieve the target GOR. It should be noted that this retricts any target that
can be found to the RS of the oil below PSAT and the GOR of the equivalent gas.
Although more restricted, this mixture better reflects the case of an oil entraining gas
See also
Target GOR Dialog
####################################
16.7.8 Plotting
Plots can be called from the Calculation Results Display or the Phase Envelope
Calculation dialog.
A typical results plot is shown below
Two variables can be plotted at the same time. Click on the Variables menu option
to call the Variables Selection dialog.
A typical display would be
To rescale your plot, select the Scales option. You will need to enter new minimum
and maximum values for the X and Y axes.
If you wish to view a particular section of your graph more closely, you can magnify
or zoom in on any portion of the plot. To magnify, first place the plot cross-hair
cursor over the area of interest. Next , press down the mouse left hand button and
keep the button depressed. A rectangle will appear which you can "stretch" or drag
over the area you want to magnify. Release the mouse button and you will
automatically zoom in on the area inside the rectangle. To return to the original plot,
click on Redraw.
When selecting the area to magnify, first place the cross-hair cursor on any outside
corner of the box you wish to draw, drag the mouse in the diagonally opposite
direction. When the magnifying rectangle is large enough, release the mouse
button.
MENU
With SUBMENUS
1) File
2) View
This menu allows the user to adjust what is seen within the display. Clicking on the
menu item will toggle off and on the particular option. The options are stored on a file
by file basis.
3) Fonts...
This bring up the Fonts dialog
4) Redraw
This reinitialises and redraws the entire plot
5) Display
6) Variables
Brings up Variables dialog which allows the user to select the variables to be
plotted
TOOLBAR
This dialog is called by clicking on the above icon or using the display|colours..
menu option within any equation of state plot. This option allows the user to change
the colours used in the plot and set the default for all new composition plots. This
screen allows the user to select the colour for each of the text plot components
listed. First select the colour scheme to be applied to the plot i.e. Colour, Gray Scale
or Monochrome. Next select a plot component by clicking on a name in the list. The
sample panel will show the current colour. Press Change General Colour to bring
up the standard color selection dialog. Choose the colour that you require and press
OK. The sample panel will show your choice.
The two variables plotted can have their colours individually adjusted by clicking on
the Change Plot Colour n button and following the same procedure. The line width
can also be set up on this display . To change a line width press on the required
check box and press Exit. Thicker lines are useful when printing out plots
particularily for Fax use.
Pressing Apply will change the plot without closing the window.
Pressing on Exit will store the options and close down the dialog.
Clicking on Save Colours will save all the colour selections to disk to be applied as
default to all new plots.
This dialog is called by clicking on the above icon or using the display|scales..
menu option within any equation of state plot.
Enter the new scales for x axis or y axis variable 1 or 2 and click on OK.
This dialog is called by clicking on the above icon or using the Fonts... menu option
within any equation of state plot.
This dialog allows the user to select a font for each of the text plot elements listed.
First select a plot element by clicking on a name in the list, then use the Font, Style
and Size combo boxes to choose the text characteristics that you require. An
example of your choice is given in the dialog panel.
Clicking on Exit and Save will change the font in the plot being viewed and close
down the selection window. This change will only last as long as the plot is kept
open.
Pressing Apply will change the plot without closing the window.
Selecting Cancel will close down the display without implementing the changes.
Clicking Save as Defaults will make the change permanent for all plots in the
composition section of the program.
This dialog is called by clicking on the above icon or using the display|labels..
menu option within any equation of state plot.
Enter the labels for x axis or y axis variable 1 or 2 and click on OK.
The *.prp export or import is called from the main EoS composition dialog. This file
format is the main means for transferring EoS data around the Petroleum Experts
IPM suite of programs.
A composition (including binary coefficients and seperator conditions) can be
imported from a PRP file. This file can be created by Petroleum Expert's PVT
program or as an export from any IPM suite program with an equation of state model
enabled.
The file is in ASCII format and an example of the current version is included in this
help.
Warning:-
The prp fomat has been evolving as the options within the IPM suite have
increased. The file format includes a version number which indicates which
options should be read. he program maintains compatibility with old file versions
but some properties or options may not be set.
The file signature #PetexPRP is required as a comment. The program requires
this to identify the file as being the correct type
All data transfers using this format are done in field units only.
No spaces are allowed within the component names
From version 9 only non-zero BICs are exported and Costald Variables have
been added(see example output).
As the file is imported the main equation of state options are compared with those
stored within the *.prp file.
If the values do not match the options compare dialog is loaded and the user is
required to accept or reject the changed values.
The differences between the data sets will be highlighted in red as shown below.
*
* Petroleum Experts - PRP Export File
*
*
*Export File Signature
*#PetexPRP
*Export File Version
*#9
*
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! FILE DETAILS !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
* FILE NAME : C:\PVTp_Files\Samples\EXAMPLE2.prp
* Exported : Mon Dec 04 10:33:57 2006
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
*
*
* Equation Type 0 - Peng Robinson 1 - SRK
0
*
*
*
* Number of Components
*
10
*
*
* Mole Critical Critical Accentric Molecular
Specific Critical Volume Boiling Parachor OmegaA
OmegaB Costald Costald Component
* Percent Temperature Pressure Factor Weight
Gravity Volume Shift Point
Volume Accentric Fact Name
*
* percent degrees F psig lb/lb.mole
Gravity l/kg.mole degrees F
l/kg.mole
* ------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------
*
1
* Only first half of array is exported - values will be copied to second half
*
9 2 0.0272647
*
* Separators T, P
*
3 0
100 500
90 100
60 0
*
* Volume Shift Flag
*
0
*
* Reference Temperature
*
255
*
*# End of file
*
16.7.10Steam Calculations
A set of dialogs are provided to give access to the properties of steam and pure
water. The calculations can be generated directly or in the case of the PVTp
program interpolated from a calculated or imported table.
Clicking on Calculate Range calls the Calculate Range Dialog. This allows the user
to calculate a full range of steam properties for a range of temperatures and
pressures. Clicking on Calculate Single calls the Single Point Dialog. This
calculates the fluid status and properties based on an input of pressure and
enthalpy.
The Interpolate Range option is the equivalent to the Calculate Range above. It is
controlled from the Calculate Range Dialog.
The Import Table button allows the user to load a previously stored ASCII file which
will act as the basis for the interpolation. The equivalent export facility is available
from the Steam Results Dialog.
View Table makes the results used for interpolation visible within the Steam Results
Dialog.
View Inter Results calls the Steam Results Dialog with any results that have been
stored after interpolation.
See also:
Steam Range Dialog
Steam Results Dialog
Steam Single Point Dialog
This dialogue is used to enter the temperature and pressure ranges for the
calculation of steam and pure water properties.
Enter the lowest temperature required in the From field and the highest in the To
field. Then enter the number of points required. Note that if only one temperature is
required then enter the same value in the From and To field.
Repeat for the pressure.
Then click on the Calculate button to calculate and view the results within the
steam calculation results display. A row or fluid parameters will be generated for
each combination of temperature and pressure.
Use this option to generate look up tables. Ensure that the range of temperatures
and pressures will span that required by your application. The range can be split to
allow more values at the bottom end of the pressure range. It is in this region where
values change more rapidly and higher accuracy is required. Clicking on the Default
Table button populates the dialog with the values displayed above. This range is
currently used within Reveal.
See also:
Main Steam Dialog
Steam Results Dialog
Steam Single Point Dialog
This dialog is called from the steam range display. If results already exist they will be
displayed when the dialog is called.
Calculate
Click this button to calculate and display the fluid properties in the grid using the
Peng-Robinson equation of state.
Plot
Click this button to display the fluid properties in a plot. Each property may be plotted
against pressure or temperature.
Clipboard
Click this button to display the send all data within the table to the clipboard.
To change the pressure and temperature ranges, click OK to go back to the ranges
dialog.
When this dialog is called be PVTp more options are available as shown below:
The Export button saves the results as an ASCII file which can be later imported
and used for interpolation.
The Save Table button saves the results internally for use later when interpolating
See also:
Main Steam Dialog
Steam Range Dialog
Steam Single Point Dialog
Select All
Switches on all available columns
Select None
Clears all the selections
OK
Records all selections and returns to the Steam Results Dialog
To initiate a calculation enter a pressure and enthalpy for the fluid and click on
Calculate.
The results above are typical for a solution found in the two phase area. If the
solution is found to be single phase the results will be like those shown below:
See also:
Main Steam Dialog
Steam Range Dialog
Steam Results Dialog
It is assumed that the data to be imported is saved in a text file. It is also assumed
that the data is imported for the tables in PVT section of PROSPER.
1) After clicking on the Import tab, select the particular text file where the data is
saved.
2)
3) When the import file is selected, select the particular File format in which the
data is saved. The following example is for a Comma Separated format.
4)
5) To select a particular column for a Field Name, one can directly click on the
column and this will assign that column to that field.
6)
7) This can also be checked by the column number that is appended to the field
name.
8) Make sure that the units for each column are correctly selected according to
the input data.
10)
11)By selecting continue, PROSPER will update the data in the corresponding
columns in the tables.
12)
17
PROSPER Online Help 831
17.1 Commands
File
Options Screen
PVT
System
Matching
Calculation
Design
Output
Units
Wizards
Help
17.1.1 System
Enter topic text here.
Thirteen inflow options are available. The choice depends upon the available information and the type
of sensitivities that you wish to run. If multi-rate test data is available it can be input so that the
modeled inflow matches the actual measured inflow in the well.
The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be entered for all inflow performance
models, however both the Multi-rate C and n and Multi-rate Jones models can be used to calculate the
reservoir pressure. For multi-layer reservoirs only the temperature is entered as reservoir pressure has
no meaning.
Mechanical/geometrical skin can be either entered or calculated using Locke's, MacLeod's or Karakas
and Tariq's method. Deviation/partial penetration skins can be calculated separately, using the
Cinco/Martin-Bronz or Wong-Clifford approaches.
To select the IPR method click on the arrow to the right of the IPR input field and choose one of the 10
methods available. The technique you select will determine the subsequent IPR screens displayed.
You will only be shown the screens, options and fields necessary for your selection.
The following list of correlations is available for Inflow Performance in GAS and CONDENSATE.
Jones
Forcheimer
Back pressure
C and N
Multi rate C and n
Multi rate Jones
External entry
Petroleum Experts
Hydraulically Fractured Well
Horizontal Well - No Flow Boundaries
Multi Layer reservoir (up to 50 layers and 2 choices of layer model)
Horizontal Well with friction dP loss along the tubing
SkinAide ( due to ELF Aquitaine)
Dual Porosity
Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures
Multi Layer model with pressure loss between layers
Modified Isochronal
Forcheimer with Pseudo Pressure
Multirate Forcheimer with Pseudo Pressure
Skin models
Gravel pack models
Shape factor model
y R -y wf = aQ + bQ 2
Pi P
i = 2 dP
0 Z
NOTE: The a and b parameters for the Pseudo Pressure Forcheimer IPR are not the same
as the a and b parameters used in the pressure squared Forcheimer IPR.
17.1.1.1.1.2 Multirate Forcheimer with Pseudo Pressure
NEW!!!
This IPR is based on the Forchheimer IPR with pseudo-pressure (refer to previous section):
YR2 - Yw2f = a Q 2 + b Q
The a and b parameters are here determined by means of multi-rate tests data.